The primary synopsis of universology and Alwato : the new scientific universal language

\?/,o7?HT??T7fIi

9f iV V

Cornell University
Library

The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031195757

MAY 61950

REMOVAL.

DION THOMAS,

(Formerly of 142 Nassau Street,)

REMOVED TO

141 Fulton an6 20 Ann Streets,

Between Nassau Street and Broadway,
May ist, .871. ^'^'^ yiUBK.

Standard and Rare Books, For Sale, Cheap !

Wiea^'^^

/^ ^^ni^)^^^/^^'^

THE PRIMARY SYNOPSIS

OP

UNIVERSOLOGY

(Pronounced ahl-wa-to),
TBM NEW SCIENTIFIC UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE.

STEPHEN PEARL ANDREWS,

MRMBKR OF TUB AUKRICAN ArADRMV OP ARTS AND ROIRNCKS; OF TlIK AMRRIOAN
KTIISOI.OGIOAL StiOlKTY, KTO.

AUTHOR OF "TlIK SOIKNOR OF 800IRTY," " DISOOVKRI KS IN CIUNESK,'*
"TUB BASlfl OUTLINE OF UNIVKESOLOOY," KTC.

In the beginning was the Wokd, and the Word was with God, and the Word
was God. John 1 : 1. (Text 19, p. 17.)

NEW YOEK :
DION THOMAS, 141 FULTON STEEET.

1871.

Entered according to Act of Congress, in tlie year 1871, by

STEPHEN PEAEL ANDREWS,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.

Stereotyped by Smxn & MoDotjoai,, 82 Beekjnan Street.

TO

MRS. B. THOMPSON,

ZS Tf.ES'PECTJi'irZZY 3)£;DJC:!iT£;'I>

PREFACE.

"The Basic Outline of Uniyersology " has been
annoTinced by my publisher to appear earlier than
the present date. Eeconsideration and the advice
of scientific friends in whose judgment I have great
confidence have resulted in some change in the order
of publication.

It is urged on me by my advisers, who have read
and who express their great interest in the success
of the larger work, that, while I have regarded it as
an Introduction merely to the Science of Universology,
it needs, itself, to be introduced ; and not alone by Intro-
ductions which speak about the science, descriptively,
(" The Basic Outline " is itself prefaced by several
sucK), but by a smaller work, less technical and
elaborate, giving, nevertheless, some real insight into
the nature and principles of the science itself, and
some intelligible illustrations of the working of those
principles, upon so limited a scale as to be accessible
by the whole intelligent pubUc.

It is urged that the larger work, by its bulk and
expensiveness, and by the greater difficulty which
attaches to its more technical, and consequently less
popular form, will be necessarily restricted to a
smaller public; that it may even incur neglect, if
not misapprehension and a temporary unpopularity,

IV PREFACE.

from the prevalence of new terms and methods of
treatment, unless a previous interest is secured, on
the part of readers, by a specimen, at least, of the
subject first presented in a simpler and less laborious
way. The very great advantage of the technicalities
of the science, as contained and used in " The Basic
Oiitline," is not for a moment questioned ; but it is
again urged, that an appetite for a new article of
mental food, as well as in the case of physical nutri-
ment, must first be cultivated, to some extent, before
the people will appreciate, and take the trouble to
learn to use, the machinery, however simple in itself,
by which the acquisition and preparation of such
food are to be facihtated.

I have yielded to the force of these arguments,
and shall delay the publication of " The Basic Out-
line of Universology " until after that of this Pre-
amble, or " Synopsis," which has been prepared with
a view to meet the special demand so laid upon me,
with what success the readers of this little prelim-
inary work must judge. Brunei, when he had built
"The Great Eastern," found nearly as much diffi-
culty in launching her as he had met and overcome
in the construction. If, by the judicious advice of
friends, or by, in a word, the use of all appropriate
means, I can succeed in projecting this new science
on the world in such a manner as to secure its
earliest and most favorable acceptance, a slight
change of programme, which postpones, for a little,
the publication of a particular work, already electro-
typed and in proofs, will be of small moment ; and

PREFACE. V

the subscribers for " The Basic Outline " will, I
doubt not, excuse the temporary disappointment.

Considerable preparation has already been made,
in the public mind, for such favorable reception of
the New Science, by the publication of the following
card, signed by gentlemen who are at once recog-
nized as among those most competent to form a just
opinion upon a subject of this nature :

" UNIVERSOLOaY."— A CARD.

The undersigned having listened to Mr. Stephen Pbael
Andrews's preliminary statement of " Universology," and been
impressed with the importance and originality of the new ocien-
tific claim, as well as with the profound research implied in it, do
cordially concur in urging the publication of the work at the ear-
liest possible date.

Paekb Godwin.

Isaac Lewis Pbet, Prin. N. Y. Inst, for Deaf and Dumb.

F. A. P. Babnabd, President of Columbia College.
Prof E. L. Youmans.

Gbobqe Opdtkb.
Eev. 0. B. Fkothingham.

Ch:aiii.!!:s P. Daly, President of the American Geo-
graphical and Statistical Society.
Rev. Benj. N. Maetin, Professor, New York University.
C. GoBPP.

E. R. Straznickt, Assistant Librarian, Astor Library.
Chas. F. Tatlor, M.D.
Frederic R. Marvin.
Geo. Wakbman.
N. B. Emerson, M.D.
Trrirs Munson Coan, M.D.

J. West Nevins, late U. S. Vice-Consul at Genoa, Italy.
John H. Staats.
T. B. Wakeman.

G. W. Madox.

Tl PEEFACE.

I cut from the " Washington Chronicle," of Janu-
ary 13, 1870, the following very brief and lucid q,ppre-
ciation of the fundamental character of Universology.
Emanating from another source, it is, perhaps, better
adapted to give, in a few words, a first proper im-
pression of the whole matter, than any thing which
I may have said, or may be able to say, on the
subject :

" Univeesology — Development of a Wew Sciencb.
T-Mr. Stephen Pearl Andrews, of New York, claims
to have discovered a new science, which he calls
Universology, and which is so inclusive in its scope
as to exhibit the fundamental laws which pervade
and govern the universe. These laws, he contends,
are few in number, but infinite in their application,
and so modified by the necessities of the various
domains of thought, being, or action, in which they
manifest themselves, as to present myriads of phe-
nomena apparently unrelated to each other. There
is, according to Mr. Andrews, really but one science,
what are now called sciences being merely sub-
sciences, or so many different manifestations of one
universal law, varied in its application according to
the sphere of its operations.

" Just as the mathematician recognizes all the ap-
plications of arithmetic to be merely different ways,
for different purposes, of adding numbers to or sub-
tracting them from each other ; just as he sees in the
pair of scales, the pair of scissors, and the propul-
sion of a boat by an oar or a paddle, precisely the
same principle, the lever, but so necessarily modi-

FHEFACE. Til

fied in its application, in each case, as to be unrecog-
nized by the superficial observer, so Mr. Andrews
claims that all the so-called sciences, abstract and
concrete — and, if we understand him, all arts, all
things, are inter-related — are, in fact, but so many
varied manifestations of one Supreme Law, or God's
Will. And it is this law and its boundless opera-
tions that Mr. Andrews claims to have discovered
and is about to publish. Such a discovery, if really
made, would so far transcend any past achievement
of man, and seems altogether so doubtful, that the
most sanguine progressive scientist might well be
excused for receiving the announcement with an
incredulous smUe, were it not for the fact that the
New York papers contain a highly complimentary
card, signed by Professor Toumans, President Bar-
nard, of Columbia OoUege, Judge Daly, ex-Mayor
Opdyke, Parke Godwin, and a dozen other equally
eminent men, who have partially investigated Mr.
Andrews' claims, calling upon him to publish his
discoveries."

It is evident that the discovery of Universology
will not only exert a revolutionary influence on the
positive body of systematized knowledge in the
world, as such, that is to say upon science itself, but
equally upon the Art of Communicating Scientific
Knowledge ; that it will, in other words, reconstitute
the whole business of Education. It will estabhsh
Unity of System in the Educational Domain, for the
world, and will be to the rapid extension of learning
what the rail-road is for travel, and the telegraph for

vm PBEFACE.

the transmission of news. The future students of
Science, instead of coming up laboriously to some
imperfect mastery of the whole subject through the
details of two or three special Sciences, will begin in
the knowledge of Universal Principles, and will come
down upon the whole substrate mass of Scientific
specialties from a previously attained height of Uni-
versal Scientific knowledge equally applicable to
every domain. This subject is too large to be more
than alluded to in this place, but its importance
cannot fail to be appreciated. The masses of the
people, in all countries, in the future, instead of
arriving at a mere knowledge of the rudiments of
education, will possess, in an astonishing degree,
the theory and details of all the sciences. Science
will become popularized beyond any conception of
the possibility of such a result which has prevailed
hitherto. The whole people will enjoy the eleva-
ting influences and the new powers conferred by
literary and scientific acquisitions vastly beyond
what is now meant by " a liberal education."
/ The discovery of this new Centrahzing and Uni-
tary Science will demand the founding of a special
Univeesity, vastly larger, in design, than any now or
ever heretofore extant, devoted to the promulgation
of Universal Principles, to the introduction of this
New System of Education for the Planet, and to
serve as the nucleus of a New Universal or Planetary
Government, which should accompany the Unification
of the Science and that of the Language of the

PEEFACE. IX

Human Race. The wealth of the world may he legiti-
mately levied upon for that end.

The classicallj educated reader may be impatient
at times witli tlie pains-taking explanation of the
meaning of terms whicli he will find in my writings ;
but I write, equally, for the non-classical ; and I know
how necessary and grateful such aids of the under-
standing often are to them.

S. P. A.

New Yoke, Fdmiary, 1870.

N'OTICE TO THE HEADER :— DIRECTIONS AND
ABBREVIATIONS.

The Paragraphs are numbered in this work,
throughout, for ease of reference. The figures
(alone) inserted in parentheses, in the body of the
work, refer to the Paragraphs of the work itself.
The . letter t. means Text or Paragraph, Preceded
by the letters B. O., the figures refer to " The Basic
Outline of Universology," (t, to the Text, c. to the
Commentary, and a, to the Annotation of that work.)

1. Old and New Technical TerminaMons.

-ism, as a termination, denotes a Principle, as
un-ism, meaning the Abstract Principle or Spirit of
ihe Number One, ^Lat. Un-ms, One.)

-ismal is the adjective termination derived from
-ism, as vn-ismcd, meaning related to un-ism.

-ismus is the termination of a new or derived sub-
stantive, meaning The Eealm or Domain in which
the Principle (-ism) prevails, as vm-ismus, the Eealm
or Domain of Things in which un-ism prevails ; -ismi
is the Plural ending.

-oid, or -oidal signifies liJce or resembling; nearly
equivalent to the uneuphoneous English ending -ish.

2. Abbreviations.

Eng. for English ; Fr. for French ; Gr. for Greek ;
Ger. for German ; Ital. for Italian ; Lat. for Latin;
Span, for Spanish ; Of. (Lat. confer, from conferre) is
used to mean compare.

The sign = d. motes that the ideas compared by the
sign are equivalent one to the other.

YOCABULART

Of Foreign, Unusual, and New Terms, not including, however,
Words properly belonging to the New Language, for which see
Body of the Work. See also the Index, for Texts where some of ,
these, and some proper Alwaso terms are further defined. -Ism,
■ismus, darned, and -old are not Alwaso endings, but ATiglioised ter-
minations, from Latin and Greek sources.

Ad lisrnnir, (Latin), freely, witliout constraint ; at will.

Anthoobite, (Gr, aner, andr-os, man, and giurie, woman), having the two
sexes, male and female (blended, as of the two parents in the child.)

Abtism, the Spirit or Principle of Art — Gomposite, gently modulated,
curving, gracefid, as HogartlCs Line of Beauty.

Artismai,, (Adj.), relating to Artism.

Abtibmus, the Domain or Eealm of Being, Evolution, or Progress, in
which the Spirit or Principle of Art, or of that which is Cognate or Analo-
gieal with Art, predominates or prevails.

Abtistio Modipioation, the graceful deviation from Primitive Outlay,
or Type-Forms, in process to completion, in which Nature, like any other
artist, indulges and delights. (See B. 0. Index.)

Abtoloqt, the Science of the Artismufl, or of that Third (or Tertiary)
Department of Being, or Stage of Evolution, in which Abtibm, the Spirit
or Principle of Art (or of that which is analogous with Art) preponderates.

B.

Bi-TEHTAOBiA, a figure having six (twice three) Legs, or Liniar exten-
sions, at Eight Angles to each other.

D.

DuiSM, The Second Vhiversall'rmciple- (in Natural Order; the First in
Logical Order), derived from and related to the Number Two.
DursMAL, (Adj.), relating to Duism.
DmsMUB, the Domain or Eealm in which Duism governs or prevails.

E.

EoHOSOPHisT, a Positivist, in the enlarged, un-techni6a1 sense; not
meaning, especially, a disciple of the Comtean School. (B. O. Index.)

Xll TOCABULARY.

Endo-lexio, (Greek), within tlie word, interior to the oonstraotion of
the individual word.
Et rAssof, (Latin), and at varvmi fomte.

F.

FuifDAifENTA, (Latin), plural ot fwadamentmm.

Fnin>AM£irauM, (Latin), foundation, basiB ; whatever is at bottom.

H.

HTBEiDiTr, Lingual, the mixing of different languages, as in the com-
position of words ; Sociology from the Latin eocims, a oompamion, and
Greek logoa, A disoodbse, etc.

I.

Idiomatibm, the Spirit of Idioms, or of Differentiation in liangnage of
Speech.

Iw BiTU, (Latin), in its natural position ; unremoved.

M.

MoDELio, adjective from model ; serving as a Model or Pattern.

N.

Natdeism, the Spirit or Principle of Nature — irregular, free, chaotic, etc.

Natdbisical, (Adj.), relating to Naturism.

NATUsisune, the Domain or Bealm of Being, Evolution, or Progress, in
which Naturism, the Spirit or Principle of Nature, or of that which is
cognate or otMlogiad with Nature, predominates or prevails.

Nattboloot, the Science of the Naturismus, or of that Primitive De-
partment of Being, or Stage of Evolution in which Natdbism, or the
Spirit or Principle of Nature, preponderates— /r««, absolute, spontaneous,
i/rregiitar ; characterized by sicelUng rotundities, deviations ; or by odd and
exceptional manifestations ; as of Circles ; Sreaks, Spurs, etc. (See Index.)

o.

Obibntation, the fixing of the Cardinal (and other) Points of the Com-
pass by a primary reference to the East (the Orient.)

p.

Pathaonomio Lines, Lines of Direction in accordance with what the
mental energies of the Brain act or express themselves — Buchanan.

Plumb-oenteeinq, the fixing, as by a Plumb-line, of the Central Per-
pendicular.

Pbopbidm, (Lat. own or pbopbbty), that which is essential to the self-
hood: tinderived; personally distinctive, as essential property — Swedeuborg.

Pboto-peagmata (Greek ; literally Eiest Things) ; Entioal or Ontological

VOCABULARY. Xlll

Natural Elements, from whioli all ttings are composed ; as Substance,
Form, Space, etc. ; distinguished from FmiroiPLZs, which are Mathemat-
ical and Logical, as Uhism, Duism^ etc.

PuKOTUM ViT^, (Lat. Point of Life), The Centre of Vitality ; a Vital
Centre.

s.

SoiEHTio, relating to Science.

SoiENTisM, the Spirit or Principle of Science — regular, exact, preoise,
etc.

SoiximsiiAi,, (Adj.), relating to Seientism.

SoiBNTisMtis, the Domain or Eealm of Being, Evolution, or Progress, in
which Seientism, the Spirit or Principle of Science, or of that which is Cog-
nate or Analogical with Science, predominates or prevails.

SoiENTOLOGT, the Science of the Scientismus, or of that Secondary De-
partment of Being, or Stage of Evolution, in which Soibntibm, the
Spirit or Principle of Science (or of that which is analogous with Science)
preponderates — strict, legal, and lam-abiding ; foiocai., regular; character-
ized by straigMness, a^icurcL&y, and adjustment; as of StraigM Lines,
ParaUelisma, JSectarigularities, Sqtiares, Cubes, etc. (See Index.)

Sesquism, (Lat. sesqui, onb-and-a-half), the Principle which interme-
diates between Unism and Duism, and is the Ghostly Centre and Spirit of
Trinism (t. 21i.)

T.

Taotus Ebcditub, (Latin), the learned touch ; delicacy of touch or
handling acquired by practice.

Theahbeio, (Gr. Theos, God, and anlr, andr-os, man), jointly including
the Divine and the Human, or God and Man, (and, by license. Angels,
Spirits, and all Eational Existences, proven or assumed), as contrasted
with the Lower Cosmos.

TEnfisM, The Third Universal Principle (in both Natural and Logical
Order; First in order of observation, or the most Ostensible, t. 175),
derived from and related to the Number Thbee.

Teinibmal, (Adj.), relating to Trinism.

Teinismus, the Domain or Kealm in which Trinism governs or pre-
vails.

u.

Uhism, The Mrst Utmersal Principle (in Natural Order), derived from,
and related to the Number Onb.
Unismai., (adj.), relating to Unism.

Unismos, the Domain or Eealm in which Unism governs or prevails.
Unismi, etc., Plural forms for Unismua, etc.
Univebsoloqioal, relating to Universology.

XIT VOCABUIiABY.

Univebsolooioallt, after the method of Universology ; or in ncoordance
with Universology.

UmvEBaoLOSY, the Science of the Universe ; the Science of the Whole,
as distinguished from the Special Sciences of the Parts.

V.

Veebum, the Latin for " Word " in English, and " Logos " in Greek ;
Bee Logos ; has important analogy with the Verb, in Grammar.
Vrr^ PUNCTUM ; see punctum vitae.
VooALnr, the Vowel quality, property, or element, in Speech.

w.

" WoED," as " Ferium," or Zogos, which see ; in the Swedeahorgian
sense, The Soriptmea.
WoED-BuiLDiNG, the Etymologicsl Composition of words.

z.

Zebo, The NirngM or Aught of Mathematics or Number; but, ualverso-
logically, the Analogue of Nothing, or the Kantian Category of Negaium,

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

TiTtE-PAQE • 1

Pbefacb iii_ix

Notice to Reader, aud Abbbbtiationb x

VOOABTILART xi-XUi

Table or Contents xv

Condensed Statement of Method xvi

Intboduction ■ 1

CHAPTER I,

PkELIMINART DlBOROnNATIONB AND DEFINITION^ : OBJECTIONS ANSWEBED 17

CHAPTER n.
Pbimitive Distbibtjtion of the Univbese 31

CHAPTER in.
Fuetheb DisTBiijuTioN of the Uniteese. Language, as an Epitome
of theUnivbesb, Disteieuted 62

CHAPTER rv.
Inheebnt Mbaningb of the Elements of Language 68

CHAPTER V.
Justification of the Assignment (as made in Chaptees III and
IV) OF the Meanings of the Elements of Language 76

CHAPTER VI.

DlSOEEMINATION OF THE POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE ; ThE ChAOTIC AND

The Obdeelt ; The Homogeneous and The Hbtbeoqeneous ; With
OTHER Fundamental Ontologioal Biffeeences ; and "with the

COERESFONDINQ LiNGUAL AND ALPHABETICAL CLASSIFICATIONS 90

CHAPTER Vn.

Method and Illustbations of Alwatoni Word-Bdilding 106

CHAPTER Vin.
Continued Exposition of the Principles and Method op Alwaso

"woed^uilding 12^1

CHAPTER IX.

Special Consideeation of The Aesteact and The Concrete 136

CHAPTER X.
Ee-statement and Expansion of the Classification of the Realms
OE Domains of Being ; with theib Namingb in the Terminations

-10, -so, AND -TO 149

CHAPTER XI.
Special and Technical Instances of the Composition of Alwaso

WoBDS. Illusteation OF Alwaso Geammatical Steuctuee 158

CHAPTER Xn.

Final RiSsume of the Subject 170

Appendixes pp. 180-201 ; Index pp. 203-221

CONDENSED STATEMENT OF METHOD.
(The Universological.)

1. Eadical Analysis, down to Prime Elements, of
each Sphere, and so, of all Spheres, of Being ; as of
Number, Form, Matter (Chemical), Speech, etc.

2. Identification (with each other), by Echo of
Sameness, (which is Correspondence or Analogy), of
the Prime Elements of All spheres of Being.

3. Ideal and, thence, Practical Constructions (Scien-
tific and, thence, Artistic ') from the Prime Elements
(in Nature) ; in Oo-obdinate Radiations from the
same centre of Virtual Identity ; — the Logos or God-
lilce Centre of Abstract Truth.

4. The Choice of a Modelic or Guiding Sphere,
and Range of Development or Construction, in which
the Logos or Pure Eeason (Lat. " verhum," " The
Word ") is most conspicuous ; which Guiding SpTiere
is Language, the Prime Elements in which are con-
tained and summed up in The Alphabet.

5. A New Cardinary (or Transcendental) and
Transcendent Importance conferred on Phonetic
Analysis, and the Study of Language, and especially
of the true or Universe Alphabet of Human Speech,
and of Alwaio, the New Scientific Universal Lan-
guage ; — ^in a word, the Ee-installation and Renewed
Glorification of the Acquisition of the Alphabet (our
A, B, C, in a New and Higher sense), as the Begin-
ning of All perfect Learning, and of the Supreme
Practical Power of the Human Race ; — with the found-
ing of a University to promulgate this learning.

Or, in short :

1. Analysis down to Elements, 2. Comparison of
Elements, 3. Constructive Combination of Elements,
4. Illustrative Model.

' Up to Universal Societary Organization and Government, tke
Supreme Art.

INTRODUCTION.

1. An effort is made, in the bcxJy of this work, to
give a very incipient, inductive, and simple presenta-
tion of the newly discovered Science of the Uni-
verse. It is thought, however, that it wUl not be
inappropriate to make in this Introduction a some-
what more formal Scientific Statement of the general
character of Universology.

2. There are, it is discovered, only Three Fundon
mental Peinciples in the Universe. These are prop-
erly named Unism, Dtjism, and Temism, because
they are derived from, and stand definitely related
to, the numbers One, Two, and Three, respectively.
( Unus, Duo, and Tres are the Latin words for One,
Two, and Thbee, and furnish the namings for these
Three Primordial Principles.)

3. It is, however, convenient to speak, at times, of
other special aspects of Being as Principles, but these
will be all found to be mere Branchings of one or
another of the Three Basis Principles just stated.

4. The first two of these three Principles, Unism
and DuiSM, crop out and reappear under many
forms, and, in the absence, heretofore, of any suf-
ciently compendious Generalization, they have re-

2 INTEODUCTION.

ceived a variety of namings, thus : Unism is called
Unity, Sameness, Centralizing or Centripetal Tend-
ency, Gravitation, Arrival, Conjunction, Thesis or
Synthesis, Integration, Combination, Contraction,
Generality, Simplicity, etc., etc. It is the tendency
to unite, or towards Unity, or the manifestation of the
presence or results of that tendency, in thousands
of modes, in every sphere of Being.

5. DuiSM is called. Diversity, Difference or Variety,
Decentralizing or Centrifugal Tendency, Eepulsion,
Departure, Separation, Antithesis, Analysis, Dif-
ferentiation, Diffusion, Expansion, Speciality, Com-
plexity, etc., etc. It is the tendency to disparting or
dividing, or the manifestation of the presence or re-
sults of that tendency, in thousands of modes, in
every sphere of Being. By its nature, it not only
departs from the Unism, but it also bifurcates or di-
vides, in departing, into Two (or more) Branches, like
the Tines of a fork ; and, in aU senses, manifests an
inherent aUiance with Plurality, and PEnuiAErLT or typ-
ically with the number Two.

6. Teinism is the Principle symbolized by the
Totality of Being, or of any particular being. It is
compounded of Unism and Duism as its Factors,
Constituents, or Elements. Hence it is a Cardinated
or Hingewise Principle, Entity, or Manifestation, as
between the handle of the fork, which is One, on
the one hand, and the Tiaes of the fork, which are
Two (or moie), on the other hand. Trinism is, there-
fore, the Type or Eepresentative of the whole Fork,
or other Compound and Eesultant Object, and, so of

INTEODXrCTION, d

All CoNCEETE or Beal Being — Unism and Duism
being Abstract Elements of Being merely, or, as it
were, Parts not united in any whole. (The Latin
Cardo means a hinge, hence we have Cardinal, Oar-
dinated, and, finally, Caedinism, for the Hinging-
Principle.) ■

7. For this Compound Principle, Trinism (it the
term Compound is permissible in respect to a Prin-
ciple), there is not only no such multiplicity of nam-
ings as there is for Unism and Duism (4, 5), but
there is, on the contrary, an almost complete deficit
of any naming whatsoever, other than in this new
Technicality of Universology, Trinism itself ; this
Hinging Complexity, which is the Type or Plan of all
Beal Existence, being so subtle as to have, in a great
measure, escaped observation. The " Synthesis " of
Fichte and Hegel, as differing from " Thesis," means,
however, virtually Trinism. (B. O. t. 380.)

8. This is, then, the first statement of strictly Uni-
versal and Exhaustive BrinMples, in Science. The im-
portance of the discovery which has led to the pos-
sibility of formulating such a statement will gradually
appear. As these same Principles recur, like an
echo, in every department of being, and consequently,
in all the sciences, simply disguised by superficial dif-
ferences, it results that there exists a Grand Under-
lying Unity of the Sciences ; that there is, in fine, but
one Science, of which the Special Sciences are merely
branches or special manifestations. TJiis One Science
is Univebsology. It is based on Universal Analogy,
or the Universal System of Occult Correspondences,

4 INTEODUCTION.

which results, in tarn, from this constant re-echoing,
but iu new and specific relations, of the same three
Primitive Principles, (Unism, Duism, and Trinism),
throughout aU Domains. (62, ).

9. The first and simplest action of the human
mind, when it begins to attend, is governed by the
perception of Analogy ; but as the Law of Analogy
is not then understood, the result is a riot of the
imagination, and a total want of the spirit of scien-
tific exactitude. Thus we may suppose some early
speculator, fascinated by the idea of a natural har-
mony of numbers, affirming that there must be 24
chemical elements because there are twenty-four
hours in the day (12.) This loosely generalizing
method of reasoning was The Anticipatory Method in
Science (improperly dignified as " Deductive "). In
the technicaMties of Universology it is strictly de-
scribed as The Unismal Stage of the Scientific
Mental Evolution ; (allied in a variety of senses with
Primality and the Number One.)

10. The Baconian or Inductive Scientists, rightly
disgusted and repelled by such vague guessing in the
name of Science, instituted the Method of exact ob-
servation, which now prevails in the scientific world,
and which has led to such grand results ; but which
has also the bad effect of making of 'our Scientific
men, for the most part, mere Specialists, in a great
degree incapable of any broad or generalizing idea,
and even somewhat so of applying their own attri-
bute of precision in any other than the exact direc-
tion in which they may have adjusted the tube of

INTEODUCTION. 6

their mental microscope. As a natural result of their
revolt against the first vague and unscientific uses of
Analogy, they have gone to the opposite extreme,
and have become the Gradgrinds of Science, abound-
ing in facts, but alike destitute of any artistic or
constructive idea in arranging or disposing of their
facts, and oblivious of any underlying and deeper
Law which has originated the facts and guided in
their distribution. The Stage of Scientific Develop-
ment here described is the Inductive Stage. With no
knowledge of Universal a priori Laws, but close, pa-
tient and exact in isolated spheres of inquiry, and with
an immense array of scientific successes at its back,
the glory and glare of its triumph somewhat ob-
scures to the devotees of this school the utter want
of coherence, or of any spiiit of systematic Unity in
their fragmentary pursuits. (Technically this is the
Ascending Wing of the Duismal Stage of the Scien-
tific Mental Evolution ; alHed in a variety of senses
with Sequence or Secondism and the number Two.)

11. At length, the impulse of broader and pro-
founder thought induces us, as seekers after Unity of
System in the Universe, to recur to the idea of
Universal Underlying Principles of Analogy, carrying
back to the inquiry, now, for the first time, the Spirit
of Inductive Precision borrowed from the Second
Stage, so modified as to apply to this new field of
investigation ; to seek by positive discovery for the
revelation of those Laws, and for the Serial method
of their development, making of them a veritable
fountain-head of all Special Laws, a spheral expan-

6 INTRODUCTION.

sion of trutli crossing,all the lines of existing knowl-
edges, and combining them, as levels cross perpen-
diculars, or as chords cross and unite various radii of
a circle, and so as thereby to exert a new and
regulative influence over all the future achievements
of mind. Siuih a discovery is now made and constitutes
Universohgy. Analogy so understood, is the Anti-
podes of Analogy as first vaguely intuited, and to
which the Inductive Scientific World so properly
opposed itself. But, nevertheless, it is peculiarly
liable to be confounded, at the first blush, with the
earher and imperfect method, and, indeed, will con-
tinue to be so, until thorough investigation shall
have dissipated this erroneous impression. It will
be supposed that the same objections lie against it as
to that earliest and simplest stage of scientific rea-
soning, from which it is, however, only more remote than
the Second or Inductive Stage itsdf. It is, indeed,
merely the larger, and, as it were, the final appHca-
tion of the Inductive Principle, culminating in the
estabhshment of a Legitimate Universal Deductive
Method, in aid of, while yet, in part, transcending
Induction.

12. (This new Stage of Science is technically the
Descending Wing of the Duismal Stage of the Scien-
tific Mental Evolution lapping over upon the Trinis-
mal or Integral Method and governing it, as Induc-
tion arose, at the other extreme, out of the Unismal
Stage. B. O. c. 49, t. 136.) This Phase of Science
is new, and can only be rightly judged of by those
who make themselves competent, by the specific study

INTKODUCTIOM. 7

of Universology itself. The Scientific Men of the
Fractional Duismal Stage (the Existing Scientific
world) are, for the most part, no better prepared to
criticise Universology, than the intelligent public at
large ; and, in respect to prejudice, they are far less
so. The life-long habits of a mind bent persistently
in another direction wiU require some time to re-
adjust themselves to a system of thought claiming
to be as much in advance of their stage of Scientific
evolution as theirs is in advance' of that with which
they will tend, and perhaps in some cases endeavor,
to confound it.' The captains of sailing craft,

^ I commit no breacli of confidence by stating tbe views of a
distinguislied and leading scientist on this subject as tbey were
delivered to me in the course of conversation, and as they have
been, in part, published by himself, passim, in his writings. Some
five or six years ago, and when the discovery of Universology was
far less advanced than at present, I called on Frof Louis Agassiz
to request him to listen to some preliminary statement, and to
examine certain papers and diagrams in relation to the new
science. He had been aware, in part, for some years pf the nature
of my pursuits, and on other but related subjects had taken a very
kindly interest in my labors.

On this occasion he listened just long enough to ascertain the
nature of my request' and claims, when he declined to enter upon
the subject any farther, saying in substance as follows: I believe in
the existence, in the nature of things, of just such a science as you
claim to have discovered ; and in this I differ from most scientific
mer who seem as yet to have no conception of Unity of Law, and
who would therefore regard your whole pretension as Utopian.
Farther than this, I believe, that we are, just in this age, on the
verge of making the discovery ; and that somebody will make it.
Whether you have it, or not, I am, of course, unable to say. The
presumption is strongly against any individual claimant. To

8 INTBODirCTION.

would, as a class, have been the last persons, to
comprehend or approve of a scheme for navigating
the ocean by steam. When, for example, Universol-
ogy shall be found to affirm that there are at least
strong scientific presumptions and potent scientific

determine the point would require extensive and critical examina-
tion. That I am not prepared to give, — or, rather, not until your
hook is feirly printed and laid before me in that shape. Nor do I
know that I am competent, or any more competent than any intel-
ligent man, to judge of it. Indeed, I doubt, whether, if you have
all you claim, the Scientific men, so-called, wiU be the first to ap-
preciate it. We are, he added, all intense specialists, and when the
Unitary Science comes in the world, it will be something so
entirely aside from our fixed habits of thought that I think it will
find its first appreciators, probably, among men of enlarged and
general cultiire, rather than among Specialists in Science.

What, then, I asked, am I to do ? Is there no presiding Scientific
body competent and prepared to render a verdict on my labors 1
What of the French Academy ? To these questions he replied : If
you have what you think you have, God help you I Ton must
work along as Christ did, and find, first, one disciple here and one
there, from all classes; from, most likely, what scientific men
would call ' the common people 1 ' There is no body of Scientific
men on earth competent or rea4y to enter upon such an investiga-
tion, and as to the French Academy, they have had a by-law stand-
ing for forty years which would prohibit them from even enter-
taining the consideration of the subject.

We are, he repeated, all intense specialists. My own son is
laboring somewhat in your direction, [the Mathematias of Zoology,
a preeminent branch of XJniversological Science], and I decline
even to look at his diagrams. I confine myself to the merely
Observational study of a small branch of zoology, and have more
than I can possibly do. Yon will find all the rest of us [Specialists]
in the same fix, and the most difficult people in the world to call off
to look at any thing new, and not of our specialty. There, he

INTEODUCTION. 9

reasons for believing that 64 is a Typical Number, by
which the distribution of Chemical Elements, along
■with that of many other things, has been regulated
by Nature, and that probably the final number of
Elements will not deviate greatly from this scale, the
rigid inductionist will be prone to confound the
statement, at once, with the rhapsodic guess of the
early and ignorant speculator who should have as-
sumed that there must be 24 elements because there
are 24 hours in a day (9) ; and, if induced to examine
the grounds of the new statement until otherwise
he might concede its probability, he falls upon an-
other objection, namely, that the number of elements
even now known is not exactly 64, but is only 63, or
is already 67, or some other proximate nunjber.
To this the Universological answer is, that,
the Law in Concrete Spheres, like this, is Prox-
imate Accuracy, and that Absolute Accuracy belongs
only to Abstract Spheres ; that there is in Nature,
OvEELAPPiNG, Maeginal Impeeeection (See " Basic
Outline ") and other modifying Principles which it is,
in part, the business of TJniversology to point out ;
so that the very terms of the question can only be

added, is where we are ; we may aJl go to the tad place for it ; but
there is just where we are.

Of course, Prof. Agassiz, in what he said of himself was true
only in respect to the TiaMt of his life, and not at all so in respect
to the caliher of his mind, or the broader impulsions of his taste
even. His strong drift towards Generality and Universality of
thought is attested by his writings despite of his conscientious
fidelity to the smaller sphere. S. P. A.

10 INTRODUCTION.

properly understood by a preliminary study of Uni-
versology itself. In a word, in sucli a sphere, math-
ematical exactitude would refute rather than confirm
the claims of the New Science, so that, in such a realm,
nearly, about, proximately, etc., are legitimate Scientific
expressions. No Classification in Natural Sdevcs
is or can he exact, for the reason that Nature is only
proximately mathematical. It is only by " squeez-
ing " and " stretching" that she can be packed like
herrings in a box, within the theoretical exactitudes
of adjustment. StiU other objections wiU arise, and
to meet these, other answers must be extracted from
the bowels of the New Science itseH.

13. I will illustrate, a little further, the liabilities
of the ordinajry scientist to mistake, in judging of
Analogical Science. An arrangement occurs, in
Universology, of the Chemical Elements, by which
the Non-Metals are recognized as generically Light,
Upward-tending, Aerial, and Diaphanous, and as, in
that sense, allied (not in any known Chemical sense,
but in a new sense not heretofore observed), with the
Atmosphere above the surface of the Earth, and so
with the " Face of Day," or with the Main Elevation
and Front aspect of the Great World-Cathedral, the
Dome-of-Earth-and-Heaven, and typically, or repre-
sentatively, therefore, tvith the Frontal Elevation of any
House, Edifice, or Temph ; and the Metals are recog-
nized, on the contrary, as genericaUy Heavy, Dark-
ling, Obscure, or Downward-tending, or Earthly, in
the same Analogical Sense, and so, in that sense, as
allied with the Subterranean and otherwise Obscure

INTRODUCTION. 11

Position in Space, or with the Foundation-and-Back
or the Kemote Depths of an Edifice— the Metals
being therefore more numerous than the Non-Metals
in the general proportion of 3 to 1, or of a duphca-
tion both doiomoard and backward.

14 Further, it is observed, that the Non-Metals,
Aerial, Upwarl-and- Front-wise-tending, or, as it were,
visibly presentative, are generically Electro-Negative,
or allied with the Lightning, the Grand Type, and,
as it were, Fountain, of Electricity in the Cosmos,
and with its Aerial Position overhead, or above ; and
Electro-Negative because they are so aMied, since
things are not attracted to the Pole of Being which
is identical with their own nature ; they, therefore,
being of the nature of the Lightning and of the
Light (or Front-Presence) are attracted to the
Metals, which are of the nature of the Earth beneath,
and of Obscurity, or of that region of the Edifice (or
of the Human Body, to which the Edifice is an Ad-
justment) which is posited dowmoard and behind.
On the contrary, the Metals, being " of the Earth,
earthy," are, for that reason, Electro-Positive, or
capable of attracting the Lightniag, and of being
attracted by it.

15. To represent these Great New Aspects of
Science, which, it will be subsequently found, conduct
to a thousand important Scientific consequences as
remote from this beginning as the Electric Telegraph
from Franklin's Kite, and yet as logically connected
with it, the Architectural Figure or Diagram of an
Edifice is presented — not merely as a bauble, nor

13 INTBODTICTION.

even as a Mnemonic aid, (ttough of infinite im-
portance in this respect to furnisli, educationally, a
rapid preliminary understanding of Chemical Facts
and Laws) but as a profoundly true Scientific
Analogue. The Front Elevation of this Edifi!ce is
assigned to a significant Grouping of the Non-Metal-
lic Substances of Chemistry, in which many miaor
Analogies are embodied ; and the Foundations and
Back-lying portions of the Building are assigned to
the more numerous Metals, according to their relative
degrees of prominence (or Frontness), or of Obscur-
ity (or Downness and Backness). Finally, the Ana-
logical Relationship of the Lightning and the Earth
to the Electro-Negative and Electro -Positive Char-
acters of the Elements is symbolically exhibited m
the Diagram, by the Lightning-Flash, painted or
drawn as striking the Top-and-Front of the Edifice,
and as penetrating it, and passing down and losing
itself, by satisfying its attraction, in the Metallic
Fundamenta and Posterior portions of the object
visited.

16. This Symbolic Edifice or Temple of the Ele-
ments is then presented, we will assume, to learned
Specialists of the Old or Duismal Order of Science
for their judgment and appreciation. But it is highly
probable that they will perceive absolutely nothing
of the great leading ideas which the Temple is in-
tended to exemplify. They will very hkely fasten,
instead, their microscopic vision upon certain details
in the grouping of the Elements. They may, per-
chance, find that exact ratios have been theoretically

INTKODUOTION. 13

assigned where tlieir experience has taught them
that the hmits of classes are inexact or variant — a
fact which Universology not only points out but ac-
counts for, (as they are unable to do), if they would
be patient to study it ; but they have no patience for
sach novelties. This first apparent discrepancy
with what they already know is enough for them,
and with, perhaps, five minutes examination of a
great new subject, and Method, in science, they de-
cide adversely ; and imagine they have investigated
it, and that their opinions should be the guide of
'others who have not done so.

17. The fact is, that, for the true appreciation, or,
with many, for any appreciation whatever, of Scien-
tific Analogy, a special training of a set of mental
faculties previously neglected is requisite, as much
so as when we would develop the Musical Ear, or the
Artistic Eye ; apd the ordinary training of the Spe-
cialists in Science is adverse rather than favorable to
the ready acquisition of this new kind of knowledge.
This order of men, eminently respectable in their
own sphere, will have to be induced by various
means, some of them, perhaps, somewhat stringently
coerced, into a respectful deference for the subject to
be studied. When, however, they shall have ac-
quired the new point of view and the requisite new
habits of thought, and shall have become truly pos-
sessed of the facts and principles of the New Science,
their old and present habits of exactitude and pre-
cision will supervene, and will be invaluable as aids
to their own better understanding of the subject, and

14 INTEODUOTION.

for tlie detailed and elaborate expansion of TJniver-
sology itseK. At present they are apt to be content
with their accumulation of mere facts, or with at the
most some most convenient classification of the facts.
They rarely inquire into what Richard Owen calls
the Meaning of the Facts. For example, they under-
stand by JElectro-Negative, that a Substance watched
in the processes of the Laboratory comports itseK in
a particular manner ; that is to say, that, it passes,
in the Electro-Magnetic Bath, to the Positive Pole
of the Battery ; and by Electro-Positive they under-
stand the opposite occurrence ; but ask them why
this is so, and they have not even a theory upon tbe
subject. If told that this is because Electro-Negative
bodies are of a similar kind as, or are, so to speak,
sympathetic loith, the Lightning, and the Air, and the
Light, with the Front-Face and Elevation of an Edi-
fice, and with the Face and Brow of a Man, and so
with Heaven and the elevated region of the Sun, and
that, for that reason, they comport themselves like
the Lightning ; and that Electro-Positive Bodies are,
on the contrary, sympathetic with the Earth and the
Darkness, and with the Lower and Posterior portions
of a House or a Man, and so with Hell-ward Direc-
tion or the Antipodes, and the Earth's shadow, all
this would be to talk to them in an unknown tongue ;
or, at least, it would be mere poetry and imagination ;
and yet Science has now to rise to this new range of
considerations, and they will, in the end, transcend
infinitely in importance all that Science now means,
and will bind every variety of knowledge, from that

INTEODUCTION. 15

of the Hysop on the wall, up to that of the being
and nature of God, into one compact and organic
whole.

18. Universology, for the reasons above stated, de-
clines the jurisdiction of the technically so called
learned or Scientific world as a special body of
judges, and comes for understanding and apprecia-
tion to the general mind of humanity, learned and
unlearned alike, according to inherent capacity. It
will rather arraign and judge the scientific world
than submit to be judged by it. It is always well to
remember that " new things aee new," and that they
must he comprehended, before they can be intelligihly or
usefvlly criticised.^

' Since writing the last preceding few paragraphs (and some of
the preceding ones of similar tenor) I have received so much
genuine courtesy from representative men in the scientific world,
and my incipient exposition of the claims and principles of Uni-
versology have been accepted by them so cordially and in so cath-
olic a spirit, that I have been greatly tempted to expunge this
criticism upon the scientific position and tendencies of Specialists ;
but, on further reflection, and recurring to the larger scope of facts,
as well as to the principles themselves upon which this judgment
is pronounced, I conclude to let it remain as written, holding the
conviction that it will find a sufficiently extended field of applica-
tion. If some eminent men are more libera], it is because they are
ceasing to be mere specialists, and are rapidly tending, themselves,
towards a true Universological expansion. B. P. A.

CHAPTER I.

PBEUMINAEI DISCRIMINATIONS AND DEITNIITONS. —
OBJECTIONS ANSWERED.

19. There is in the Greek language the word
Logos, which meant primarily the same among the
Greeks as Word means in English. It occurs ia the
beginning of the Gospel of St. John, and is there
translated by "Tlie Word." " In the beginning was
the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word
was God." But Logos also meant, at times. Dis-
course or Language, and so, indeed, does .the English
Word', as when we call the Scriptures " the Word of
God." Logos also signified more distinctively the
meaning of the word, and thence, also, the underlying
Meaotng of Discourse, and thence, again, Beason or
Beaconing, so that Logic which is the Science of the
Reasoning Process, and, in the larger sense, Intrinsic
Law, in the nature of things, is itself immediately de-
rived from Logos. It is indeed in this sense, that of
The Absolute and Pure Beaton, that the Logos is said
by the EvangeUst to be equal with God, and to be,
indeed, the Very God. (199, 215, 216.)

20. This same Greek word Logos has also been
affixed or added to many other words as an Ending

18 LOGOS AND ITS DEKIVATIVES.

or Termination, in English and several other lan-
guages, to mean Science, in the sense of a Discourse
or Treatise about the subject named by the root-
word to which it is so added. Geology, for instance,
is derived from the Greek word ge, meaning the
Eabth, and Logos, and means therefore a Discourse
about the . Earth, as Geography means a writing
about the Earth, from the same ge and graphein, to
WRITE. Numerous similar derivatives will imme-
diately occur to the mind, without specification. (The
g of ge was originally hard as in the English go, but
has been softened by usage in English to the sound

oij).

21. It will be noticed that Ge and Logos would,
alone, make Ge-logy and not Ge-o-hgy. The o at the
middle of the "word is introduced for the sake of
euphony merely, or to make the sound of the word
more agreeable, and is denominated in the technical-
ity of Etymology, the connecting-vowel. These de-
tails belong to the process of word-building which
will receive a new and remarkable expansion in im-
mediate connection with this new Science of the
Universe, and, in part, further on in the present
work.

22. While a Science is thus named etymologically
as a Discourse about some given subject, and while
it is really that, it is still something more than a
mere Discourse. It is not every discourse, or every
kind of talk about a subject, which is the Science of
that subject. The Science of a Subject, or of any
Domain or Department of Being is, on the contrary,

DOMAINS OF EXISTENCE. 19

a Systematic, Orderly, and somewliat Complete Ar-
rangement of what is certainly known or Jidd to he
known, and of luhat is important to he known, in re-
spect to the particidar subject or Department of
Being treated of. It is so, that the Animal Kingdom,
for example, furnishes, as a subject or Domain of
Being, the Science which is called Zoology (Gr. zoe,
ElM), and hgos, discourse). Zoology is therefore a
regular «nd systematized treatment or exposition of
the knowledge which has been acquired in respect to
animals, as a Domain of Observation and Thought.
It is the same in respect to other Sciences relating
to other Domains.

23. It will be understood from the preceding para-
graph what is meant by a Domain of Existence, or
of Being, or of the Universe, or of Observation and
Thought; (for all of these terms will occur, from
time to time, as substantially sjTionymous). The
Animals are such a Domaiu, the Science of which is
Zoology or Animalogy. Plants (Trees, etc.) are an-
other such Domain, the Science of which is Botany
or Vegetalogy. Form is such a Domain, the Science
of which is Morphology (Gr. morpke, foem). Number
is such a Domain, the Science of which is Abstract
Mathematics or Numerology, (Arithmetic, Algebra,
etc.).

24. Domains of Being are larger or smaller in ex-
tent ; from the Universe itself, which is collectively
no other than such a Domain, down to the smallest
sphere or Eealm which it may be practically proper
to recognize as worthy to be the subject of a distinct

20 BEAIJCHINGS OF THE UNTVEESE.

Science. The largest Domain of Being, whicli is tlie
Universe itself, first splits up into a group of sub-
ordinate but yet immensely extended Domains,
■which furnish Grand or Collective Sciences corres-
ponding to them ; these split up, in turn, into Groups
of smaller, and then of still smaller Domains, down to
those requisite degrees of minuteness which furnish
the limits of the ordinary special Sciences, and down
to the Branches or Departments of these Special
Sciences ; so that the Universe itself, with all its sub-
ordinate Departments of Being is, theoretically, suly'ect
to a grand System of Distribution and Classificatimi,
similar in principle to that by which a Particular Do-
main, the Animal Kingdom, for example, is sdentificaUy
distributed and classified or arranged.

25. Any single thing, or collection of things, or
objects, or ideas whatsoever, is a Domain, it may be
a very small and comparatively insignificant one, of
Universal Being. A bureau or a table, or better let
us say, all bureaus or aU tables, collectively, are, in
each case, such a Domain ; and by affixing the termi-
nation -hgy, or the Enghsh -lore, cognate with the
German -Mire actually used for this purpose, we
might say, Bureau-ology or Bureau-lore or Tabul-
ology or Table-lore, for the names of such Sciences.
There are, however, several objections to this proce-
dure. The first is to what is called Lingual Hybridity,
which is the combining of words derived from dif-
ferent languages somewhat hke the crossing of
breeds and species among animals. Another is that
these particular applications of the Principle of

UNIYEESOLOGICAL CLASSIFICATION. 21

Word-Building are unusual, and therefore sound bar-
barous to our ears. Hence they are technically
called Barbarisms. But the main objection, and the
only one really important, is that already intimated,
namely, that these are unimportant Domains, not
sufficient to sustaia the dignity of an independent
Science. The supposed cases wiU serve however to
illustrate the manner in which Scientific men have
devised names for new Sciences, or in which such
namings spontaneously spring up amidst the usages
of the Scientific World and gradually pass into the
common body of Language.

26. It will appear from the preeediag explanation
that it is an important, and, at the same time, a diffi-
cult thing, to determine just what and how many
sciences there should be recognized or held to exist.
It is much like the question of how many colors
there are, when in point of fact, colors are either
very few, as Three, or Seven, or perhaps Twelve, as
somewhat primary, or else infinitely numerous, ac-
cording to the generality or the minuteness of our
discriminations. The actual origin of New Sciences,
or their recognition as such, has been, heretofore,
pretty nearly left to chance ; but various attempts
have been made, since the incipiency of such effort
with Aristotle among the Greeks, to enumerate and
distribute or classify the Sciences. Bacon, D'Alem-
bert, AugTiste Comte, Ampere, Herbert Spencer and
others, have been engaged in this important under-
taking, the difficulty of which has hitherto prevented it
from having been fully and satisfactorily accomplished.

22 A SCIENCE OF THE UNIVEESE.

27. It has not, perhaps, been clearly seen, that, to
classify the Sciences is to classify the Domains of
Universal Being to which the Sciences relate, and
hence to classify the Universe, or, at all events, that
portion of it which is systematically known to us ;
and that a true and exhaustive classification of the
Sciences would be no less than, in a sense at least, a
Science of the Universe itself. The difficulty of the
undertaking is, therefore, such, that we need not be
surprised that it should have achieved no more than
a partial success. It is true, however, that a proper
Science of the Universe is still far more than a mere
classification of the Sciences, since its Principles must
enter into the body of each of the Special Sciences
and classify also all the details and particulars with-
in them all.

28. It results, from what has been previously
shown, that just as truly as there may be, and as
there are. Sciences of various special parts or Do-
mains of the Universe, so there may be and indeed
should be wrought out and systematically exhibited,
a Science of the Universe itself, as the One, Grand,
All-inclusive Domain. Such a Science would then be
rightly denominated UNiVEESOLoaT. Our knowledge
of the parts of a subject can only be fragmentary
and very imperfect so long as we have not some sys-
tematic knowledge of the whole subject, and, thereby,
of the relation of the parts to each other and to the
grand whole.

29. To the possibility of the existence of an actual
and valid Science of the Universe several objections

OBJECTION ANSWEBED. 23

naturally arise, which it will be appropriate, at this
point, to consider and remove.

30. It is first objected that the achievement of the
discovery of such a Science must be impossible on
account of the infinite extent of the Subject or Do-
main. It is obviously impossible, it is said, that any
one individual, or even all the individuals of any one
age of the world, should know the whole Universe, in
detail. How then can any one claim to possess a
Science of the Universe ? The claim is preposterous,
it is sometimes added, and no one but God can be
presumed to have, or can be conceived of, even, as
having such knowledge.

31. This objection is at first view plausible, but it
is unsound, and leads to a too broad denial of the
human capacity. , We do not know in detail the par-
ticulars of even the smallest of our Sciences. Icthy-
ology is a branch of Animalogy, confined to the
study of the fishes; but no Icthyologist is for a
moment supposed to have become acquainted with,
BO to speak, the individual history of every particular
fish, and not only of those now in life but of every
fish that ever did live or ever will live ; and yet such
a supposition would only parallel what is assumed, in
this objection, as necessary with reference to the pos-
sibility of a Universal Science.

32. What the Icthyologist does is to discover and
systematize the General Principles, carried into a
convenient degree of detail, of Fish nature. What
the Universologist has to do is no more than this in
respect to the larger subject. He has to discover

24 HOW THE UNIVEESE 18 ENOWABLB.

and systematize the General Principles of Universal
Being, carrying their application, in turn, into no
more than the appropriate degree of minuteness in
Branching and Distribution. It is not the Univer-
sality of Facts (which are indeed infinitely numerous),
but the Uniyersahty of Principles which are infinitely
unific or simple, which has to be discoTered and ex-
hibited.

33. There is a sense, then, in which a knowledge
of the whole Universe is impossible to any finite in-
telligence ; but there is also another sense in which
such knowledge is possible. We cannot know the
Universe in detail, but there is no reason why we
may not know it in respect to the universality of its
Laws, if we can be so fortunate as to discover Laws
which are Universal, as well as exhaustive (that is to
say exclusive of the possibility of any other Laws) ;
and which shall he absolutely hnovm to he such, because
they are of such a nature, that, when discovered and
clearly propounded and apprehended, it hecomes im-
possible to conceive of them, as otherwise than as True,
Universal, and Exhaustive.

34. It is in a manner similar .to this that a True
Universal Alphabet would apply to the spelling of
the words of aU languages ; because so long as
men's mouths are formed according to the fixed type
of the human mouth, (as we know it to be), they
produce a certain few Elementary Sounds (and only
these), which are then constantly repeated, in new
combinations, ia aU that men ever say or can say. It
is, also, in a similar manner, that employing so few

THE MASTEBY THBOUGH SCIENCE. 25

signs as 9 digits and zero, we can -vmte all possible
numbers ; and that we can know positively that we
have the means at command by which we can write
new combinations of numbers so soon as they shaU occur
to ns, oMhougJi previously we may never have thought of
those partic^r combinations as possible numbers. We
have thus, in a sense, a mastery, through Science,
over immense, even over Infinite Domains of details,
with which, as details, we are entirely unacquainted.
This is the Inherent, Infinite Power and True Glory
of Science, and of the unmade Principles of Being as
contrasted with mere Facts {res gestce or things made
or done). This is what Science can do, and this is
the mode in which it transcends all ordinary ex-
perience and common knowledge, and even that
which is extraordinary, whether intuitional, inspi-
rational, or otherwise.

35. Science is thus the Systematized Knowledge
of Principles out of which 'arises a Method for their
application in new spheres ; spheres of human inter-
vention which can then be rigorously modeled upon
the application which Nature is spontaneously mak-
ing of the same Principles in advance of their dis-
covery by man. The Multiplication Table is another
instance of such systematized knowledge furnishing
a basis and Method for the whole infinitude of prac-
tical mathematical operations. It gives a scientific
mastery over the infinite world of numerical combi-
nations, within its scope, like that which the Scientific
Universal Alphabet will give over the representation
of aU languages ; like that which the digits and zero
2

2tJ A SECOND OBJECTION.

give over the Tuen notation of numbers ; and like
that, in fine, which the discovery of Universal Scien-
tific Laws is competent to give to the human race
over every department of knowledge and affairs.

36. It is, in the next place, objected, that, admitting
a Science of the Universe to be, in itself, possible, the
time has not yet arrived for it to be realized ; that
we can only look for its realization after the Special
Sciences shall have been much more numerously and
extensively developed ; when, in other words, the
human race shall have gone over the Universe much
more in detail than it has yet been able to do. This
objection has also a plausible face, but it is alike un-
tenable. It is indeed true, however, that, if the
method of arri^^ng at the discovery of Universal
Laws were alone or chiefly through the necessary
previous exhaustion of the details, such conditions
would then be requisite. But the new objection is
only the former one re-stated, and it meets with the
same answer. The method of discovery is different
from that which the objector contemplates. As it is
not the detailed Facts of Being, but, on the contrary,
Universal Principles, which are to be discovered, so
also, the method of discovery is not through the in-
finite accumulation of details, but by Intellectual
Analysis, and, so to speak, by Striking at Centres.

37. Technically speaking it is not through Obser-
vational Genekalizations, but through Analytical
Generalizations, that the discovery has to be made.
(B. O. t. 1012.) Do not be alarmed by these hard
terms. They express simple ideas. By Oisa va-

TWO KINDS OF GENERALIZATIONS. 27

tional Generalization is meant a metliocl which goes
around a whole subject, striving to embrace it ; as it
were, in the arms. By Analytical Generalization the
opposite method is intended, that of piercing di-
rectly to the centre, as by the vision of a sharp eye,
or the blade of a cutting instrument. If a child
has an apple and wishes to find what is at the middle
of it, he may cut continually around it, on all sides,
gradually reducing it in size, and arriving at the
core only by this tedious and exhaustive process ; or,
if he have acquired the. necessary strength and skill
in the use of his knife, he may, at a single cut, lay
open the apple to the centre, and begin his future
observations from the core of tlie subject. The Uni-
verse is our apple, the knife in the hand of a child is
Scientific Procedure or Method, the gradual paring
away process is Inductive, Observational, or Encyclo-
pedic Generahzation. The cut to the centre is Ana-
lytical Generahzation.

•38. It is by this latter method, that Universality
of Knowledge, of the kind, which is possible, may for-
tunately be acquired at a comparatively early period
in the development of the career of our particular
knowledge, and may be, thenceforward, the grand
weapon to be employed in the conquest of the de-
tails, outward upon every radius, from the centre of
knowledge so attained to. The discovery of the,
Multiphcation Table, of an Alphabet, and of Numer-
ical Notation, though they had to be preceded by
more embryonic stages of development tending to
produce them, were not themselves the culmination

28 A THIRD OBJECTION.

or finality of Science in their several Spheres, but
the births of those Sciences or Branches of Knowl-
edge. The discovery of TJniversology is, in like
manner, the birth of Science, itsdf, considered as a con-
stituted and living whole. The Special Sciences, as
heretofore studied and developed, have been the
Limbs and Members of the unformed or as yet un-
born infant, not therefore mutually recognizing each
other as corresponding parts of a larger Organismus.

39. It may be again objected, that, admitting the
possibility of the Universal Science, and that a
shorter method may exist for its discovery than that
of compassiag all possible details, yet, that, at least,
it must be necessary to be familiar with the known
details of all the existing Sciences, in order either to
discover the Unitary Science, or to be competent to
comprehend it and to judge of it when discovered.

40. This is still only another form of the same
objection. The supposed immense accumulation of
the details of Observational Knowledge is not indis-
pensable either to the learner or teacher of the new
Science, and only in a modified sense even to the
discoverer of it. Universology is an Independent
Science, which stands upon its own basis, and no
more needs an extended acquaintance with the par-
ticulars of other Sciences, except for the greater
richness of suggestion and illustration, than Geom-
etry or Chemistry. The Special Sciences, with all
their details, collectively form, indeed, the Infinite
Domain within which Universology will find per-
petually new applications ; but the Elements of the

THE QUESTION OP FACT. 29

New Science are more independent of anything ex-
• traneous than those of any other Science, if we except
'liOgic and the Mathematics.

41. But the question of the possibiKty of the dis-
covery of a New Universal Science may as well now
give place to the question of fact. Such a Science
claims to exist ; and what is possible wiU best be
understood by some exposition of what is. Even
here we are met by immense difficulties in respect to
the mere method of presentation. If a lecturer were
endeavoring to give an idea of America, in a single
lecture, to the inhabitants of another, country entire-
ly ignorant of this, he would be embarrassed by the
largeness of the subject. If he dwelt on the immense
extent of the country, its various climates, its huge
rivers, lakes and mountains, he would be carrying
the mind of his hearers away from all comparison
with the familiar neighborhood experiences of their
own home lives ; from that in which, probably, they
would be most particularly interested. If, on the
contrary, to overcome this difficulty, he should con-
form to their habits of thought, and sketch neigJi-
borhood life in America at some point as nearly re-
sembling their own as might be, he might accomplish
his last purpose, but he would fail to give any ade-
quate idea of America in those aspects in which it
especially differs from all other countries.

42. The Universe, as the Domain and Subject of a
New Science, is an infinitely larger field of novelty
and variety; and it is less easy to condense it into
a single volume, than it is to treat adequately of

30 WHAT IS ATTEMPTED.

America, in a single lecture ; and in respect to the
method of communicating the requisite knowledge
of it, the difficulty is of a similar kind. To be too
general is to fail to interest ; to be too special is to
fail to teach Universology in its distinctive difference
from all other Sciences.

43. In the following Chapters an effort will be
made to giye some idea of the New Science, without,
so far as it may be avoided, incurring either of these
causes of failure. It is only, however, by repeated
presentations and more and more expanded elabora-
tions of the subject, that any complete exposition of
it, even in its Elementary Form, can be accomplished.

CHAPTER II.

PEIMAET DISTETBUnON OF THE UNrVBESE.

M. The Universe divides primarily into 1. a Do-
main OF Natuee, 2. a Domain of Science, and 3. a
Domain op Abt. These are not different Eeahns ex-
isting entirely apart from each other, but, are, on the
con trary , closely inter-blended throughout. They are,
therefore, only drawn asunder, in part, and enough
for practical distinction, by an effort of Abstraction,
in the Mind.

45. The word-termination -ismus is used to denote
a Eealm or Domain of Being. These Three Domains
are therefore, 1. The Natueismus, 2. The Scientis-
Mus, and 3. The Aktismus, of Being.

46. There are, likewise, as previously shown (2),
Three Univeesal PeincipIxES, which underlie the
Universe, and regulate the distribution of all things.
These are called, in Universological Technicality,.

•Unism, Duism, and Teinism, and are related to the
numbers One, Two, and Three, respectively, (Latin,
Unus, Duo, Tres, One, Two, Three.)

47. Unism, Duism and Trinism coiTespond with, or
echo to, Nature, Science and Art, respectively, so that

32

NATURE, SCIENCE, AND ART.

Nature is Unismal, Science Duismal, and Art Trinismal,
in character and degree.

48. But how can it be demonstrated that among
the thousand similar distributions which are possible,
Nature, Science and Art are the most appropriate to
be regarded as the practically Primitive, and All-
inclusive, Aspects, of the Universe of Being ?

49. The assumption that this is true will be suf-
ficiently proven or sustained by the following con-
siderations : Nature is the Substance or Subjec'-Matter
treated of by Science. Science is the Systematized
Knowledge which the Human Mind attains to, of
Nature, the Form, in other words, which Nature, as a
Substance, assumes under the Reflective Action of the
thinking mind ; and Art is the same primitive Nature or
Substance, externally or actually reacted upon, sub-
sequsntly to reflection, and ee-impeessed bt Science ; or it
is the Mental or Ideal Form, reproduced in Nature, from
and by the Mind. It is, therefore, the result of Mind
working upon Nature ; or the Progeny begotten of
Nature, as Feminine, by Science or the Thinking
Mind, as Masculine or Male.

50. But all manifestations of Intelligence or of
Quasi-Intelligence, even those witnessed in Nature, are
the, at least, apparent, result of Mind, which, therefore,
when ii thus occurs independently of Man, is attri- ,
buted to God, and assimilated to our own conscious
action on Nature, which is Art. All Evolution, Move-
ment, or On-going in Nature, is such manifestation of
QMasi-InteUigence, and is, therefore, also Art; or
may, in other words, be properly embraced in the ex-

SUBSTANCE, FORM, AND MOVEMENT. 33

tremest largeness of meaning wMcK we can assign to the
word Art. In this sense, Art is equivalent to Move-
ment, Manifestation, Modification, Modixlation, in a
word, to all Creation and Evolution, in the Universe
at large. Nature furnishes the Materials or Substance,
Science being, (or accoeding with), the Form or Law
impressed upon the Svhstance, in the Operation or
Result, or in the Movement and Evolution, which are
here, by an unusual extension, it is true, of the mean-
ing of that term, denominated Art. All Art is re-
presentation, or a new presentation of Matter in a form
prescribed by Mind. Art is, therefore, also denom-
inated Creation.

51. Nature, Science and Art are, therefore, in the
extended meanings which are here assigned to them,
as if we should say, more abstractly, 1. Substance,
2. FoEM, and 3. Movement ; or, still more metaphys-
ically, 1. The Noumena, 2. The Phenomena, and 3.
The Compoundness and Coaction of these two in the
Totality of Being.

52. But Nature, Science and Art, while echoing to
or corresponding with Substance, Form and Move-
ment, are more ostensible and real Departments of
Being. As here meant, they go back to the Primitive
or Etymological Meanings of these Words, Substance
and Form. Substance is from the Latin sub, undee,
and stans, standing, (from stare, to stand), as it were
a foundation standing under a house, and as, figura-
tively, the Substance of Things stands under or under-
lies the Appearance or Form. Form is the Latin
Forma, and this Abstract Noun I regard as originally

34 STORIES OF THE TEMPLE.

Ferri-ma, from ferre, TO beae and uphold, as the
House is lipborne or upheld by its Foundation ; and
as Form is figuratively upheld and manifested or
made into Phenomena by Substance or Noumenon.
Substance-and-Form then combine to make the To-
taUty and Proceedent Existence of Things ; and so of
Thing Universal ; or of the Universe.

53. Nature, Science and Art, as Substance, Form
and Movement, are, therefore, like 1. The Foundation,
2. The Superstructure, and 3. The Use or Occupancy
(lapping back upon and including its construction)
of an Edifice. The Universe is that Edifice, in its
Integrality, or in the Unity of these Three Consti-
tuent Aspects, Entities or Terms. The Universe is,
therefore, piimarily and necessarily a Tri-Unity, of
which Nature, Science and Art are the Three Grand
Factors, Stages, or Determinate Particulars; which
was the point to be established. We proceed in
thought from the Foundation of the Edifice upward
to the Dome or Apex ; as the Natural or Primitive
Order of our thoughts on the subject ; which, sub-
sequently, we reverse, or " invert " in descending. This
procedure of the thought may be contracted to the
conception of a mere line, and the successive Stories
or Stages of the Edifice may be represented to the
imagination along this line.

54. As every Line and every Career, that of Uni-
versal Evolution as well, has, in our ordinary concep-
tion, a Beginning, a Middle and an End, so, if a Line,
as the First Type of Procedure or On-Going, be as-
sumed in Abstract Thought, and be made to occupy

intekpunct; ob intesposed point. 35

the Perpendicular, whicli is the First Normal Posture
or Position ; and if we proceed, in our thoughts, from
Below, Upward, which is the First or Normal Drift
of Direction, or the Natural Order; this Tbovght-Line
will have, First, a Foundation or Lowest Point or
Basis, the point upon which it rests, the Analogue of
Nature ; and Second, an Upper Portion, the Fcrrima
or Form, the Line per se, the Analogue of Science.
We might then add the upper end or superior point
of the Line as the Third Step, as the Analogue of Art ;
in accordance with the Axiom, Finis coronat opus (the
end crowns the work) ; but this Upper End, the Head
of the Column or Line, is also the Basis of the In-
verted Procedure, when the thought begins to de-
scend ; for, analogically. Ideal and Spiritual Founda-
tions are above. Confining onrselyes, on the contrary,
to the Ascending Drift of Thought, there is, as it
were, a Finer Interposed Point, a Point of Unition
and Conjunction between the Basis-Point of the
Line and the Ferrima ; between Nature and Science ;
between Foundation and Superstructure ; which In-
terposed Point may be also taken as the Analognie of
Life and Movement, and hence also of Art — the
germinating Punctum Vitw or Point of Life; pivot-
ally situated, as it were, between the other two s tages
and forms of development. To change the figure
from Edifice and Line to the Plant or Tree, the Point
in question is the Germinal Point, within the Seed, as
the Analogue of Art, or of Vital Movement, within
the Plant ; and, as it were, between the Seed and
Root, extending downward or beneath the Earth's

36 BASE, SUPEKINOUMBING, INTEKPUNCT.

level, the Analogue of tlie Foundation of the Build-
ing, and the Plumule or Ascending Sprout, ihe Ana-
logue of the Superstructure. The Pundum Vita of
the Edifice is the Altar or Fireplace, the Foctis, which
is the Latin word for Fireplace. This is reached by
the Doorway or Entrance, which, situated at the
Earth's level, is externally representative of this in-
terposed point of Vitality and Movement. The
whole Figure, compounded of the Point and Line,
thus vitally and centrally conjoined by an Interposed
Vital Point, is the Inverted Man-shaped Figure or
Anthropoidule. (B. O. t. 881.).

55. Foundation, Superincumbency, and their Copda^
tion, Interaction, or Interrelation, these Three combined
in a Totality and repeated in the Product, are, there-
fore, the Primal and Universal Type of All Being.
It is this Primitive Distribution which is here gen-
eralized and formulated under the terms. Nature,
Science, and Aet, as the Constituent Aspects or Do-
mains of Universal Being and Evolution. They are
not, therefore, merely Fads of Observation, but Es-
sentiaUy Necessary and Primitive Discriminations.

56. Nature is Feminine, the Mother Principle, the
teeming Womb or Matrix of Being. Science, identi-
fied with Law, with Abstract Thought, with Form,
with Phenomena, with the Bays of Light, with Be-
flection, and so with Universal Intelligence or Mind,
with Man Male, and with God, the Paternal or Im-
pregnating Principle, is Masculine ; Art, echoing to
the Sexes in their mutual embrace, Interpenetration,
Correlative Impregnation, and Conception, and the '

naturology; Scientology; aetology. 37

Eenewed Being as Progeny or Product, is 'Andro-
gyne.

57. Nattjeology is that Brancli or Aspect of Uni-
versology in which the Universe is considered and
treated, in a preliminary and somewhat inexact way,
from the Observation of Fads and the Empirical As-
sumption of Method ; and not from reference to
any previous demonstration of Governing Principles ;
in which, in other words, it is considered and treated
in the merely Observational Spirit, or, what is the
same thing, in the spirit of the Natural Sciences.

58. Scientology, is, on the contrary, that Branch
or Aspect of Universology in which the Universe is
considered and treated as consecutively and logically
evolved from the Three Abstract Universal Principles
above specified (2, 45), related to the Three Primary
Numbers. It is, in other words, the Logical and
Mathematical Evolution of Being universally, from
the Primordial Categories or Basis-Thoughts of
Being. Scientology is therefore Universology devel-
oped in the spirit of the Exact Sciences, and is wholly
new in kind. It is the Core or Centre and the most
distinctive Department of Universology, that in which
the discovery of this New Universal Science mainly
consists ; but it is proportionally less popular, in
character, and more remote from old and existing
scientific ideas.

69. Abtology is that Branch or Aspect of the
Science of the Universe in which the somewhat
popular truths of Naturology and the new and more
metaphysical truths of Scientology are, as it were.

38 SCIENTOLOGICAL EXACTIFICATION.

translated or modvlated into each other, or, in other
words, recondled and married in the Elaborated and
Completed Grand Cosmos or Total Universe of
Being. There is, therefore, in this Department, Com-
promise, Concession, or, in a word. Artistic Modifi-
cation. (B. O. t. 515.) Art is not so much the Art-
products, or Objects of Art in themselves, although
they are representative, but these Art-products in
the act of being produced ; whence it is Evolution or
Movement, or, in other words. Creation in Progress
or Procedure — what the Philosophers have technically
denominated " The Becoming."

60. Scientology is new, and remote from the popu-
lar apprfehension, alike of the learned and unlearned
world. Artology, depending, as it does, for one of
its factors, upon Scientology, is, consequently, also
new. Naturohgy, alone, answers to tJie whole scope
of the Sciences as they have hitherto been cultivated and
developed, and furnishes, therefwe, the Natural Basis
of the New Science. This, while it is, in a sense,
popular, and closely related to the Natural Sciences as
they are already studied and understood in the
world, still, is not, in its Universological sense, merely
the Aggregate of those Sciences, as they now stand in
the minds of the Learned. It is, on the contrary, the
whole body of those Sciences as re-cast and re-consti-
tuted, Universologically, and by a Eefiect of Exactifi-
cation cast from Scientology, (the Sim and Centre of
Universology), upon this Primitive and naturally In-
exact Domain. The method, even here, is Analogical,
and the result is to unify these primitive and fragment-

INHEEENT NECESSITY. 39

ary Sciences by bringing them under the operation of
that Identity of Law which is demonstrated and ex-
pressly elaborated in the Scientological Branch of
Universology.

61. Naturology, as a Branch of Universology, is,
therefore. Transcendental, in comparison with the frag-
mentary state of the Special Sciences, as these have
been hitherto developed ; but, on the other hand, in
a general and popular sense, Naturology may be
held to include also the existing Special Sciences in
their actual state.

62. Any particular Domain of the Universe, or of
any of these Three Primitive Grand Domains (Nature,
Science, and Art), as, for instance, the Vegetable
Kingdom, the Animal Kingdom, the Human Body,
or the Human Mind, segregated and considered as a
whole, is a Minor Universe ; and may, therefore, or
indeed must, naturally, be distributed, in the first in-
stance, into a Naturismus, a Scientismus and an
Artismus, of its own. Hence, there is, by an inherent
and NECESSAKX LAW, Univeesal Analogy, or an Echo
OE Sameness, in respect to the method of distribution,
between the Entire Universe and any smaller Domain
within the Universe; and, mutually, between all such
smaller Domains. Hence, there should be Identity of
Distribution, and of Scientific Classification, through-
out all Domains. The understanding of this Universal
Echo of Principles and consequent Universal Analogy
makes the Science of Universology. (8.)

63. Language is one of these smaller Domains
within the Universe, and is, itself, therefore, a Minia-

40 THE TWO OEDEES, OR METHODS.

ture Universe, in accordance -witli the Principle of
Analogy just stated, and a Type or Model of the
Whole Universe. More than this, Language, occu-
pying an intermediate position between Matter and
Mind, between the Physical and the Metaphysical
Sciences, it is especially well situated to serve (by re-
lation to its own inherent organization) as an In-
terpreter between them. Language is, therefore,
scientifically indicated as the Primary Modelic Sphere
— the Particular Miniature Universe which it is fitting
to adopt as a point of departure in the larger investi-
gation of the Entire Universe, and of all its parts.
The Human Body is another Modehc Sphere to which
there will be early and frequent occasion to recur, in
the ulterior development of Universology.

64. If, in accordance with these premises, we as-
sume Language as a Minor Universe of Being, and
treat the distribution of this Domain, Naturismally,
or in the spirit of the existing Sciences merely, there
are still two Orders or Methods in which we may ap-
proach and prosecute the consideration of the sub-
ject. We may, in the first place, comiiience, so to
speak, at the periphery, and proceed towards the cen-
tre ; we may, in other words, attempt to surround
arid embrace Encyclopedically, the Entire Content or
Contents of the Language-Domain, and to bring a
certain degree of System and Harmony into our
knowledge of it, by an external, non-vital, and super-
imposed arrangement and classification of its several
Departments. AH the different Languages spoken
on the planet may thus be enumerated and classified.

THE PHONETIC ALPHABET. 41

in respect to both their Spacic and their Tempic Dis-
tribution. Oral Speech, Music and Song may be dis-
criminated as Departments of this Lingual Universe ;
and so also Grammar, Logic and Rhetoric. The
Grammar of Language may itself undergo division
into Etymology, Syntax, etc. ; and the Parts of
Speech may be distinguished and specified. Ana-
lysis, and the Phonetic Elements of Speech may be
designated as something distinct from every other
Department, or at least Hieroglyphic and Syllabic
Alphabets devised, and some idea of Words, Syllables
and Elements be entertained ; and all this may con-
ceivably exist, without any such Analysis of Element-
ary Sounds as would supply a proper Phonetic
Alphabet, which is the true Core or Centre of
^Speech, (even when this Alphabet is itself defective
and imperfect from the want of a more rigorous and
ultra-analytical process). All that has now been de-
scribed belongs then to the Objective Method, or, in
other words, to the Natural Order of the Naturismal
or common phase of the Investigation of Language.
65. But, all of this Procedure may be inverted,
and, indeed, so soon as the study of Language as-
sumes a really Scientific Character (of the Naturis-
mal kind) it is even more natural that it should be in-
verted. The exigencies of writing, in the effort to
preserve Language, force that degree of Analysis
upon the primitive scholars of a nation that they de-
velop a somewhat imperfect Phonetic Alphabet, but
slill a Plionetic Alphabet, representing the Elements of
Sound of their particular National Tongue. The

42 THE SCIENTIMC LINGUAL READ.

work is empirically aocomplislied, applies only to the
single' Language, is destitute of radical knowledge
of tlie Sound-producing Organismus (the Throat,
Mouth and Nose) and of many other things essential
to the Constitution of the Final and Uniyersal Pho-
netic Alphabet, destined thereafter to arise, at some
day, as the instrument for expressing with equal cer-
tainty all existing and even all possible languages.'

66. Even this imperfect Phonetic Alphabet is,
nevertheless, a new and wonderful Element in the
constitution of Language. It becomes the Scientific
Head or Centre of the Language to which it applies,
from which, outwardly, there arises that Inverse Or-
der of investigating and treating the whole lingual
Domain which has been adverted to above (64), as the
Subjective Method or Logical Order of investigation
and treatment. The Objective Method or Natural
Order previously sketched (64) rested on Obseeva-
TiONAL Geneealizations (37 ; B. O. t. 1012), which
furnish such general divisions of Language as its
Grammar, its Logical Structure, its Musical Struc-

' I do not leave out of mind the extraordinary and exceptional
fact that the Sanscrit Alphabet, perhaps the oldest Alphabet extant,
is a marvel of scientific accuracy, for anything wrought out in this
primitive or Naturismal method, and that it is vastly superior, for
exposition of the true classification of sounds, to any of our more
modem alphabets ; but yet, radically considered, even the Sanscrit
alphabet is not adequately scientized by reference to the organic
prodixction of Sounds by the Speech Organ, as demonstrated by
modern Science, and still less by any knowledge of the analogical
principles involved in and requiring to be represented in the Final
Universal Alphabet S. P. A.

THE TESTIBTJLE OF LANGtTAGE. 43

ture, etc. This Logical Order rests, on the contrary,
on Analytical Generalizations (37; B. O. t. 1012),
furnishing a handful of Elementary Sounds, repre-
sented by the Alphabet, but which, in their way, just
as really and exhaustively contain, in themselves, the
whole Language, in all its actuality and possibility, as,
in its way, the broadest Objective Method could do —
nay, indeed, more really and exhaustively, since Obser-
vational GeneraHzations are not susceptible of being
so perfectly accomplished as the Analytical.

67. From the Alphabet, as, so to speak, an Inter-
nal Knot of the Elements of Speech, a Core, a Cen-
trum, a Focus, or Hub, of the Principles of Language
represented in Elements, the Structural Constitution
of the whole Language is then wrought out, in a
new and inverse sense from that pre^dously consid-
ered. Syllabaries, Spelling Books, Dictionaries, Vo-
cabularies and finally Encyclopedias and the Cata-
loguing of entire Libraries, and, finally, of all Litera-
ture, are built upon the basis of the Alphabet, which
serves in turn as their key, and thence as the key, or,
to change the figure, as the Vestibule to the whole
Language itself. To go out from the Alphabet as
from the centre or main Entrance to the Periphery
of Language in this new sense, is to proceed in the
Inverse or Logical, and hence not in the Natural, but
in its opposite, the Scientific Order of investigation
and treatment.

68. But in all of this primitive treatment of Lan-
guage, in both Orders, first, separately, and then, in
both combined, and reacting upon each other, we are.

4:4 MONOSPHEEOLOGT ; COMPAEOLOGY.

only still in the Naturologij ff Speech. This whole
Domain of Lingual Procedure is, in other words, the
Naturismus of the Speech-Universe, or of the Total
Linguistic Domain. It is also Monospheric, by
which is meant, that its scope is confined to some
single or individual Language, or even, it may be, to
ah Languages, each considered singly or individually.
This whole Compoimd Method may also be denomi-
nated Encyclopedic, as distinguished from the True
Analytical Method which is Scientological.

69. The Scientology of Language begins, (dang
with tJie Logical 'Order of the Encyclopedic or Observa-
tional Method, IN THE AiiPHABET, or strictly speaking,
hack of the Alphabet, as will be shown presently, (79.)
But in respect to the Alphabet, it begins in that More
Rigorous Analysis, m that closer discrimination and
classification of the Elementary Sounds of Speech
wjiich is known as " Phonetic Analysis." It passes
over also from the consideration of the Elements of
the Singh or Individual Language to the comparison
of the Elements of different Languages ; and hence,
from the Monospherology to the Oomparology of the
subject (B. 0. t. 403), and hence again, to the founding
of One Universal and strictly Scientific Alphabet for the
representation of a% Languages.

70. All that has now been mentioned, even the
Oomparology of the Elements of Language (Com-
parative Etymology), has been reached, at least in a
primitive and imperfect manner, empirically; but
Universology goes farther, and does more than all
that has hitherto been indicated, in order to obtain

TRANSCEIPT OF THE UNIVEESE. 45

its starting points, or, in other words, to lay its foun-
dation, upon which it then elevates a far more lofty
edifice.

71. It has been shown that Language is a Minor
Universe echoing to or repeating the Grand Uni-
verse, (63.) It results, therefore, that when we
distribute radically and rightly the Elementary
Sounds of the Human Voice, from which Language
is constructed, we do, virtually, and by a valid Scien-
tific Analogy, also distribute the Categories, not merely
of the Understanding, hut of Universal Being, the Ele-
mentary Entities and Principles, in other words, of
the Universe itself, more effectively than can be done
in any other way ; and that we lay the foundations,
in this manner, at the same time and place, of the
New Universal Science, and of a New SciENTiFtc
Univeesal Language, which shall be, in its structure,
the Rectified and Clarified Transcript of the Universe ;
as Language, in its existing Instinctual and Confused
Development, has been the blurred and imperfect
Sketch (Fr. ebavxihe), of the same Universe.

72. But to complete, or more properly to even ini-
tiate, this new order of investigation, the Scientology
of the Universe and of Speech, we must discover
the meaning which Nature attaches to each Elementary
Articulate Sound of the Voice ; for if the Elements of
Sound are the Analogues or Individual Echoes of
the Elements of the Universe itself, which are the
Proto-pragmata and Abstract Principles of which it
is composed, then it follows that each sound of the
voice in speech, such as is represented by a Lettsr of

46 INHEEENT MEANINGS OF SOUNDS.

the Alphabet, is the Analogue of some Particular
First Entity or Goreming Principle of Universal
Being ; and that, inversely, that Particular Entity or
Principle is the true meaning, by Analogy, of the
given Alphabetic Sound ; and. that all such Principles
must be measured, numerically, and by Exact Echo
in aU senses, by the number and character of the
Elementary Sounds of the True Universal Alphabet
of Language.

73. This then is what Universology begins by dis-
covering. It is found, and will be progressively
demonstrated, that Every Alphabetic Sound of the
Human Voice is inherently laden by Nature herself with
a specific significance or meaning ; that the Aggregate of
these Meanings is, at the same time, the Aggregate of the
Fundamental Entities and Principles of the Universe of
Matter and Mind; and, that, hence, a Language rightly
hmlt up from the combinations of these Sounds must ex-
actly echo to and represent, from the broadest General-
izations to the minutest details, the Total Universe of
Matter and Mind, itself built up in paraEel development

from the Echoing or Corresponding Entities or Principles.

(81.)

74. Out of this discovery arises, therefore, logical-
ly, and as it were inevitably, a New Universal Lan-
guage, the most wonderful and complete in its structure
and powers of which it is possible to conceive, and
which ' must serve as the Vernacular of the Unitized
Humanity or Great Planetary Nation of the Future.
It is, then, the Philosophy and Linguistic Science
underlying and intimately involved in thi.s New Lan-

EE-STATEMENT. 47

guage throughout, which constitute the Scientology
of Linguistic; and the Correspondiug Philosophy
and Science of the Universe at large is the Scientol-
ogy of Universology. The reaction of the Philosophy
of the New Scientific Language upon the understanding
of existing tongues, or upon the previous Science and
Sciences of Language^ wiU constitute the Universological
Aspect of lAngual Naturology (60, 61) ; and the simi-
lar reaction of Universological Scientology upon the
existing Sciences, recasting them into the mould of
its own character, will be the Universologvrd Aspect of
Naturology at large, Tinally, the interblending and
mutual modification and modulation of the old and-
new materials of Lingual Knowledge and Use wiU
constitute the Artology of Speech. (59, 77.)

75. To restate these points : The Naturology of
Language is not confined to Grammar or Lexicology
(the Dictionary), nor to any other particular depart-
ment of the Science of Language, as now understood ;
nor to all of them combined ; not even if we include
Comparative Grammar or Comparative Etymology,
with all the surprising expansion which has been
given to that Branch of Science by the German
School of Philologists. Linguo-Naturology or the
Naturology of Language includes, on the contrary :
First, in its ordinary or Non-Universological sense,
a,ll of these Departments of the Lingual Domain, or
the whole of Linguistic, in any or every sense in
which Language has heretofore been studied ; and
Secondly, in its Universohgical Aspect, it includes all
of this Primary Body of Lingual Science as it will

48 ALWATO.

be recast from the influence of the new Philology.
In the same manner, Naturology, at large, includes, in
an ordinary sense, all the existing Sciences in their
present state ; and, in a Universological Sense, the
same Body of the Sciences as they will be enlarged
and reconstituted from Scientology.

76. Linguo-Scientology or the Scientology of Lan-
guage is the new and totally distinct department of
the Science of Language, as above sketched, which
arises out of the discovery of the Liherent Meanings
of Sounds, and of the Scientific Law of their combi-
nations, to constitute, basically, the Unitary and Per-
fect Language of Mankind. Scientology, at large,
holds the corresponding relation to the Total Uni-
verse, and is the Back-lying and Regulative Abstract
Science or Exactology of the Universe.

77. Linguo-Artology or the Artology of Language,
the resultant of the Interblending of the Naturology
and Scientology of Language, will be best illustrated
by the Final Form of the World's Vernacular, which
will be a Single Grand Planetary Language, with the
New Scientific Lingual Structure as Basis and Gov-
erning Head of the whole, together with the materials
of all existing Languages (the Naturismus of Speech)
sifted, recast and inwrought into this Completed and
Sublime Lingual Fabric, the dialects of which wiU
not be distributed, as now, by the mere accidents of
locality and race, but by the Departments or Spheres
of the Totality of Human Knowledge and affairs.

78. The name of the New Scientific Language is
Alwato (pronounced Ahl-wah-to), a word derived

THE XJNTVBESAL ALPHABET. 49

from the Language itself, and meaning Universal
Speech, {Al for All, and wato for speech or lan-
guage). It is also called, somewhat more technically,
TiEiWA, (pronounced tee-Jcec-wah), a word also wrought
out from the Language itself, and referring to Unism
and Duism as the Scientific Bases of Speech. The
preliminary steps for the exhibition of this new Lan-
guage occur in this Synopsis, in connection with
Phonetics. The development of the Language itself
will be carried forward in subsequent and special
Treatises, Grammars, Vocabularies, etc.

79. It was observed above (69), that the Scientol-
ogy of Language goes even back of the Alphabet for
its absolute origins. To gain the point of view of
the proper starting-point of this New Science, we
must therefore begin with a more radical and thor-
ough analysis of the Sounds of some particular Lan-
guage, the English, for instance, as is done in the
Phonetic Beform initiated by Mr. Pitman ; we must
then extend this Analysis to the inclusion of the
Phonetic Elements and of the Alphabetic Signs or
Letters for the representation of all Languages, thus
laying the foundation of a Universal Alphabet, along
with Eapp, Ellis, Lepsius, the English Church Mis-
sionary Society, Max MiiUer and others ; we must
then go back to the proper Alphabetic Elements,
analy2dng and classifying them, as to their localities
and the modes of their production in the mouth, and
their proper pictorial and symbolic representation,
thus founding a new Science of " Alphabetics," with
Alexander MelviUe Bell (in " Bell's Visible Speech ") ;
3

50 IDENTITY OF DISTRIBUTION.

we must, again, as TJniversology alone does, go back
of Mr. Bell, analyzing even his classification, and re-
ducing all possible sounds, and tbeir classes and ar-
rangements to Three Primordial Principles, Unism,
Duism and Trinism, respectively — ^illustrated by the
Three (not Four) seats of Sound in the mouth, the
Middle-Mouth, the Baot-Mouth and the Front-Mouth
respectively.

80. Eeascending thence through the Classes of
Sounds to the Individual Sounds of the Reconstructed
Universal Alphabet, we must then add the crowning
discovery which Universology, in this Lingual appli-
cation of it, also alone makes, namely : That the same
Principles of Distribution by which the Elements of
the Human Voice are distributed, and by which a
True Universal Alphabet is constituted, have, in the
necessary operations of Nature, distributed all the
higher or more elaborate or less elementary Depart-
ments of Language, and all the details of these,
thereby constituting Language itseK, so that every
thing within this whole Domain of Being is nothing
else than contintious Echo and He-echo of the Facts and
Frinciples of the Alphabet itself,

81. And, finally, it appears that, inasmuch as Lan-
guage is an Epitome of the Total Universe, and is itself
a Representative Minor Universe, the Elements of
Language, the Sounds and Letters of the Universal
Speech Alphabet, must be and are, by a vaUd and le-
gitimate Scientific Analogy, identical with the Ele-
ments of Universal Thought and Being — and, there-
fore, with the Universal Logical and the Universal

CONSTTTUTION OP THE UNIVEKSE. 51

Ontological Alphabets respectively ; that the Inherent
Meanings of these Universal Alphabetic Sounds are
identically these Universal Elements of Being ; and
that the Universe, itself, is built up froin the same, in
a precisely parallel evolution to that by which a New
Scientific Universal Language is evolved from its
own Alphabetic Elements. (73.)

CHAPTER III. .

FUKTHEK DISTEIBUTION OP THE tTNTVEESE. THE ELE-
MENTARY, AOT), THE ELABOEATE. LANGUAGE, AS AN
EPITOME OP THE TJNTVEESE, DISTEIBTJTED.

82. We have next to distinguisli the Elementary
and the Elaborate Departments of Being. The
Elementary Sphere is well illustrated in Language,
where the results of the Phonetic Analysis of Speech
are already familiarly known as " The Elements " of
Speech, or of Language. This phrase then suggests
all the remaining and more compound aspect of Lan-
guage as something to be contrasted with the Ele-
ments ; and it is this opposite and derivative De-
partment of this Total Domain which is meant by
the ^Zaftorafe Department of Language. Technically,
the Elements of any Domain of Being are the Ele-
mentismus, and the remaining and contrasted De-
partment is the Elaborismus of that Domain — as of
Language, for instance, or of any other subordinate
Domain, or of the entire Universe itself. Finally,
the Science of the Elements of any given Domain is
the Elementology of that Domain ; and the Science of
its Elaborate or derivative Aspect or Department is
theElaborology of that Domain. The Whole is Trinal.

THE ELEMENTAEY, AND THE ELABORATE. 53

83. Although the Elementismus and the Elaboris-
mus are very Distinct or " Discrete " Degrees of
feeing, there is, nevertheless, an Echo of Analogy be-
tween them. The Elementismus of the Universe
consists of Proto-pragmata or Primary Eealities, as
Entity or Thing, Relation, Matter, Space, etc., and of
Principles or Primary Laws, as Unism, Duism, etc.
These Elementary Distributions then reappear in the
Elaborated Universe, not as mere Abstractions, which
they are in their Elementary Aspect, but as embodied
in, and constituting corresponding Elaborate Domains ;
but, then, in conjunction with other Elements, while yet
each Element occurs in such preponderance, in
some particular instance Of The Elaborate, as to be
characteristic, and governing, in that particular given
Domain. By Echo of Analogy, each Class of Sounds,
and each Particular Sound occurring in the Alphabet
of Speech, answers to, and is answered to by some
Whole Department in the Elaborate or General Consti-
tution of Language, in which Department the same
Principle (represented by the Particular Elementary
Sound) recurs, not so purely and abstractly, but yet
in a governing or characteristic degree. This ab-
struse and difficult idea will be rendered readily com-
prehensible by what follows. (85.)

84. It is thus that the Absolutoid and Abstractoid
Elementismus of Being echoes or reappears by Ana-
logy within the Eelatoid and Concretoid Elaboris-
mus ; the Plan of Nature being to organize some part
of her Domains as the somewlmt exclusive residence of
each Fundamental Abstract Principle ; or as the some-

54 INEXPUGNABILITT, ETC.

what Independent Objectijication of every Primary and
Necessary Aspect of Being — somewhat so, it is said,
because, by another Principle of Universology called
The Inexpttgnabilitt of Peime Elements (B. O.
t. 226), Principles and Primary Aspects, in part ex-
cluded, are still always present in every part of tlie
Elaborate World, only in a subordinate or minor de-
gree. There is Meee Prepondeeance (B. O. t. 526)
of the Major or Governing Principle, and Subdomi-
NANCE (B. O. t. 524) of the Minor or Subordinate
Principle, in the given instance or domain.

85. The reappearance of Elementary Entities, Prin-
ciples, or Domains, subsequently, as Elaborated Do-
mains, is illustrated as follows : The Vowel-Sounds
are an Elemental Domain of Speech or Language ;
and the Consonant-Sounds are another such Domain.
But, then, Entire Languages occur in which the Vowel-
Element predominates, and which it characterizes, as,
for example, the Italian ;• and other entire languages
in which the Consonant-Element predominates, and
which it characteriiies, as, for example, the German.
These Individual Languages are then. Elaborated or
Actual Domains of Language at large, and repeat, in
their oion structure, the Two Elementary Domains of
the Alphabet of Language, (namely the Vowels and
the Consonants), by which these languages are re-
spectively characterized. But no Language can ex-
ist wholly without the Vowel-Element, nor whoUy
without the Consonant-Element ; and this fact illus-
trates what is meant by The Inexpugnability {the un-
Jighi-oiit-able-ness) of Prime Elements. The Italian

ITALIAN AND GEEMAN. 55

Language merely preponderates in Vowels, and the
German in Consonants, and this illustrates what is
meant by Mere Preponderance. There is, in other
words, a subordinate (but also Subdominant) propor-
tion of Consonant-Sounds in Italian, notwithstanding
its prevailing Vowel Character, and so vice versa, of
the German ; and this is what is meant by Subdomi-

NANCE.

86. Reasoning inversely, it may be said that the
Italian language, renders, on analysis, the Vowel-
Element in Preponderance, and the Consonant-Element
in Subdominance, and that, contrariwise, the German
language yields the Consonant-Element in Prepon-
derance and the Vowel-Element in Subdominance.

87. It is the Aggregate of the Elementary Domains
of Being (or of any given Domain) which constitutes
the Elementismus. It is the Aggregate of the Ela-
borate Domains which constitutes the Elaborismus.
Phonetics and Alphabetics pertain to the Elementis-
mus of Language. The Vowels and Consonants are
Elementary Departments, or Special Domains with-
in the Domain of Phonetics, or within the Alphabet.
The Alphabet of Vowels and Consonants (with their
interspaces of Silence) are, indeed, virtually the whole
of the Elementismus of Language. Every thing else
in Language, Grammar, Dictionary, Ehetoric, Logic,
the Musical Expansion of Language, the History,
Local Distribution and Etymological and Gramma-
tical Comparison of different languages, are collect-
ively the Elaborismus of the Universal Language-
Domain or of Language at large; all of which is

56 SOUNDS AND SIGNS.

built up from the Universal Alphabet, or rests upon
it, as Elementismus, as a house rests upon its foun-
dation, or as the parts of a house are correlated with
its vestibule or main entrance ; as a wheel depends
upon its hub or centre ; or as any peripheric expan-
sion upon its basis, centrum, core or pivot.

88. Novi^Sounds and Consonant-yS'oMnds must be
carefully distinguished from the Letters or Signs, writ-
ten or printed, by which these Sounds of the Alpha-
bet are signified or represented — and they are very
apt to be confounded with them.- Sounds, Vowel or
Consonant, are what we make with our mouths and
hear ivith our ears; and are precisely the same
whether we know what they mean, and the letters by
which they should be written or printed, or whether
we know neither what they mean, nor hy what letters
to write or print them — as when we listen to the
speaking of an unknown language.

89. Letters are, on the contrary, what we see with
the eye, when we read, and make with the hand, when
we write, and represent hy types, when we print. They
are, indeed, used to signify sounds, but they are not
themselves sounds, and may even be falsely used, so
as to misrepresent the sounds, instead of truly re-
presenting them, as, for example, when people spell
inaccurately (with reference to whatsoever standard
of correctness).

90. In different languages, the same Sound is, now,
in the deficiency of any accepted and practical Uni-
versal Alphabet, frequently represented by quite dif-
ferent letters ; so that, in learning a new language, we

TOWELS AND CONSONANTS. 57

have often to learn new Values, in sound, for the let-
ters with the native values of which (English, for ex-
ample) we are abeady famihar. (For instance a is,
in French, pronounced not a, but ah ; i is pronounced
not i, but ee, etc.) For Universal purposes we have,
therefore, first, to agree in what way we wiU repre-
sent (print or write) the Sounds of the Alphabet, be-
fore we can be sure that we and the people of other
countries shall be thinking and talking of the same
Souvds, even when we may be using the same letters.

91. Yowel-Sounds are sounds which are made hy a
continuous flow of the sounding breath through the mouth
{and sometimes through the nose also), or, in other words,
WITH THE MOUTH OPEN ; as when we say i (ee). Ah !
Oh ! Consonant-Sounds are Cuts, Breaks or Limits
made hy the voice, which we put upon the sounding
breath, as that of the Jc in Jdag or in o (a) Jc. To ana-
lyze speech into its elements is to learn to utter, sepa-
rately, just the sounds which are contained in the
words, loithout regard to the way in which the words are
commonly spelled; as if we were to call o k' oak, omit-
ting the a which is not sounded.' This is also called
Spelling by Sound. It is of the utmost importance
to become perfectly familiar with analyzing or spelling
by sound, in order to understand, without confusion,
whatever is written or said about Sounds. (App. D,
p. 190.)

92. The Yowel-Sounds, even of all the languages

' The name we give to k is kay ; but this includes a vowel-sound
{ay). Practice enables one to explode the Consonants without the
aid of any appreciable amount of vowel-sound. The name is iic-t
the sound; or rather it is something more tlian the sound.

58 THE SKELETON ALPHABET,

of the world, are very few, although, as in the case of
colors, they may be made numerous by attention to
minor or intermediate shades of sound. The Three
Pivotal or Leading Vowel-Sounds are 1. a, which is,
for the purposes of Universology to be pronounced
ah, or like a in far ; 2, i, to be pronounced ee, or like
i in machine ; and 3, u, to be carefully and uniform-
ly pronounced like oo, or as some people pronounce
u in rwle (rool). Between a and i, there is e, to be
pronounced like a, or like e in obey ; and between i
and u there is o, with its ordinary pronunciation.
Two Vowels, pronounced closely, or with no inter-
mission, are called a Diphthong. Au (ah, oo) is the
leading diphthong. This leading diphthong will be
used as a short method of denoting all the vowels col-
lectively ; so that, to say au, is, as if we should say,
all the vowels. More strictly, au (ah-oo) fails to in-
clude the Middle-Mouth Vowels i (ee) and e (a) ; if
they are also explicitly meant, the Triphthong iau
(ee-ah-oo) is requisite.

93. The following Table exhibits the Natural Al-
phabet with the proper Ordinary Degree of Minute-
ness in the discrimination of the Sounds ; accom-
panied by the Headings and Side-Titles which de-
scribe the Specific Characters of the different Classes
of Sounds ; so as to initiate ja proper ^mderstanding
of their Inlierent Relations to the Primary Entities
and Laios of Being. Apart from minor shades or
with slightly important additions, this simple Alpha-
bet, primarily serving for the English language, is ffle-
quate to the representation of all existing languages,

OEDER OF SOUNDS. 59

and also of Alwato ; or, in a word, of aU possible human
speech. Marked or modified types will be elsewhere
introduced for the intermediate Sounds, down to any
requisite degree of fineness in the shades of sound.
Such is the simple character of The Universal Lingual
Alplmbet. This Skeleton Alphabet as it may be call-
ed — by analogy with a skeleton regiment in the army,
which has its Pivots or officers and its ground-plan
complete, to be subsequently filled in, up to its entire
complement, with subalterns and privates — though
characterized, in a general sense, as English, is so
only because the basis-distribution of sounds is the
same for Enghsh as for all languages ; hence the
adjective, English, may be omitted or parenthesized.
The Nasalization (97) is needed at this day even for
English as we have almost daily need for the trans-
literation of Erench words containing this sound.

94 The different Classes of Sounds are introduced,
in the Table, in the order in which they will be sub-
sequently considered; the "Vowels first, the Solid
Consonants next, etc. There are three bastard or less
pei-fect vowels, not hitherto mentioned, represented
by Italics (000), namely a, u, o, pronounced 1. as a in
mare or ai in air, or like a in at prolonged ; 2. as
M in cut, cuvd ; and 3. as aw in awrful or o in or (short
in not.) The eight vowels of the Vowel-Scale, (in the
following Table) are, therefore, pronounced, (in the
order of their accompanying numbers), as follows :

i e a a « oon

ee (in teet) ; a in fate ; aim air; ah In ah ! ; u in «m ; o in all ; o ; oo.

The diphthongs retain the exact values of the united
vowels. (The ai will occur for a.)

60 TABULATION OF THE ALPHABET.

TABLE No. 1.

THE BASIC OR SKELETON UNIVERSAL (aND ENGLISH) PHO-
NETIC ALPHABET.

3. Bachmtoufh. 1. Middle-m,ou(h. 3. FronPmoutli

(Throat) (Tougue-tip-and-teetli) (Lips)

6.

(o)

5.

(M)

Class No. 1.

4. 3.

a. («)

The Vo

2.

e

WELS.
1.

i

T. 6
O I

s,

ai-

-10

-

iii-9

oi— 11

ll

AU-

-13

Class No. 3. The Solid (ob true) Consonantb.

Statoid, Singtdmd, (Abstract, k (gortsh) t th p
or Si/mple, Inorgan- <
icoid. {^Concrete, g' (j or dzla') d «!!i' 1>

Motoid, Pluraloid, (Abstract, * sli s f

or Compound, Or- <
ganicoid. {Concrete, * zl> z v

Class No. 3. The Liquids or Vowel-like Consonants.
Statoid — Nasal iBg la . m

Motoid, i r

Class No. 4. This Ambigu's oh Coalescents.
(Diacritical Mark -") {The Nasalization.)

' Hard as in give.

^ th as in thj ; compare witli ill in ttigh.

SUPPLEMENTAEY SOUNDS. 61

95. This Alphabet is the General Basis, not com-
pleted in details (93), of an English-Adapted and
Universal Phonetic Alphabet. Its most appropriate
name is Tlie Skeleton (English Phonetic) Alphabet.
There are two additional Back-Mouth Consonant-
Sounds, occurring where the stars are placed in the
Table, (Class No. 2), namely, 1. the ch (or M) as in
the German nacA, and 2. the heavy correspond-
ing sound gh, which occurs in Gaelic and Dutch
(the old English as in througfA, \hough, etc.) and is
stiU extant in Scotch ; somids which are very primi-
tive, but which do not abound in the general range
of Languages. These go to augment this Basic
Alphabet, when instead of adaptation to the English
merely, it is to serve, also, as the Basis of the Universal
or International Phonetic Alphabet. There are also
two Vowel-Sounds 6 and ii (the French eu and u),
and two others e and i, (the French open e and Rus-
sian or Sclavic i, which should be added for the same
purpose. If then we discard g and j as compound
sounds (99), the number of Sounds to be reckoned
as belonging to the Skeleton Universal Phonetic
Alphabet is 36, the Skeleton English Phonetic Al-
phabet being, in this way, reduced to 30 sounds ;
but it will be found practically more convenient to
retain the g and j, {as if tJiey were simple), and
so to reckon this English Alphabet as containing 32
Sounds. It may be observed, in passing, that the
Theoretic number of a fnll Universal Alphabet is 64
sounds ; and that 32 is the half of that number.

96. None of these (six additional exceptional)

62 NASALIZATION DEFINED.

Sounds are, however, so practically fundamental as the
30 (or, including f and y, the 32) sounds which occur in
the English Language, as shown in the preceding
Alphabetical list ; (although the th and dh, occurring
in EngHsh, are also rare sounds with reference to
the general range of languages.) Modifications and
Intermediate Shades, especially of the Vowel-Sounds,
require additional letters, as previously stated, or the
marking of some of the letters here used, (93, 000) to
print, phonetically and satisfactorily, even the English,
and still additional ones to print ,all the numerous
languages of the earth. The details of this extensive
and intricate subject belong to other works. (See
especially The Vocabulary to the " Basic Outhne of
Universology," words. Psychology, Theology, Uni-
versology and Tikiwa ; and " The Alphabet of the
Universe," and " The Universal Alphabet.") What
is presented here is simply a Platform or Common
Foundation of A UNTVEESAL ALPHABET, from
which modifications and adaptations, for Special lan-
guages, and for various degrees of Phonetic -nicety
may take their departure ; in a word the Skeleton of
a Universal Alphabet, as explaiaed above.

97. The NasaHzation is a mere tinge of the Nasal
Consonant quality (Nose-sound or Twang) impressed
on pure Vowel-Sounde. Some languages have the
whole series of vowels so affected or in other words
a complete series of nasalized vowels, as the Choc-
taw, for iustance. The French has four vowels of
this order, usually represented by the French letter-
combinations an, in, on and un. It simplifies the

AXBTGUITIES AYOIDED. G3

consideration and representation of this exceptional
class of Towel-sounds very much, however, to treat
the Consonant-tinge so impressed on the vowels in
so far as a distinct sound as to denole it by a sepa-
rate sign which may then be affixed to any vowel.
(The sign adopted is a small n at the top, thus a", a",
o°, m"). There is also an Etymological advantage in
this method (for which also we have the authority of
the Sanscrit Alphabet), inasmuch as the Nasal Vowels
have originated by the absorption of Nasal Conso-
nants into the otherwise pure vowels. The NasaKza-
tion is placed in this Alphabet along with the Coales-
cents ; while yet it is not a letter, and is not numbered
in the Alphabetic Estimate. It is merely a Diacrit-
ical Sign, in the nature, more of the Accent-Marks,
and may be applied to any vowel. (See Introduction
"Andrews' and Bachelor's French Instructor.") (000.)

98. The numbers attached to the Vowel-Letters in
the Alphabetic Table represent the order in which
the Vowels and Diphthongs are generally made to
follow each other in a scale or series ; although, for
different plurposes, there are various other arrange-
ments or orders. The Consonant-Orders, variously
adopted, are still more numerous, but need not be
specified here.

99. It is a common Phonetic idea to represent
each single sound by a single letter ; but, practically,
this is not done in existing Alphabets, and need not
be insisted upon even for our present purpose, pro-
vided no ambiguities are permitted in respect to the
sounds which are meant — no matter how the certain-

64 COMPOUKD EUSMENTS.

fcy is attained (000.) Accordingly, th, dh, sJi, zh and ng,
are two-letter-combinations, each of wHcli represents
a single sound ; and tsJi and dzh represent two sounds
each, or are the equivalents of t, sh and d, zh. These
combinations are however so close, and behave so
nearly, in various ways, like simple sounds, that it is
convenient to admit them into the Alphabet, and to
treat them as such. They may be compared to
Cyanogen and other Compound Elements in Chemis-
try. Th and dh are used for the two sounds of th in
thigh, and thj, (dhy) ; zh is the French j, or the Eng-
lish z in azure. The ng is a single sound of the nasal
group, the g having no value as such, as appears
when this combination takes a true (" hard ") gf-sound
after it ; so, for example, the two words singer and
finger are phonetically represented (in this Alphabet)
by singer and fingger (sing-er, fing-ger).

100. The Yowel-Signs o, u, a, having no other dis-
tinction from o, u, a, than that of being italicized (94),
they should be changed to small capitals if the body
of the word in which they occur is already italic,
thus lyrod, for broad, etc. It has been thought im-
portant to avoid by such means the introduction of
any new letters or types. Observe that the English
long i (in pt'ne) is really a diphthong equal to ai (ah,
ee), very closely pronounced ; the two sounds squeezed
as it were together ; and that the English u (long) is
also, in a similar way, a diphthong, equal to ee, oo or
yoo, as in wnion.

101. Of the Solid (or true) Consonant Sounds,
those which are printed in the Table in a Light Line

ABSTSACTOrOS AND CONCKETOrDS. 65

type — the series ending at the lips in p, and the series
ending at the lips in/ — are Light or Thin, and hence
signify that which is absteact (or " The Abstract "),
as, for example, a Point without extension ; a Line
without thickness ; a Law ; a relation of two num-
bers as thought of in the mind ; and the like ; or the
Analogues of such Abstract Things. They do not
therefore, primarily, represent Beal or Concrete Ob-
jects or Things.

102. Those sounds, on the contrary, which couple
with these, and are printed in Heavy or Black-Faced
Types — the series ending at the lips in to, and the
series ending at the lips in v — signify that which is
Concrete (or " The Concrete "), that is to say, Eeal
Objects or Things, Mineral, Vegetable or Animal ;
things which have hulk, weight and substancive value ;
and the analogues of these objects even in purely Ideal
Spheres, as, for example, vnthin the mind itsdf.

103. This distinction between these two sub-classes
of consonant-sounds {Thin and Thick or Abstract-oid
and Concret-oid) has been -virtually seized upon for
a practical purpose by Isaac Pitman, the inventor of
Steno-Phonography or Phonographic Short Hand.
He has represented the Abstract, more strictly the
Abstractoid sub-class of solid consonant-sounds by
certain single Light strokes of the pen, and the cor-
responding Concrete or Concretoid Class, by precisely
the same strokes", with the mere difference that the
strokes are, in this latter case, made Heavy. These
are two sub-classes of sounds, within which each
Two Sounds produced at the same seat of sound and

66 PAIRING OF SOUNDS.

taken, one from the Thin or Abstractoid, and one
from the Thick or Concretoid Variety, make a couple,
as it were Male and Female, and so nearly resemble
each other, that if the sounds of one of these sub-
classes alone be taken and used for those of both,
the words so spelled are not, for the most part, un-
intelligible. A little awkwardness only ensues from
this change, as if, for example, a woman were set to do
a man's work ; thus, if instead of Mas(s)a(feA)use<(i)s,
we were to pronounce Ma«aju«e«i!«, the result would
be nearly the same on the ear. If, indeed, the pro-
nunciation be done deftly and lightly but few people
will notice the difference.

104. The Zc-sound and the hard sound of g (as in
give) are such a pair of sounds ; the t and the d; and
the p and the 6 ; and the th (in iAigh) and the th (in
thy) ; and the tsh and the j ; and the sJi and the zh ;
and the s and the z ; and the / and the v, are also
such pairs of the Solid Consonant-Sounds ; the first
of each pair being Abstractoid (or Masculoid), and
the second or remaining one of each pair (relatively
soft) being Concretoid (or Feminoid.)

105. It is probably only a small proportion of Eng-
lish speaking persons who practically recognize the
fact that there are two different sounds of th, one as
in thigh (thin, light, hard, abstract), and one as in
thj (thick, heavy, soft, concrete) ; and still less do
they recognize that there is, between these sounds in
thigh and thy, precisely the same kind and degree of
difference which there is, between t and d in tie and
die. The twoness of the letters first obscures to the

STENO-PHONOGEAPHY. 67

mind the fact tliat only one sound is represented in
any given case where they are employed ; and then
tlie sameness of the letters addressed to the eye, although
the sound varies, obscures stiU farther the difference of
sound addressed to the eaf ;

Segnius irritant animos demissa per auiem

Quam quae sunt oculis subjecta fidelibus. — Hoeace.'

106. The art of Beading as hitherto taught among
us, has, in ways similar to this, by in a word the
barbarous imperfections of our Alphabet and Or-
thography, greatly fostered the bad habit of hearing
with the eyes, so that as a people our ears have been
obfuscated and deadened until we are nearly incapa-
ble of learning the living languages of other nations.

107. The following Table exhibits the part in ques-
tion of Mr. Pitman's Steno-Phonographic Alphabet.
I have placed my own namings for the distinct
classes of sounds, over and opposite to them, for the
sake of preserving unity of system in the present
work.

TABLE No. 2.

ABSTRACT FEOM MR. PITMAN'S STENO-PHONOGRAPHIC

ALPHABET.

Back-Mouth. Middle-Mouth. Front-Mouili.

Statoid or \A^«tract, _ k / s | t ( tli \ p

Cardinoid. | Concrete, g /j {d (d!i\b

Motoidor {^'batract, _^ sli ) b (^ f

Ordinoid. [ooncrete, ^ zli ) z ^^ v

'Things communicated througli the ear affect the mind less
vividly than those wldcli are subjected to the faithful eyes.

CHAPTER IV.

TNHEEENT MEANINGS OF THE ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE.

108. The present chapter will contain a Tabulated
condensed statement of the Inherent Meanings of each
of the 32 (or, including -", the 33) sounds of the
Skeleton or Abridged (Basic) Alphabet, which is at
the same time the Basis of the English-adapted
Phonetic Alphabet, and, with a few additions, that of
the Universal Phonetic Alphabet, applicable alike to
all the Instinctual or Old-Style Languages and to
Alwato, the New Scientific Universal Language.

109. To cover more completely the usual range of
Vowel and Consonant-Sounds occurring in the va-
rious languages, it will be- requisite elsewhere, to add
the six other sounds above specified, ch, gh, 6, ii, e
and i (95). The Special Meanings of these six
sounds are, however, mere shades of Meaning of
related sounds which are herein given, and are, there-
fore, omitted from this elementary exhibit. The Al-
phabet so augmented may then be regarded as the
common or usual International Alphabet. All other
less prominent and intermediate varieties of Sounds

VOWEL-MEANINGS. 69

will be treated as Extra or Exceptional, and all Alpha-
bets which include any of them as Specialized or
Adapted Alphabets.

TABLE No. 3.

INHERENT MEANINGS OF THE ALPHABETIC SOUNDS.

I.

Of the Vowels and Diphthongs; the Specially Soft, Concessive, or
Homogeneous Sounds.

1. Of the Vowels.

I, (ee), Length ; Centering Continuity, Persistency,
Being ; Ens, Entity, or Thing ; someivhat Inde-
terminately or vaguely conceived of. I, POINT,
as End. (000.)

E, (a), Beeadth ; Sideness, Collaterality, Eelativity ;
Adjunct or Wing, Kelation, Law ; indetermi-
nately or vagitely conceived of. E, LINE, as Edge.

A, (a in mare), Thinth (thinness) ; Flatness, Subsid-
ence, Decline, Level, Supersurface, Attenua-
tion, Etheriality ; the 2"'' or Finer Form of
Matter; indeterminately or vagtiely conceived of. .
SUEEACE, as Flat Edge or Thin Side of Solid.

A, (ah), Thickth (thickness) ; Up-and-down-ness, Ac-
cumulation, Substance, (goods, wealth) ; Rich-
ness, Goodness, Exuberance; MATTEE,or the 1^'
Form of Matter, (gross, palpable, tangible) ; irtr
determinately or vaguely conceived of SOLID.

U, (uh). Time ; Flux, Current ; On-going ; Tempora'-
itlcs, Ordiuary Events, Sublunary Transactions ;
indeterminately or vaguely conceived of. FLUID.

70 DIPHTHONG-MEANINGS.

0, (aw), Space ; Expanse (up and around), the Empy-
rean, the Firmament ; Spiritualities, Oaedinaey
Events, Transcendental Affairs ; indeterminately
or vaguely conceived cf. SOLID-oic?.

O, Feont ; Light, Presentation, Brilliancy (as of the
face or countenance) ; View, Aspect, Prospect ;
Clearness, Demonstration, Scientific Insight,
Prevision, Theory ; Idea, Ideology, Idealism,
A priori, somewhat indeterminate. CEYSTAIi-
INE.

U, (oo), Back ; Shade, Eetiracy, Obscurity, (as of the
posterior and inferior portions of the body) ;
Occultness, Turbidity, Dubiosity ; Obser-
vational, Empirical Knowledge, Imperfect
Science ; Practice as contrasted with Theory ;
Experientialism as against Idealism, A pos-
teriori; indeterminately conceived of. COLLOID.

2. Of the Diphthongs.

lu, (ee-oo), Inteepeneteation ; Transit, Crossing,
Twirling, Copulation; indeterminately or vaguely
conceived of. GEEM.

Oi, (aw-ee), Masculism ; Super-incumbency and Em-
brace, (as of the Sky resting upon and em-
bracing the Earth) ; Canopy, Over-shadowing ;
indeterminately conceived of. IMPEEGNA-
TION.

Ai, (ah-ee). Feminism ; Sub-recumbency and Passivity
(or Eeaction as Passion and Prodaction, as
of the Mother Earth fecundated by the Light,

THE STATO-ABSTEACTOIDS. 71

Moistures and Magnetisms- from the Heaven
or Sty) ; Ground, Platform, Footstool ; vaguely
and indeterminately conceived of. PEOLIFI-
OATION.
Au, (ah-oo). Homogeneity, Inmnity, Unlimitedness ;
Interblending, Obliteration of Differences,
Proto-plasmal Incipiency, Quasi-inarticulaieness ;
vaguely and indeterminately conceived of. Inde-
terminateness or laclc of Limits or Bounds, and
consequent Vagueness, are the grand characteristic
of Vocality or Voiuel-Sounds. THE "UNLIM-
ITED (112.)

II.

Of the Oonsonanta ; Rigorous, Limitative, Differentiative or Setero-

genizing Sounds, (true Articulations or little-jointings —

Lat. a/rtieulus, A little joint.)

1. Of the Solids.

a.
Of the Abstractoid Solids,
a.
Of the Statmd (or Simple') Abstractoid Solids.
K, Simple or Single Offiiess or Feomness ; Apartness,
Division, Diefekentiation ; Abstract or Pure
Simple DuiSM.
T, Simple or Single Atness ; Togetherness, Unition,
Integbation ; Abstract or Pure Simple Unism.
P, Simple or Single Feom-and-Atness ; The higher
or Compound Integration of Apartness and
Togetherness ; of Division and Unition ; or of
Differentiation and Integration; Singe-ioise-
ness ; the Cardination (Latin, cardo, A hinge) or

72 THE MOTO-ABSTEACTOIDS.

hinging, in the one relation, of the two wings
or opposite aspects of the relation ; Cuneism,
(wedge-ism) ; Abstract or Pure Simple Tkinism.

Th, Pivot ; Interpunct or Interpoint ; (th and dh are
obscure in meaning or difficult of apprehen-
sion, and need not receive particular attention
in the first instance).

C or Tsh (= t, sh), Atom, Monad, Centered or Pivotal
Object in an Abstract Schema or plan ; and as
substitute for hh, Crasis ; a mashing, or break-
ing together as of broken lines. Q and j are
compound sounds admitted into the Alphabet
on the same footing as Cyanogen in Chemistry
(98.)

(i.

Of the Motoid (or Compound) Abstractoid Solids.

Sh, Compound or Plurahid FEomsTESS ; Dispersion,
Diffusion, Divergency ; Abstractoid Compound
Apartness, Eamification, or Branchiness ; Ab-
stract or Pure Compound DmsM.

S, Compound or Plurahid Atness ; Collection, Concen-
tration, Convergency, Abstractoid Compound
Togetherness, dumpiness, or Unition; Ab-
stract or Pure Compound Unism.

F, Compound or Fluraloid Fbom-and-Atness ; the
Compound or Pluraloid higher Integration of
Fromness and Atness, of Dispersion and Col-
lection, etc. ; Winnowing, Working, Fiaishing ;
Omni- variant Activity ; Abstract or Pure Com-
pound Tbinism.

THE STATO-OONCBETOIDS. 73

b.

Of the, CoTicretoid Solids.
a.
Of the Statoid of (Simple) Ooncretcdd Solids,
G, (hard as in gdve) Teuhk ; Process, Existence or
Forth-putting (cf. for, sense, Fr. pousser, to
GROW up) ; Tail or Trail and Trunk— all that
is contrasted with the Head ; Stalk, Staflf,
Stem, any Pro-cess, Procedure or Proceeding ;
Shaft-Hke or Concrete Continuation ; as the
" wake " of a vessel ; Bottom, Seat, Ground ;
the Eaeth as Fundamentum beneath and up-
holding the Sky or Heaven ; Poboe ; Primal
or Producing Force, Upheaval; a posteriori
OBIGIN or source.

D, Head ; Bulb or Kaob, End, Top ; Concrete Object
or Thing ; Superincumbent Weight, as of the
Head on the Shoulders, of the Sky or Heaven
on the Earth, etc. ; Bead-weight, Deadness,
Inertia, Eesistance ; Reaction, Permanency,
as of Eternal Principles ; a priori Origin.

B, Head-and-Texink ; the entire Body ; Body, Cada-
ver, Cadaver-like Organismus (called Inor-
ganic) ; Action or Blow, including Impact or
Primal Force and Eesistance. The Inorganic
World or Cosmos as contrasted with the Or-
ganic or Vital ; the Inorganismus or Mineral
World; Earth-and-Sky or Heaven (Gaxtb —
from g to b.)

Dh, Inteb-knob ; Head-centre, Hub ; The Turn-stile
3

74 . THE MOTO-OONCEETOIDS.

or standard with Arms — StabiHological ; (see
Th ; B. O. Index.)
J, (=d, zh), Bunch, Clod ; Centered or Pivotal Object
in a Concrete Schema or Congeriated Ar-
rangement; and, as Substitute for gh, Con-
crete Orassis or Mash of Substance or Sub-
stances; Earthy and Atmospheric Conjunc-
tion ; Earth in respect to its surface, soil,
weather, and mixtures or composts generally ;
The Earth as the abode or residence of Man.

)3.
Of the Motoid or (Simple) Goncretoid Solids.

Zh, Teee or Plant ; Vegetism ; Concretoid Branch-
ing ; Dispersive Force, Disruption.

Z, The Animal ; Animism — Concretoid Gathering
and Centering, a girding up to contain the
life ; the Cub, or Beast, including Man.

V, The-Plant-and-Animal transcended ; True Vitism ;
Human Biology, " Mind." The Organic World
as contrasted with the Inorganic; the Organis-
mus (Zhauv — ^from zh to v.)

2. The Liquids — Confluent.

a.

Statcdd — Extensumal.

M, Bigness — ^Magnitude, Muchness, plus, Outness,

N, Littleness — ^Minitude, Not-muchness, minus, In-

NESs. (M Affirmative, N Negative.)

THE LIQUIDS AND AMBIGU'S. 75

Ng, Mean Position — ^Neutrality, Indifference, Equal-
ity ; neither Mucli nor Little, Equation, neither
Out nor In.

b.

Mbtoid — Frofenstoncd.
L, Slowness — ^Littleness of Movement, Gentleness,
Sweetness, Softness, Lull.

E, Rapidity — ^Muchness of Movement, Violence,
Velocity, Eoughness, Rudeness, Eigor.

3. The Ambigu' s or Coalescents.

H, Atomic Diepeeence, — Etherial, Breath-like ;
Spirit ; Infinite Attenuation, Human-spirit-like
Being.

T, Radiating Centealitt — as of a Star ; Focus and
its Eadiations, Spiritual Pivotism or Centre of
Luminosity or Intelligence and of Heat or
Love ; Godhood, The Soul. Spiritual Vital
Centre of any Object, as of the Universe or of
the Individual.

W, Caedmated Sequentiality — as of an animal's
tracks in a Pathway or Trail ; Eeciprocal Side-
wise Inter-communication, as of companions
walking, (waddling, wagging, waggling, walk-
ing) and in conversation ; Intercourse, Conver-
sation, Language.

-n, (The Nasalization, or Nasal Twang), Incompre-
hensibility, Mystery, The Ineffable ; Je ne sais
quoi.

CHAPTER V.

JTJSTmCATION OF THE ASSIGNMENT (AS MADE IN THE
LAST TWO PEECEDING CHAPTERS) OF THE INHEBENT
MEANINGS OF THE ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE.

110. The Voweh and Uach Class of Cons<ynant- Sounds
represent, as shown in what precedes, a Primitive
Logical or Nomological Aspect, and hence, in this
sense, a Law, pr First Necessary Condition, of Being ;
which is then true, also, in greater speciality, cf each
Individual Sound.

111. The Vowels represent Proto-plasmal Being,
the (JoUective Undifferentiated Materials or Ingredients
of Being, with, at most, preliminary or incipient as-
pects, only, of Differentiation and Organization. This
Domain is therefore collectively the Homogeneity of
Being, and, in its Universal Aspect, it is Kant's Real-
ity, or Something, or " The Unlimited " or "Infinite."
The Interspaces of Silence in Speech represent Kant's
Negation. They are the Analogue of Blank Space,
Zero, or Nothing.

112. The Consonants are Breaks and Limits in
Vocality, and represent, therefore, Kant's Limitation
which is Heterogeneity. The Thin or Abstractoid

NOVEL NAMES OF SOUND-CLASSSS. 77

Consonants represent strictly, " The Limiting," to
peras, and the Thick or Concretoid Consonants, " The
Limited," (B. 0. a. 20-25, t. 204, 467.) The Liquids
represent Inter-blended or Generalized Limitation, the
return from The Heterogeneous towards The Homo-
geneous, by the mingling and expunging of the
sharper Lines of Differentiation. The Ambigu's or
Coalescents represent those still finer Essences of
Being which are Spiritually Yital, and which border,
transitionally, upon The UnUmited or Infinite (the
Vowels), on the one hand, and upon Limitation or
The Finite (the Consonants), on the other hand.

113. The Alphabet is distributed, it will have been
observed (Chapter III.), into Classes of Sounds
bearing titles some of which are new, the propriety
of which will appear, however, in some instances,
immediately, and, in other instances, upon further
consideration. Solids is a term of this novel
character. It has not heretofore been employed
in classifying Sounds ; but the term Liquids is of
long and well established usage, and it implies
Solids, for the counterparting and hitherto unnamed
class. Abstract and Cdndrete (more strictly Abstracfoid
and Concretoid) are new in this application for those
two great Classes of Consonant-Sounds which have
been heretofore very variously named as Thin and
Thick, as Sharp and Dull, as Light and Heavy, as
Tenues and Medice, as Surds and Sonants, as Whispered
and Spoken, as Hard and Soft Cheeks.' The new

' Max Mliller.

78 GEOXINDS FOB ASSIGNING MEANINGS.

terms Abstracts and Concretes or Abstractoids and Gorv-
cretoids will be found specially appropriate as directly
indicating the Grand Fundamental Distinction in
Ontology between " The Abstract " and " The Con-
crete" with which these Sounds are, by inherent
analogy, in strict accord, and which they will be used
throughout the Structure of the New Universal
Scientific Language to represent.- The remaining
unusual terms, Statoid, and Motoid, 8inguloid, and
Pluraloid, Inorganicoid and Organicoid, Cardinoid and
Ordinoid, involve so much of detail that it will not
be appropriate to explain them here. They do, how-
ever, ia part, explain themselves.

114. To exhibit in detail all the grounds upon
which these Particular Meanings are assigned, as in-

. herent, to these several Sounds of the Alphabet, would
require a Volume as large, perhaps, as the whole of
this Synopsis. For want of space, the statement of
these reasons must be very greatly condensed here.
They are partly Analogical, partly Analytical, partly
Synthetical, and partly Cumulative or He/lective.

115. The Analogical proof is that which results
from such considerations as were presented in a
preceding chapter; from the fact, in other words,
that. Language being a Minor Universe, or an
Epitome of the Universe, in its Generals, it should,
also, conform ia its own. Distribution to the Distribu-
tion of the Universe itself down to the minutest de-
tails ; and hence that the Elements of Speech shotdd, by
a strict A priori reasoning, answer, item for item, to the
Onioloqical Elements of the Universe at large. (Oh. JSl.)

ANALOGICAL AND ANALTnCAL BOOTS. 79

116. The Proofs are -liwaZj/iicaZ, when, having ascer-
tained that a given Glass of Sounds corresponds vsdth
a given Cosmical Bealm or General Category of
Thought and Being, as, for instance, the Thin Solid
Consonant-Sounds with The Abstract, and the Thick
Solids with The Concrete, we then analyze one of
these Cosmical Realms into its Constituents, and, at
-the same time, analyze the corresponding Class of
Sounds into its Components, and assign these In-
dividual Component Sounds to the corresponding
several parts of the Cosmical Realm in question. It
is thus again that The Abstract itseK being found to
be sometiines Simple or Single (as a One Line, or
One Point, etc.) and sometimes Compound or Pluri-
form (as that which is composed of many points or
many lines), we seek for a similar difference in Sub-
Classes of the corresponding Class of Sounds, and
find it as between the Statoids or Single " Hard
Cheeks " or Explodents, the k, t,p, which are made by
a single effort of the voice, on the one hand, and, on
the other, the Motoidsor " Frictionals'" (or Compound
" Hard Cheeks ") sh, s, /, which involve a mixed vari-
ety of the vibrations of the voice. The Simple Ab-
stract is reduced, by further Analysis, to Division,
Differentiation or DcnsM, on the one hand, to Unition,
IntegraOon or Umsm, on the other hand, and to the
Elnge-wise-ness — ^Half Separative and Half Unitive —
the Cardinism (Lat. cardo, A HINGE) between Division
and Unition, which is the related Teinism of these

' Prof. Elsberg.

80 THE TESTIBUIiE OF LANGUAGE.

two. These Three Fundamental Varieties of The
Simple or Unimorphic Abstract, — Division, Unition, and
the Singing of these Two upon each other, — are then
found to be answered to or represented by the Three
Particular Sounds of this Class k, t, and p, respec-
tively. The Pluximorphic Abstract distributes into
similar Particulars represented by sh, s, and /. T/ie
Concrete undergoes also Analogical Distributions
throughout, terminating on the Sounds which repre-
sent the Three Kingdoms, Mineral, Vegetable and
Animal, respectively, (b, zh, z, 000.)

117. The Proofs are Synthetical, when they are de-
rived from a comparison of the Parts and Shapings
of the Mouth in the production of the Sounds, and
from the Effects on the Ear, or from the characterof
the Sounds themselves as made and heard ; and when
by this method of examination (the production and
the audition of the Sounds), indications are discov-
ered of real alliances with corresponding ideas, or: of
a Natural Fitness in the Sounds to express or to ex-
cite given ideas — ^not merely nor mainly by an ex-
ternal and obvious imitation, the bow-wow theory, but
more truly, by an interior and occidt symbolism or
enactment of the corresponding ideas. This peculiar-
ity of sounds is illustrated in the following instances :
Let a sMUed Phonetician, with some elocution-
ary power, utter and prolong and exaggerate a little
the trill of the consonant-sound r, and no one wiU
fail to detect in the rapid vibrations of the point of the
tongue, and in their effect upon the ear, an exact re-
semblance to the whirr and buzz of a circular saw or

CUMXn/ATIVE OK EEPLECTIVE PEOOFS. 81

other roughened wheel in rapid rotation. It is in ac-
cordance with this quality in the r, that it is fixed scien-
tifically as the Analogue of Rapidity, or of the pliis-
quantum of motion or velocity. On the contrary, let the .
same elocutionist render the real value of the sound I,
and it will be found to be the opposite of the r in qual-
ity or character, and to be the striking imitation of all
gentle movements, or of the minus-quantum of motion
or velocity. By similar methods and close observa-
tions of the mechanical production of the sounds by
the organs of speech, and of their suggestive effects
upon the ear, it has been found practicable to deter-
mine empirically and with proximate accuracy, in
confirmation of the pure theory, the Primitive or Or-
ganic Meaning of each Articulate Sound. It is the
difficulty of this kind of proof, however, that it re-
quires viva voce illustration, to be rendered obvious
and demonstrative, and that it cannot, therefore, be
made wholly available by mere description. In im-
mediate connection with this subject stand the splen-
did experiments and discoveries of Helmholtz on
Sound and Voice, which, exhaustively pursued, will
conduct to a complete mechanical exposition of the
reasons of the echoing character between oral and
musical sounds, and, finally, of these last, and so of
both, with corresponding mental and objective states.
118. The proof is Oumulative or Reflective, when it
arises from the weW-working of the theory in practice ;
by the constant accumulative mass, therefore,,of con-
firmations reflected or cast back upon the theory by
the practical application of it in the infinitely ex-

82 ETYMOLOGICAI, CONPIEMATIONS.

tended aod varied system of word-building which is
characteristic of Alwato. This test will in every
particular delight the thorough student of the sub-
ject, and the guidance supphed by this new percep-
tion of the identity of Sound and Sense will come to
be regarded by him as the most perfect and exhaust-
ively comprehensive of scientific discoveries, instru-
ments, and methods.

119. As part of this latter species of proof, there
is also an immense current of etymological confirma-
tions, of the instinctual or spontaneous order, recur-
ring throughout the Hindo-European family of lan-
guages, and which it would carry us too far to
attempt to illustrate extensively here. Plato, in his
PhsBdo, furnishes some examples from the Greek.
The following instances from the English of the
forceful and vigorous nature of the sound r, and of
the gentle sweetness of the I must suffice at this
point. It is, however, a discovery of no little im-
portance, in this connection, that by the Principle of
Universology called Tekminal Conversion into Op-
POSiTES (B. O. t. 83), there is a strong tendency in
words to go over into the directly opposite meaning from
that which is primitively inherent in, or native to,
them. This occurrence is indicated, in the following
Lists, by the Heading : Subdominance of the Opposite
Meanings. These lists contain a nearly exhaustive
showing of the root-words of the English language
which begin with the letter-sounds r and I, together
with some few others (where these sounds occur in
the middle or at the end of the root.)

DOMINANT MEANINGS OP E. 83

1.

The Letter-Sound B.
a.

Dominant Meaning: Discontinuity, or Solution of
tJie Continuity, by the application of Force, which, re-
peated or continued, is Eapidity of Movement ; ivhence,
as Special Glasses of Meaning 1. Break, 2. Eoughness
(brokenneas of Surface), 3. Tuen or Curvature {the
continued repetition of breaks), 4. Beat {the Simple
Active application of Force)^ and 5. to Grab or seize
(the application of Force either to accelerate or to arrest
Motion.)

1. BrEAK, (b)reak (to break out with Moisture),
rack, racking (pain), rock (a broken fragment), ruck,
rift, raft, rupture, ^iff-rafF (broken stuff), rut, route (the
breaking up of the enemy's position) ; raze, 7-azure
(destruction) ; rash (out-breaking, violent), rush,
rave, rage, row ; to rea?% (to break ground or break
up his gait as a horse) ; (w)rig, (wriggle) ; rag (a
thing broken or torn), ^Idge (the break at the top) ;
ravine (a break in the ground), to rive, ray (an angle,
or break of light), rad-ius ; radix, root, (where the
plant is broken off when it is pulled ; compare with
branch, the thing broken off), romp (a " break
down "), rump (the break of the body) ; rumple,
rumble, roar (breaking noise), rummage, rampart,
rampage, run (" to break and run "), r^eum (flux),
ruin (Lat. ruo to rUSH) ; race ; current, course ; raid,
rail, rip ; ramus (a branch.) Even rest is the break
off of Motion ; so, contrariwise, rise, raise, and rouse
are breaks from the quiet state.

84 SXJBDOMINANT MEAOTNGS OP E.

2. BovGM (and strong) — a broken surface — ruck-ed
ruff, ruf3e, ripple, raffle (to rudely jostle together) ;
rug, rugged, rude, (c)rude, raw, raucity (hoarseness,
roughness of the throat), rugose, rugate, wrinkled,
rasp, rodent (gnawing), rat (a gnawer and noise-
maker), rust (cor-rod-ing), rattle ; rank, rancor, rub.

3. TurN (continuous breaking of the direction or
course), round, mndle, ring, rinse (to swash the
water around), roil, roU, rollick, wrap.

4. Beat, rap, ram, rain, (^patter, eom.-pa.Te, for sense,
to pat and <Q heat.)

5. GrAB (to seize), rob, rape, ravish (seize with
violence), rapacity, ravage ; creep, ramp, rapid
(clawing along) ; rake, reap (to gather in) ; wrapped,
rapt (snatched away, as in a trance) ; rhapsody, rap-
ture, rope (a binder or holder) ; rich (having gather-
ed in) ; compare for sense, the relation of the Saxon
ric, meaning -dom or domain, Lat. reg-o to eeign,
with rich, and at the same time Ger. graf, a noble
of a particular order with Ger. greifen (to seize) and
Eng. grab. The rich man is, in primitive sense, the
grand grab, seizer, or conqueror.

^- .
Svbdominance of the Opposite Meanings of R.

1. Sttetch, (not break — owing to the tenacity of the
material to which the force is applied) ; strain, straight,
Ijat. rect-us (stbaight), rectitude; rigor (what is
drawn tight), regular, rule, reach, right, rate (of
movement from strain or effort) ; ratio, reason, read,
reel (drawing out, continuing).

DOMINANT MEANINGS OF L. 85

2. BXJB, (to make smootli, not-rough ; to un-
roughen ; as to sJcin means to remove the shin, not to
put it on, as it should mean by analogy with to dress.)

2.
The Letter-Sound Jj.

a.

Dominant Meanings : Continuity, from lack of any
suffide/ncy of Force to produce Bupture or Breakage,
whence Lentitude or Slowness {the Ardithet of Sapidity ;
see E.) The Special Classes of Meaning are, 1. NoT-
beoken-ness, 2. NoT-EOtTGH-NESS (Unbrokenness of
Surface), 3. Not-eound-ness, 4. Not-geabbed (or seized)
i. e. notforcefvRy held ; not subject to much static force.

1. Not-beoken-ness, Zasting (continuous), leisure
(time not broken in upon), Hst (a continued string-
lite exhibit), fevel, ?awn unbroken surface, (level
means not canted or inclined, not diverted, bent or
broken from a primary simple position) ; Zoathe (to put
far away), ?oth (keeping far off), Zoaf, a ?oaf, a division ;
tobby (a waiting dalliance or delay-ance room), Zate
(post-poned), to Zeave (put off), Sberty (freed condi-
tion, enlarged, extended), Hfe (continuity of being),
Zava, Zane ; Zurch, tength, Zate.

2. NoT-EOUGH-NESS, (not-brokenness of surface
whence smoothness, gZabrousness), Zubricatal, lubri-
city, Zumbricus (a slippery worm), Zampry, Ziver ; sZid-
ing, gZidiQg, sZippery ; sZow (smoothness or gentZeness
of motion), Zuxation (a Zoosing), Zuxury (smooth
soft-fZattering condition) ; Zusciousness (softness and
sweetness to the taste) ; Ziniment, Zining, (a soft-

86 DOMINANT MEANINGS OF L.

inner surface), Lat. Hngua (the tongue), whence lan-
guage, from its gZabrous or sHppery character ; Hck,
?ap, Zecher ; tee (calm shelter) ; iike (smooth or even
■withj, teef (kind, fond), tove (gently affecting), as Hef ;
Zeer (to look flatteringly), teman (a sweet-heart.)

3. NoT-KOUND-NESS (not continuously diverted or
broken), whence Zong (the opposite idea to roundness),
to Zong for (to be drawn out in a direct Hne towards an
object, by one's desires) ; lank, link, lean, line, lane,
loon, teap, languish, languid, Zeisure (time prolonged),
Zymph, Zath, Zathe (thinness and extension), Zatus
(Lat. for broad or extended) and Zatus a side (the
fZank or thin part) ; Zead, Zode, Zoin (the thin .extended
part.)

4. NoT-GEABBED (or held), Zax (let go Zoose), Zaugh
(to relax the features) ; Zoose, Zose, Zoss, to Zeave, a
Zeaf (something folded out), Zet (permit to go), teft,
Zoud, Zease, Zot, Zicense ; Ziquid, Ziquor (what is Zet to
flow) ; Zout, Zubber, sZuggard, Zummox, ZobZoUy-boy,
Zuck (what happens without constraint) ; Zazy ; Zack,
Zace (having Zacunaa or Zacking places), sZack, sZow,
Zower, Zag, Zay, Zie, Zodge, Zatent, Zurk, Zure, Zair, Zinger ;
Fr. Zit (a bed), Zitter, Zand (the flat surface) ; Zow
(sagged down from Zaxity), Zisten (cf. to Zie Zow) ; Zake
(a low place, a " sink-hole "), Zagoon (stagnant water),
Zedge, the Zap (a fold) ; Zance, Zaunch, Zunge (Zet drive),
Zunch (a free irregular meal) ; Ziberty, (freedom, per-
mission, Zet go), (iber (the bark, what sZips off ; a book
the Zeaves of which fall asunder or are free) ; Zimb,
Zobe ; Zung, Zobster, Zug, Zuggage, Zoad, Zip (what hangs
or dangles, what is Zoosely attached) ; Zump ; Zapse,

STJBDOMINANT MEANINGS OF L. 87

Lat. lahov (to slide and go down) whence ?abor as that
which fatigues, relaxes, overcomes ; ?atch (what is tet
to fall), batches (faults, things which fail or fall away
from the obhgation) ; Zouse, Hzard (a glider.)

b.

Siibdominance of tJie Opposite Meanings of L.

1. To BEAT or strike ; 2. To geab, fasten or hold.

1. To BEAT or strike ; to ?ick, to /amn (let fly at and
hit), a Zamb, a young animal arrived at the killing or
knocMng-down age) ; lamina (anything beaten flat),
Ger. bZatt, a Zeaf, a fZat thing (Eng. bZade) ; Lat. (ux
and Zumen, Eng. Zight (Lat. Zuceo, to shine — ^to
stream or beam out and strike or fall upon), Zucid,
Zuminous, Zook ; Zift (up-heave), Ger. Zuft (the air,
what is above) ; Zoft, Zevity, Zightness.

2. To GEAB (or fasten), a Zigue (a binding, Lat. Zigo,
TO BIND, the use of a Zine ; Er. Zier, to tie) ; a Zock
(as of the hair ; what is first left free to flow, whence
it curies in upon itself or fastens together, Lat. pZico,
to fold), Zock (a fastener) — this opposite idea result-
ing from that of first Zeaving free.)

120. In respect to the scientific probability that
Sounds should comport their own meaning, there are
two schools of opinion among philologists, on the
subject. Socrates, Plato, Heyse and Max Miiller re-
present a class of scholars who have persisted in be-
lieving in this inherent natural alliance between
sound and sense, in advance of any great positive
abihty, on their part, to estabhsh the theory. There

88 DE. LAKDNEB ; PEOF. WHITNEY.

is, however, in this, as in all things, an adverse class
of able but innately conservative thinkers who have
always great capacity for pronouncing dogmatically
as to what cannot he true or can never be accomplished ;
and sometimes it occurs that their croaking proph-
ecies of impossibility are refuted almost before
they are uttered, by the actual accomplishment. An
illustration occurs in what is popularly attributed to
Dr. Lardner in respect to the impossibility of navi-
gating the ocean by steam. Of the same character
will be found to be such utterances upon the subject
now imder consideration as the following ex cath&dra
announcement by the learned Professor Whitney, of
Tale : " That sc/me degree of such subjective correspond-
ence, felt more distinctly in certain cases, less so in
others, may have sometimes suggested to a root
proposer, by a subtle and hardly definable analogy, one
particular complex of Sounds rather than another, as
the representative of an idea for which he was seek-
ing expression, Tieed not be absolutely denied. Only, in
admitting it, and seeking for traces of its influence,
we must beware of approximating in any degree to
that wildest and most absurd of the many vagaries re-
specting language, the doctrine of the natural and in^
kerent significance of articulate sounds." '

1 " Language and the Study of Language," by Wm, Dwight
Whitney, Professor of Sanscrit and Instructor in Modern Lan-
guages, in Yale College, p. 430. This last expression, " the inher-
ent significance of articulate sounds," seems probably to have
been quoted from previous publications of my own. The italics,
in the above extract, have been supplied by myself, to exhibit both
the admissions and the assumptions of this dictum. S. P. A.

THE COTTNTER-TEEDIOT. 89

Despite of this verdict of conservative science,
the truth of the subject will rapidly vindicate itself
with the progress of the development of the new
language. In the following chapter a few prelim-
inary specimens of word-buOding by the new prin-
ciple will be exhibited. It is only with the expansion
of the subject, however, far beyond what the hmited
nature of this little work will permit, that the over-
whelming force of the demonstration will fuUy ap-
pear. It is a mere basis which we can, at the most,
hope, herein, to estabHsh.

CHAPTER VI.

DISCBIMINATION OF THE POSITIVE AND THE NEGATIVE ;
THE CHAOTIC AND THE OEDEELY ; THE HOMOGENEOUS
AND THE HETEEOGENEOUS, WITH OTHEE FUNDAMENTAL
ONTOLOGICAL DIFFEEENCES ; AND OF THE COEEESPOND-
ING LINGUAL AND ALPHABETICAL CLASSIFICATIONS.

121. Although Nature Science and Art have been
presented and hitherto insisted upon as the leading
distribution, practically, of the whole Universe of Af-
fairs, stiU there are other distributions which are in
a sense more primitive, and to which we must now
give a portion of our attention. Metaphysically, the
Fundamental distribution of the Universe of Concep-
tion is into, 1. Something or Eeality, 2. Nothing or
Non-Reality, or Negation, and 3. Limitation, which
last is properly Articulation, or the Hinging Line, or
the Joint, between the Something and the Nothing.
Kant's Three Categories of Quality or of the Quali-
tative Constituency of Being are, accordingly, 1,
Seality, 2. Negation, and 3. Limitation.

122. In the corresponding Qualitative Constituency
of that Special Universe called Language (which we
are now treating as the epitome of the Great Uni-

CONSTTTTIENCr OF UNTVEKSE AND SPEECH. 91

verse), 1. The Something or Reality is Sotind or the
Intoned Breath, 2. The Nothing or Negation is
Silence, or the Intervening Spaces, or Silences, be-
tween Discourses, Sentences, Words, Syllables, and
Sounds, and 3. Limitation is Articulation, or the
breaking up of the homogeneous or continuous
sounding breath into special or differentiated partic-
ular Sounds, while, still, these Sounds are held to-
gether in Discourse ; and, so, being, at the same time,
ioth separated and united, and, hence, cardinated or
bearing a hinge-wise relationship to each other, they
are denominated Articulate, or Articulated Sounds ;
the word, "Articulated" being derived from the
Latin articulus, A little joint or hinge.

123. In a similar or correspondential manner, in the
Outer Material Universe, the diffused Ether which in-
fills Space echoes to and represents the mere Abstract
or Metaphysical Something or Beality of Being ; the
Blank Space itself holds the same relation to the
Metaphysical Nothing ; and the Mathematical Posit-
ings and Divisions of Space, and the Bodies organ-
ized from the Ether, in the Space in subordination to
the mathematical points, lines and surfaces limiting
or articulating them, as the planets or other objects
in nature, correspond collectively to the Metaphysical
Category of Limitation ; (" The Limiting" and " The
Limited," B.O. a. 20, t. 204); so that there is Coeres-
pondence or Echo between the constitution of Language
and that of the Material Universe and that, again, of the
Abstract Metaphysical Domain of Pure Thought, re-
spectively.

92 "realitt" and "limitation" in speech.

Accordingly, the Silences of Speecli are repre-
sented on the printed page of any book by " Blanks,"
or by what the printers call " Spaces " — the identical
two terms {blank and space) wjhich are applied to the
Nothing, or Negative Aspect, of the Material Uni-
verse — Blank Space, itself.

124. Dismissing this back-lying and lowest dis-
crimination ; dismissing, in better terms, the Nothing-
Element of Speech, the Silence or Silences, which last
correspond to the Interstices of Space in the Consti-
tution of Matter ; and turning our attention to what
remains, or rather to what results from the Some-
thing-Element in conjunction with its Negative Base ;
to the Utterance, in other words, or Phonos of Lan-
guage ; this, then, undergoes a primary division which
echoes, in a higher or concrete sense, to the remaining
one of these metaphysical differences, that between 1.
Eeality, and 2. Limitation. The " Reality "of Lan-
guage, or, what is the same thing, the Substance-hke
Element of Speech is, then, Vocality, or, in other words,
the Complex or Aggregate of the Vowel-Sounds ; and
the "Limitation" or Articulation of Speech, the
Morphic or Eorm-Uke Element, is the complex
or aggregate of the Consonant-Sounds — ^whence it
happens that the Consonants are habitually denomi-
nated Artioulations, in a more special sense than that
in which the term. Articulate, is apphed, generically,
to Speech or Language at large.

125, But, intermediate to the prior distribution of
Speech into Sound and Silence, and the subsequent
distribution into Vocality and Articulation, there is

"THE infinite" AND "THE ABSOLUTE." 93

another (less important) division or distribution to
be noticed. This concerns the difference between
the so-called Inarticulate Sounds made by animals,
and in part also by the human voice, as in sneezing,
coughing, and the like, and True Articulate Speech.
By Inarticulate is here meant, however. Indeterminate
Articulation, or articulation of a lower grade, in the
same manner as by the term Inorganic we do not
mean that which has no kind or degree of organiza-
tion, but that which is relatively without organization.
Inarticulate sounds may be taken to correspond with
meteors, meteoric dust, and the like, which have the
same amorphous and anomalous relation to the regu-
larly constituted planetary bodies and other stiU
more highly organized objects which these inarticu-
late sounds hold to language as articulate speech.
This Indeterminate Eegion is the Analogue of the
"Primitive Chaos," of the poetical conception.

126. Assuming, now, the diphthong au (ah-oo), as
representative of the vowels at large, — ^the whole
Vowel-Scale (92), — which it is, with sufficient ac-
curacy for ordinary uses, the termination -io (ee-o)
■ to mean Bealm or Domain and -ia (ee-ah) to denote a
Principle, we have the Alwato word au,io (ah-oo-ee-o)
to denote the realm or domain of Unlimited or Infinite
Beality — Unlimited or i?y?mfe, because there is no such
element of sound appearing therein as denotes Limi-
tation, which it is the special function of the Conso-
nants to do. Au,io means, therefore, The Infinite
Eeality, or Simply " The Infinite." It is, still, how-
ever, The Infinite, (Illimited or Unhmited) in a Sen-

94 "the ikpinite" and "the einite."

sible or Comprehensible sense, such as is Bdative, or
Belated to our Comprehension or Capacity of Under-
standing. Hence it is The Ordinary or Non-tran-
scendental Infinite. If we, then, add the Nasalization,
(97, 153, 156) as the sign oi Incomprehensibility, we have
au°io, meaning The Absolutely Infijiite or Transcen-
dental Eeahty, — ^rationally inferred, but incomprehen-
sible, — or, in simple terms, " The Absolute." In this
latter coupling, the meanings are as follows :

1. Au,io, " The Infinite " (The Unlimited ; The Homogeneous.)

2. Au»io, "The Absolute" (The Incomprehensible, "The Un-

knowable.")

The termination -ski (skee) means science or lore
(German -lehre, 24.) Auski means, therefore, Phil-
osophy in the general or ordinary sense (Empiri-
cal), and au°ski means, specifically, Transcendental
(or Cardinary) Philosophy, (purely Eational.)

127. We may, in the next place, assume the Con-
sonants ng, k, V, 1, as the appropriate representative
group of those Sounds (including one of each Con-
sonant Class) to denote the Consonants at large, or
aU the Consonants, as au was chosen to denote the
Vowels (126.) Aided in utterance by the au, (the Con-
sonants so require the Vowels), and (if preferred) by a
prosthetic e, we have ngkauvlio or engkauvlio (eng-
kah-oo-vlee-o) to mean " The Finite," or The Lim-
itary (the function of the Consonants being Limita-
tion). Coupled in this sense we have :

1. Au,io, " The Infinite " (Relative, Common, or Ordinary.)

2. Engkauvlio, "The Finite " (Engkauvlski, Echosophy, B. 0. t.

13 and c. 3 do.)

THE UNCONDITIONED AND THE CONDITIONED. 95

128. Sir William Hamilton has, with great subtle-
ty, perceived The Infinite and The Absolute to be
the two species of a genus, which he calls The Un-
conditioned. This last, The Unconditioned, should
embrace, therefore, in its representation, both the
pure or unnasalized Towels and the Nasal Vowels.
Hence its appropriate naming is au,i,au°,io (ah-oo-ee-
ah-oo^-ee-o.) To this the proper and full antithet
is engtau,i,au°vlio (fngkah-oo-ee-ah-oo°-vlee-o)
meaning The Conditioned, including enkauvHo, The
Ordinary, and engtau"vlio, The Transcendental
Finite. Some of these terms may seem somewhat
awkward to the neophyte ; but the ideas themselves
are of the most subtle and embarrassing, and natural
language then exactly echoes this embarrassment. As
we descend to more feasible domains the words will
become correspondingly/easiWe. (The i at the mid-
dle of these compound terms means and.) It will
appear, elsewhere, that Shau,io (shah-oo-ee-o),
is the more usual naming for The Conditioned,
Aushio (ah-oosh-ee-o) for the Unconditioned ; Sau,io
(sah-oo-ee-o) for The Finite (The Collected and In-
cluded), and Ausio (ah-oos-ee-o) for The Infinite,
(The Excluded Unlimited.) ( .)

129. Intermediate between these two, The Unlim-
ited " EeaHty " (The Vowels), and The " Limitation,"
(Consonants), there is a still more subtle Spiritual
Eegion, the Eational-Being-Domain, {the God-Spirits-
Humanity-dommn), Tim Theandric Domain, or Thean-
drismus ; which is represented by the Ambigu's or
Coalescents (Half Vowels, haH Consonants ; h, y,

96 -10 AND -SKI COMPAEED.

w, °.) This is named Hwau°io (lioo-a]i-oo"-ee-o).
Swedenborg may be mentioned as a representative
name in connection with this subtlest of all possible
domains of human investigation.

130. We return now, from this embarrassing pre-
amble of all philosophical distribution, to the more
feasible and pleasing arena. Assuming au,io for
the Common Infinite, or merely Unlimited, the Simple
Undefined Domain (which is to be primarily subject-
ed to distribution), it subdivides into the following
Eleven (or with the Collective au, Twelve) depart-
ments, (guarding the termination -ski for Science.)

TABLE No. 4.

a. Elementary.

140, (ee-ee-o), The Ens- or Being-Do- laM, (ee-skee), Ontology (not-trans-
main, cendental.)
B,io, (a-ee-o), The Eelation-Domain. Eflld (a-skl, Nomology "Logic" —

Enski, Hegel.) (000.)

b. Elaborate.

(A,io, (o(ir)-ee-o), Etheriallty-domain. Aa\A, (a(ir)-8kee), Etherlalogy ; the

Science of the Second Form of Mat-
ter, (B. O. t. 63).
A,io, (ah-ee-o), Materlallty-domain. Aski, (ah-skee) MiTBEiiLOOT ; the

Science of the First Form of Matter,
(B. O. t. 63) ; Indeterminate or Phi-
loBophoid NATUROLOGY.
J7;io, (ah-ee-o), Time-domain. " Con- Dski, (nh-skee), Tempoboloqt.)
tlnnity"— Container of Co-Sequen-
ces.
0,lo (aw-ee-o). Space-domain. Soli- Oskl, (aw-akee), Spa-oe-ologt.)
darity — Container of Co-existen-
cies.
0,lo, (0, ee-o). Form-, or Idea-Domain. 0skl,(o-8kee),In4eflnite Morpholoot,
(Tlieory, Vision, Een.) Ideology ; Indeterminate or Phiios-

ophoid SCIENTOLOGT— SoiENTO-
Phuosoput. Clato, Owcu.j

EB-STATEMENT.

97

U, io, (oo-ee-o), Movement-domain.
(JPracticet Experience, Feeling.)

TTski, (oo-Bkee), Motologt, Bractical-
ogy. Indeterminate or Philosophoid
ARTOLOGY ; (PEAOTioAi Philos-

OPHT.)

[ii,io, (ee-oo-ee-o), Harmony-, or Con- lueki, (ec-oo-skee), Harmoniology.

junction-domain.

Oi,io,(aw-ee-ee-o), Super-incumbency- ^ski, (aw-ee-skee), SuPEBNOLoeY.

domain.

Al,io, (ah-ee-ee-o), Sub-recumbency- Aiski, Ikfebholost, Fundamental-

domain. ogy,

131. We may, now, restate, in abstract, the lead-
ing portions of the preceding distribution, as follows.
(Bead from below upward in this more formal Tabu-
lation.) (B. O. c. 3-6, t. 15.)

TABLE No. 5.

AoQBki, (ah-o-oo-ski), Ela-
borology, of the Indeter-
minate or Philosophic
Domain.)

Ie8ki,(ee-a-Bkee), Elemen-
tologt; The Recondite
or Occult Metaphysical
Substratum.

ELABOEISMUS.

3. Uski, (oo-sH), Akto-Philobopht, (B. O. In-
dex),

(AETISMAL.)

3. Oski, (o-skee), SciENTO-PHiiiOaoPHT, (B. O.
Index),

(SCIBNTISMAL.)

1. AbM, (ah-skee), Natceo-Metaphtsiob, "Phil-
osopnT " in the Most Ordinary and General
Sense.

(NATTJRISMAL.)

ELEMENTTSMTJS.

1. Eske, (arskee), Nomolosy, Logic ; (The Law.)

i. Iskl. (ee-skee), Ohtology ; (The Things.)

132. This same Domain is again re-stated, in a
modified but more practical way, in the following
Table. (Bead still from below upward.)

98 PHILOSOPHT, SCIENCE, EEIJGION.

TABLE No. 6.

3. Iu,ia, (ee-oo-ee-ah), EELIGION.

(Ecstatic, Vital, CulmiiiatiTe, Harmonic.)
(Cf. Gr. eu well, and Gtr. ending -ia,— Tlie Essence of all Good.)

2. OsM, (o-skee), SCIENCE, in the High Idealistic

Sense. SciENTO-PHrLOSOPHY. (B. O. Index.)

(Pure Theoretical, Guiding, Governing.)

1. AusM, (ah-oo-skee), PHILOSOPHY.

(Metaphysical, and Practical, as Basis.)

Two Grand Leading Sub-Scibwces.

2. I,iaski, (ee-ee-ah-skee), Compabology, (Science
of the Identity of Priinciple as occurring in differerd
Spheres or Domains.')

1. I,ioski, (ee-ee-o-skee), Monospheeology (Sci-
ences of the Single Sphere or of Single Spheres.)

(These two also culminate in lusM — ^the Science
of Eeligion — as Harmonic Keconciliation.)

133. Among the sets of correlative terms employed
in General Science, two of the most important, while
yet of the most vaguely comprehended, are the terms
Homogeneous and Heterogeneous. The first of these is
derived from two Greek words, Tiomoios, same or
smnAB, and genoe, kind or soet, and the second from
keteros, OTHEE, and genos. Etymologically, there-
fore. Homogeneous means of the same kind, and
Heterogeneous, of diffeeent kind or kinds ; but the
etymological meaning of scientific terms frequently
gives a very inadequate idea of their actual meaning
as they are practically applied.

HOMOGENISM AND HETEEOGEKISM. 99

134. Nothing whatsoever is, throughout, of one and
the same kind to that absolute degree that no dif-
ferences can be discovered in its various parts ; and
nothing is, on the other hand, so composed of dif-
ferences that no common ground of sameness or simi-
larity can be found to exist between the parts. But,
relatively, or in Preponderance, some objects are
Uniform, that is to say they are nearly uniform in
their composition and in all their parts, as Water or
the Air, for instance ; and other objects are highly
complex, as, for instance, the Human Body, or an
Edifice, the Mind of Man, Human Society (with aU
its manifold interests) and the like. It is this dif-
ference between objects as Simple or Uniform, and
as Complex or Multiform, especially in respect to
the Substances of which they are composed, which is
intended, iu Science, by the terms Homogeneous and
Eeterogeneotis. The terms Undifferentiated and Dif-
ferentiated have similar meanings, but may perhaps

tend to apply rather to Forms than to Substances.

135. Even the same word may be differently used
to mean at one time, the Homogeneous Aspect of an
object, and at another time, the Heterogeneous As-
pect. For instance, if we speak of Earth as a sub-
stance, as when we say Earth, Air, Fire and Water,
we assign to it a Homogeneous character, leaving it
unlimited (or nearly so), even in our thoughts, in re-
spect to shape or form, or the lines of difference, be-
tween its Component Parts ; but if we speak of Sarth
or the Earth, meaning the planet which has that name,
we have before the mind a heterogenized or highly dif-

100 THE HOMOGENEOUS AND THE GENERAL.

ferentiated object, with definite shape or external limits,
and with distinctive differences of the parts. So, in
another sphere, if we speak of Mind in general, we
mean mind as a uniform and unlimited ideal Substance,
and, therefore, as Homogeneous ; but if we speak of
TJie Human Mind, or of the mind of a particular indi-
vidual, we mean, as it were, a determinate and highly
differentiated object, a Complicated Organismus, and
as such, something Heterogeneous in kind.

136. The diffused Universal ether which, theoreti-
cally at least, fiUs aU space, may be taken as the
Type of what is signified by The Homogeneous —
technically The Homogenismus ; as the typical re-
presentative, ia other words, of all objects or parts
of Nature which are homogeneous in character. A
planet, with its freightage of minerals, vegetables
and animals, our world, the earth, for example, the
limited Cosmos, enucleated from its matrix of dif-
fused and attenuated matter is, on the other hand,
the Type of what is meant by The Heterogeneous
— technically The Heteeogenismus ; as the typical
representation, in other words, of all objects or parts
of Nature which are heterogenized in character.

137. The Homogenismus of the General Cosmos in-
cludes The Proto-pragmata, Being, Matter, Time, Space,
etc., and easily lapses into the idea of general diffusive-
ness and Liquidity, which belong, however, really to the
Generalismus, defined in the next subsequent paragraph
(138.) These Liquidities are, primarily, the Great
Ocean of Ether, then, the Atmosphere as repeating it,
then, Water and aU Fluids, and finally, all Plasmas,

MLAU.IO AND MLAUSKI. 101

Emulsions and the lite ; and the Analogues of all these
in other more special spheres, as in the human mind,
for instance. The Heterogenismus subdivides, on the
contrary, into the Inorganic World (the Inorganismus)
and the Organic World (the Organismus) ; or into The
Mineral World, on the one hand, and The Vegetable
and The Animal Kiagdoms, on the other hand. (140.)
138. The Universal Homogenismus — Al,au,io — ^is
{par excellence) The Inttnite ; and Time {ii,io), Space
(o,io), etc., are Special Infinities ; but The Homo-
geneous, with any less extensional affix than al-, Ues
nearer to The Conditioned or Limited. It is a tech-
nicality of the Sciences, or of what is Positive, though
diffused, and, hence, it is closely allied with the idea
of Generality. This latter (Generality) is, however,
wholly within the Limitary, and is named, there-
fore, from the Consonants ; but from that class of
them which is most confluent or least distinctifyiag.
These are analogous with the Liquidities described
.in the preceding paragraph (137) and are specifically
the " Liquids." These are adapted especially to the
naming of all Being the type of which is Liquidity.
The combination ml is then chosen (a leading sound
taken from each Class of Liquids) to serve with au to
supply the name for Generality. Mlau,io, is, therefore.
The General Domain (technically the Generalismus),
and MlausM, is Generalogy (The Indeterminate As-
pect of things, broadly extended and interblended, the
lines of discrimination partially obliterated.) Auguste
Comte functionates in this department of Positivity
which he calls Natural Philosophy.

102 KAUVIO,

139. The CoTinterparting term is kauvio, The Spe-
cial, (teclmically The Specialismus ; or the Domain of
Special and Exact Limitation, or Discriminations, or
of Speciality. The Particular Sciences are called
Specialities and their Professors Specialists.) Kauvski
is Specialogy. It is Tvithin this that Spencer begins
his distribution of the Sciences — into 1. The Ab-
STEACT, 2. The Conckete, and 3. The Absteact-Con-
CEETE Sciences. ShaupsM is Ahstradology (Logic
and Mathematics), zliaubski is Goner etohgy, and
n^blauflski, Ahstract-Canaretologi/. This last term is
nearly unpronounceable in itself, but it implies in its
Composition these Special Sciences 1, Mlauski Ghem-
istry (in a Special Aspect named Jauski, Monadol-
ogy), 2. Blauski Mechanics, and 3. Fauski Physics —
of which three it is somewhat arbitrarily composed.^

' The awkwardness of tlie word in such instances is not the faidt
of the new language (Alwato), iut one of its chief excellences, for it
reveals by the incongruity of the Sounds so brought together the
corresponding incongruity in the classification of the subjects them-
selves. Tet, there may ie reason and convenience (in some very
general aspects of Classification) which would furnish names es-
sentially uneuphonious. The words may still serve as a visible
notation for things too heterogeneously allied to comport any
better single naming ; or, the effort to pronounce such words may
serve as a vocal gymnastic ; or, finally, their very incongruity may
serve as the most effective criticism on a classification which would
demand such namings, as a lingua] vote, so to speak, against it,
and perhaps as a means of banishing it from popular acceptance.
But if it be desirous to retain the particular class, other and more
euphonious designations can always be devised by changing the
principle of Combination : thus Shausd-zliawtoski is a literal AI-
vVaso translation for Abstract-Concretology. (See, also, other works.)

BOjIO AND VO,IO. 103"

140. Ztaubski distributes into the proper Sciences
of the three kingdoms. Without tracing the details
it may be said that b meaning body apart from the
specific idea of life (109) bau,io (bah-oo-ee-o) is
the Alwaso term for Inorganismus (the mineral and
planetary world), and v, meaning living body, vau,io
(vah-oo-ee-o) is the Alwaso term for Organismus (or
Living World.) Treated of, however, in respect to
their more presentative aspect, these terms modulate
more properly in the simple and euphonious single
vowel 0. Thus bo,io is the Inorganic Cosmos, and"
vo,io the Organic World culminating in, and spe-
cially signifying man, mind-vision mind. (Zhauv-io is
more strictly The Organismus entire.) This last, vo,io,
(or zhauvio) then subdivides into (or has, as subordi-
nate) zfio,io The Vegetable Kingdom and zo,io. The Ani-
mal Kingdom, the two Grand Branches of the Organic
World, respectively. (The termination -so converts
them into Adjectives, thus ; bo,io,so, eelating to the
Inoeganic World, and Vo,io,so relating to the Or-
ganic World, zho,io,so relating to the Vegetable
Kingdom, and vo,io,so, eelating to the Higher Ani-
MAii Kingdom, etc.)

141. Objects which are homogeneous or of the
same constitution throughout, are the materials or
stuffs out of which heterogenized or differentiated ob-
jects are composed ; whether as an outlying ocean of
such substances not yet constructed into specific ob-
jects ; or as the interstitial confluent materia,ls which
permeate and so infill the more specifically differen-
tiated parts of objects ; or as, in fine, the plasmasj

104 VOWEL AND CONSONANT CHAKACTEES.

emulsions, and fluidities contained in the vessels of
tlie more highly organized beings; — the Homoge-
nismus and the Generalismus being readily con-
fluent with each other, as Liquid Sounds readily
decline into Vowels. Homogeneous things are,
therefore, greatly identified with Substance, or the
" Keahty " of the Metaphysicians, the element of
Form (or " Limitation ") figuring, in respect to them,
only in a subordinate way. The appropriateness of
the " Eeal " or Pure Vowel-Sounds, the soft, mushy,
concessive element of language, for their representa-
tion is, therefore, very obvious. (91, 111, 143.)

142. Heterogeneous or heterogenized objects, and
the heterogenized parts of objects have, on the con-
trary, the element of FoBM or Shape, or the " Limi-
tation " of the Metaphysicians, predominant or ruling
in them ; and Substance is subordinated. They are,
therefore, appropriately represented by the Conso-
nant-Sounds ; for, while the Vowels are homogeneous
in character, the Consonants are heterogeneous, or
heterogenizing or limitative of the Vowel or Suhstan-
dve element.

143. The. actual cavities and interstices of struc-
tures, as of a planet (caves, etc.) or of the human
body, as relative vacuums, are the analogue of Noth-
ing, or the " Negation " of the Metaphysicians, con-
jointly with the outlying and surrounding space (123).
This Nothingness is closely allied with Generalization
which carried to the ultimation exhausts all Particu-
larity and ceases to be, except as the metaphysical
echo (of the " Eealists ") to the Eeal World ; and

EXTENSION AND CAEEEES. 105

Generalization is, in turn, allied (141) with Liquid-
ity. The Liquids are of two kinds, 1. Static and
Nasal, m, n, ng, (Nose-Sounds, resonant), and 2. Motic
and Oral or Flowing, I and r. The Nasal Liquidity
(m, n, ng) Static and resonant, has for its Analogue
in Nature, the Great Eeservoirs of Fluidity, with
their glassy or mirror-like surface or Reflexion (Mind-
wise) in Calm, and The Besonance of Ocean-Caves
in Activity, and so Expanse or Extension ; and The
Flowing Liquidity (?, r) is analogous with Cur-
rents or Streams, and so with Orbital and other
Caeeees. (It is the Bastard Vowels u and o, for Time
and Space, which counterpart the Beal Vowels and
correspond with "Negation.")

144. Homogeneous objects or substances are
named by Suhstanche Substantives — rum-pluralizalM,
or such as have no proper plurals, as air, mud, pitch,
gold, metal, liquid, etc. If plural forms occur in re-
spect to such nouns, they denote not so much dif-
ferent individual objects as different kinds of the same
object. Liquids means, for instance, different varieties
of liquid, and not merely different masses of the same
liquid. Heterogenized objects are, on the contrary,
pluralizatle, or have true plurals, as horses, homes, mjen-

145. The Incorporated Homogenismi of the Cosmos
have been recently discriminated with some accuracy,
by Hugh Doherty, in a work, called " Organic Phil-
osophy," Volume First, " Epicosmology," and have
been furnished with a seriated list of names; Geo-
sphere (earthy) Atmosphere (aerial), ThaUatosphere
(watery), etc.

CHAPTER VII.

METHOD AND ULUSTEATIONS OF AlWATONI WOED-
BTJILDING.

146. The Ultimate Elements of Speech (or, other-
wise, the Primitive Elements, according to the order in
which we consider the subject) are, practically, as
results from all that has been shown, the Vowel and
Consonant-Sounds, represented by the Alphabet of
Signs or Letters. These correspond with the so-
caUed Ultimate Elements of Organized Substance
(Chemical.) But, the proper Working Elements of
Language are different from these and correspond
with the so-called Proximate Elements of an Organ-
ized Object, the human body, for instance. These
are the Two-letter {ox. Bi-literal) Root-words, which are
produced by compounding one consonant with one vowel-
sound, as Bi, (bee), be, (ba), ba, (bah), or, inversely, one
vowel with one consonant-sound, as IB, eb, ab, etc.

147. To make the primitive combinations of the Vow-
el and Consonant-sounds into these Two-Letter-Eoot-
words, seizing the appropriate meaning of the root-
Word so formed as logically derived from the mean-

AN EXPLANATION. 107

»

ings of the prior elements (those of the separate Yowel
and the separate Consonant-sound involved in each
such combination), is a work of skill, tasking the
keenest insight of the expert Phonetician-and-Univer-
sologist, and demanding, perhaps, a specific faculty for
the quick perception and the profound, appreciation of
analogies ; as, in the case of Chemistry, it must be
the professional chemist who deals with ultimate (or
primitive) analysis and synthesis. The meanings of
the Two-Letter-Eoots are best, -then, for ordinary
purposes, stated dogmatically and accepted on au-
thority — the way being always open for recurring to
the deeper analysis by all those who take pleasure
in doing so, or by those whose mental constitution
or state demands the more absolute demonstration.
148. To illustrate : the h-sound denotes breath-Uke-
heing, spirit, and o denotes presentation; b denotes head-
and-trunk (or bulb-and-shaft), and o presentation ; and
m denotes muchness and outness, and a (ah) denotes sub-
stance. Now it may require the mental tactus erudi-
tus, and a large and clear oversight of the whole
field of analogy, to derive, with scientific confidence,
the meaning man or humanity from the combination
of h and o into ho ; or that of body from that of b
and o into bo ; or that of mass (or matrix) from that
of m and a into ma. It will be *better, therefore,
practically, for ordinary works of instruction in the
new language not to go so far back towards the
beginning-point of the verbal creation, but to assume
as known, after the fact shall have been established

108 AN niUSTRATTON.

•
by the more occult philosophy, that ho means man,

that bo means body, ma mass, etc.

149. But from this point onward and outward the
process of Word-Building becomes simple and dehght-
ful. Taking our departure from the Two-Letter-Eoots
as a basis, of which there are nearly two thousand
— more than the number of actual root-words now
extant in the whole Indo-European family of lan-
guages (including those of five, six, and even seven
sounds) — ^the compounding of these, as syllables,
into longer words, with corresponding compound
meanings, is a process which will be instiuctually and
easily acquired by the common, and even by the
wholly uneducated mind. This process corresponds
with the Confection of Proximate Elements, as of the
albumen of the egg, the starch of the flour, and the
sugar, by the cook, in the domestic economy of the
kitchen; not necessarily demanding any previous
chemical education.

150. To illustrate : the meanings of ho,bo, and ma,
being known, or accepted on authority for man or
humanity, hody, and mass, respectively, it requires no
special genius or learning to combine them into
hobo, for the human hody, hoboma, for the mass or
bulk of the human hody; homa for human mass, society,
or folks, (as we say the masses, for tJie people), homabo,
for the hody of society, etc. It is in this manner that
(not a few thousands of words, aU that we have now
in any existing language) but millions on millions of
words wiU be spontaneously formed, so simple in
their structure as to be seH-defining, dispensing with

*TWO CONSTITOENCIES OP ALWATO. 109

the necessity (so far as tJiey are concerned) of any '
dictionary, and serving the most complex and yaried
necessities of the human mind. Another department
of the new language wiE, however, he derived from the
materials now extant in existing latiguages ; a more
arbitrary department, for the definitions in which
the services of the dictionary will stiU be required.
Even the forms of the words and sentences, and, sub-
stantially, the whole of the leading existing lan-
guages, and hence, their literature intact, may be
thus preserved and imbedded in the matrix of the
New Scientific Universal language ; and the acquisi-
tion of these Special tongues will be, at the same time,
immensely facilitated by the knowledge of the phil-
osophy which underhes and has produced them.
Alwato will then stand, centrally, like a Rotunda in the
midst of a huge Speech Temple — the Entire Lingual
Structure of the Planet — ^with an internal, direct, and
convenient passage-way conducting to the heart and
centre of each of the Old-style or Instinctual Lan-
guages or forms of speech ; so that while it may seem
to replace them aU, and ultimately to dispense with
them, it will truly conserve them all ; and wiU more
than compensate for the partial obsolescence it may
bring, in the coming ages, upon the extant literature
of a single tongue, the English, for instance, by the im-
mense facility it will offer for the mastery of that which
will then be the ancient literature of aU tongues.

151. The remainder of this chapter will be devoted
to a very abridged exhibit or slight sample of the two
methods of the Composition of the Vocal Elements

110 I (ee) being.

into Sigmficant Words, ia accordance with the prin-
ciples of Alwato ; which may be called

A TABULATED SYNOPSIS

OF

ALWATONl OB ALWASO WOED-BUTLDING.

I.

Ultimate {or Primitive) Synthesis— from the Alphabetic

Sounds and their Meanings, up to the Two-Letter

Roots.

1.

Alphabetic Sounds and their Meanings, selected from
Table No. 3, Chapter IV., {mth some license and
enlargement of Statement), as Elements of Sound
charged mth Elementary Meanings.

a. Selected Vowels and Diphthongs.

I (ee), Being (Entity) ; Centre or Core (of Being) ;
Continuance, Peotension, Persistence or holding
on (since anything in order to be must continue
through Time) ; Stretch towards a centre or
given point ; Intensity, Intention ; Intuition or
gazing on ; a stretching of the vision towards ;
the Affection and Competency for immediate
and essenticd or absolute knowledge.'

' It will te a natural first impression with the student of Alwato
that every word of the new language should have a single uniform
and invariable meaning, so that all possibility of amjbiguity should
be at once and for ever excluded. But, such is by no means the
case Indeed, in respect to Elementary or Root-Words, just the

E (a) EELATION. Ill

E (a), Eelation ; Siding ; that which is accessory or
adjunct (applied or added to the centre) ;
imng-]ike, ancillary, or coefficient ; The Affec-
tion and Competency for relative and exact
or scientiJiG knowledge, and discursive rea-
soning.

A (ah), StjbStance ; thickness, richness, goodness;
The Good.

Z7 (uh), Time ; Flow, Flux, On-going ; Stream or Cur-
rent ; Vaguely Peotensive and Experiential.

(aw), Space ; Expanse, Out-and-In-going ; Exten-

SIONAl.

O, Pbesentation ; View, Theory ; Idea ; Aspect or
Prospect ; The Tkue, The Lucid, or Luminous.

opposite phenomenon occurs. These words are charged with such
an immense quantity of meaning, or, in other words, with such an
aggregate of different hut related meanings, that they can only be
defined hy accumulating a crowd of words from the Old-style or In-
stinctual Languages. The specializing division of this aggregate
meaning is then indicated hy some new or additional element, and
the more special meaning hy still another additional element, and
so on, until, in the end, the exclusion of Ambiguity/ is attained to
to the extremest practicable degree, and the minutest specific dif-
ferences indicated. For example, i signifying all the various as-
pects of 'Being undifferentiated, mi signifies Afftrmative Being, ni
Negative Being (Inness to the Vanishing Centre, In ; nor, neither^,
li Perpetual or Continuous, Level or Similar Being, ri Temporary, In-
terrupted, or Broken Being ; {refieeted, turned back), bi Concrete In-
organic Being, vi Concrete Organic Being, Life, etc. The Comhina^
tions of the Syllabic Root- Words so formed then combine to repre-
sent still more specific meanings. The transcript of Nature is iu
this way far more perfect than if the new language contained only
words of exact specification.

112 SELECTED CONSONANTS.

U (go), Movement ; Actuality, Practice, (Art) ; Per-
spective ; The Beautiful ; Shaded ; Blended.

lu (ew), Copulation, Conjunction, Marriage.

Oi, Superincumbency, Overshadowing, Masculinity.

Ai, Ground, Lap, Bosom, Matrix, Femininity. ( .)

Au (ah-oo), — ^having the general force of the Vowels ;
Mixed or Undifferentiated EeautT; The
Homogeneous ; but Elaborate. (92, .)

le, Elementism (Including i and e). The Substrate of
Abstract Principles (131, 132.)

lau. The Aggregate of Elementism and Elaborism.

b. Selected Consonants.
K, OiT-ness, From-ness, Apartness, Dieeeeentiation;

Division.
T, AT-ness, Conjoint-ness, Primitive or Simple Inte-

GKATION.

P, HiNGE-wise-ness, Caedinality; higher, compound,
or double-acting Integeation; bi-compound
Condition ; (the sound is made at the lips.)

G, FoECE, active energy; projectivity ; Peoceeduee,
Peocess, Teunk.

D, Eesistance, Soltditt, Object, Counter-presenta-
tion; Eeaction, "that which is given;" the
Somewhat ; Head, Knob, Lump, Eotundity.

B, CoNEUCT, or Co-aptation ; Blow (force-with-reac-
tion) ; Body, the embodiment, in form, of
direct and reactionary forces ; knocking to-
gether, Building, Steuctuee. (Cf. Fr. hattre,
TO beat, hdtir, to build, hatiment, a building,
SHIP, etc.)

AMBIGU'S, NASALIZATION, ETC. 113

c. Amhigu's.

H, BEEATH-like Being ; Halitus, Spieit ; Attenuated
and Diffusive Esse/nce.

Y, Personal Pivotality ; Spiritual Centricity ; Eadiat-
ing Centre ; Godhood, or eminent personality.

W, Mutual side-inclinings, as of the two sides of the
body in walking, or of two companions walk-
ing and talking with each other ; wee-wah or
see-saw, as the flapping of wings, or of the
battens of a double door, or of the lips in talk-
ing ; Mutuality, Reciprocity, Intercourse, Conver-
sation, (Lat. con, with ; and vertere, to tubn) ;
Language.

°, (the Nasalization,' 97), IncomprehensibiUty, Con-
fusion, blending Indeterminateness ; je ne sais
quoi ; the twang in the nose of the religious
enthusiast, striving for unity with the Absolute
(and the Infinite.)

2.

Primary Combinations of Ultimate, or Primitive, Ele-
ments {Alphabetic Sounds), into Secondary, Proximate,
or WoKSJSOr-Elements — Two-Letter-Roots.

-io, (as a termination ; i heing and o presentation or
display), meaning -dom, realm, or domain, (pro-
nounced ee-o.)

-ia, (as termination; i heing and a substance), meaning
-ism, -ness, -ity ; the Principle or substance of
the being of an object, (pronounced ee-ah.)

114 TEEMINATTONS.

Ki, (k, q^-ness, ^ctrf-itivness, and i, being, meaning the
partness or partitiveness of being, and, especially,
OP (the Preposition ; pronounced kee.)

Ti, (t, at-ness, conjointness, and i, being"), meaning at
(the Preposition ; pronounced tee.)

Ku, (k, q^-ness, andu, proceedence or movement), mean-
ing FEOM (the Preposition ; pronounced koo.)

Tu, (t, ai-ness, and u, proceedence, meaning to (the
Preposition ; pronounced too.)

Ho, (h, Spiritual Centre — punctum vitce, and o, pres-
ence), meaning Man.

Bo, (b, embodiment, and o, presence), meaning body.

Ma, (m, muchness, outness, and a, substance), meaning
Mass, Outer or Gros flatter; (pronounced mah.)

Na, (n, littleness, inness, and a, substance), meaning In-
ner or Choice Mass or Substance, Mind ; (pro-
nounced nah.) (Cf. Gr. nous, Mind.)

-so, (as a termination ; s, collection, compression, smooth-
ness, and o presence). Adjective Termination,
meaning of like quality as, -ous, definitively
like, (Pr. -eux, euse.)

-sho, (as a termination ; sh dispersiveness, diffusion,
roughness, and o presence), Adjective Ending,
meaning crudely like, approximately like, -is^,- oid.

-to, (as a termination ; t, a<-ness and o, presence), the
most general Substantive-ending, meaning
thing, any object or idea whatsoever.

-ski, (as a termination ; s, definite collection, co-ordina-
tion, k cuts, lines, divisions, and i, being), mean-

"eealmic" termination, -10. 115

ing Science, -logy, -ology, -lore, Ger. -Mire; (pro-
nounced skee) ; -skiso, -ohgical.

— U, (as a termination ; 1, continuity, level, equality, and
i, being) Adverbial Ending, Eng. -ly.

-ni, (as a termination ; n, in, and i, being), meaning in
(the Preposition ; pronounced nee.)

n.

Proximate or Ordinary Synthesis, {generally) of the
Two-Letter-Roots into Words.

Au,io, (pronounced ah-oo-ee-o), the realm or domain
of OEDmAET "Eeauty," or of the Sulyect-
matter of Being, capable of being "differen-
tiated" or "limited," but as yet Unlimited or
Infinite ; assumed, however, as comprehensible,
or capable of being known — by the subsequent
insertion of thought-lines; The Compeehensible
E.EAIJTT, or Eeality in an Ordinary or Non-
transcendental sense. The Homogeneous, The
HOMOGENISMUS ; Empirical Reality ; " The Un-
Hmited." (B. O. a. 20, t. 204.)

Au"io, (pr. ah-oo"-ee-o). The Incomprehensible
(Eeality) ; " The Unknowable." Caedinaet,
Transcendental, or Rational Eeahty or Being

I,io (pr. ee-ee-o). The Central (Being), " The Abso-
lute," in an ordinary sense, as in speaking of
an absolute Worldly ruler ; or, philosophically.
Being as Centered in Objects, as Contrasted
with Rational or Intelligent Being (I^io.)

116 DOMAINS OF BEING.

I"io, (pr. ee"-ee-o), " The Absolute " in the high
philosophic or transcendental sense ; The Esse
of Swedenborg ; the Pure Universal Ego, the
Ego in itself. The Self-Centred Intelligence of
Fichte ; as contrasted with Objective Being
(I,io.)

E,io, (pr. a-ee-o), " The Eelative " or Belated, in the
Ordinary sense ; The Collateral Environment ;
"What stands le-lated, or at the Sides.

Enio, (pr. an-ee-o), " The Eelative," in the high phil-
osophic, transcendental, or Cardinary sense ;
The Uxistere of Swedenborg.

A,io, (pr. ah-ee-o). The Eeal or Substantial (Mate-
rial), in an ordinary sense.

A°io, (pr. ah°-ee-o), " The Eeal" or " The Ground"
(of Being), in the high Cardinary sense of the
Transcendental Metaphysicians.

Ngkauflio, (pr. ngkah-oof-lee-o), " The Limiting,"
" to peras" (B. O. a. 20, t. 204.)

Nggauvho, (pr. nggah-oov-lee-o), " The Limited,"
(B. 0. a. 20, t. 204.)

Ngkauvlio, (pr. ngkah-oov-lee-o). The Heteeogenis-
Mus, the Limit-and-the-Thiag-limited ; The
Limitary, a term which may be employed
to signify combinedly " The Limiting "
and "The Limited;" and, hence, the whole
scope of the Consonants; the Limitary Ele-
ments, in Speech,, and as Antithet for au,io,
" The Unlimited."

SAMPJ^ ■WOED-BUILDING. 117

Al, (pr. aH), AU, Universal, Entire. The Universe (cf.
Ger. das All, The All, used for The Universe.

Wa, (pr. wah), interchange of substance, or of some-
what, or whatsoever ; What (Fr. quoi) ; Eoot of
all words meaning (Spiritual) Intercourse, or
Communication.IiANGUAGE, Utterance, Speech.

(-to, (as termination), Thing, object, in the most gen-
eral sense.)

Aiwa, (pr. ahl-wah), universal (spiritual) communica-
tion or interchange.

Alwato, (pr. ahl-wah-to), universal speech-thing ; the
name of this New Soientifio Universal Lan-
guage.

(-so, (Adjective termination), meaning -oiis.)

(-li, (pr. lee), (Adverbial termination), meaning -ly.)

Alwaso, (adj.), relating to Alwato ; having the quality
or character of Alwato. *

(Alwali, (pr. ahl-wah-lee), after the usage of Alwato.)

(-ni, (pr. nee), (as termination) meaning (the Preposi-
tion) IN.)

Alwatoni, (pr. ahl-wah-to-nee), meaning in Alwato,
(as we say anglice, meaning in English, or in
the method of the EngHsh language.)

Alau,io, (pr. ahl-ah-oo-ee-o), " The Infinite," assumed
as Comprehensible ; the Universal, Undifferen-
tiated, or as yet Unexplored " Enowable." The
Universal Unlimited, (Ordinary, not Transcen-
dental.)

AJau^io, (pr. ahl-ah-oon-ee-o). The Incomprehensible
Infinite ; " The Infinite " in the Cardinary,
Transcendental, or Incomprehensible sense.

118 SAMPLE WOED-BUILDING.

Go, Tkunk ; train, track, trail, tail; elongated Process,
pathway, or orbit, as of a planet.

Do, Head ; knob, lump, clod ; any roundish object or
body ; a planet or any of its analogues.

Bo, antliropomorphic (or man-shaped) Body ; head-
and-trunk, somewhat undiscriminated (as in
the sepia or cuttle-fish), and without, or,
rather, irrespective of Vitality.

Zho, a vegetable Object ; a tree or plant.

Zo, an animal ; animal (adj.), etc.

Vo, an organic or living body, more than vegetable or
animal, being both ; humanoid body ; human
attribution ; Sight, Mind ; (the Mind's Bye.)

Bodo, the head of the body.

Bogo, the trutk of the body.

Bobo, The Body, including Head and Trunk fully

discriminated ; the complete man-like body,

hut not distinctively living.
Vobo, the living body specifically.

Zhodo, a vegetable head, as a cabbage or lettuce

head.
Zhogo, a vegetable trunk or stalk.
Zhobo, a vegetable truuk-and-head ; the stalk and

plume or clumpy part conjoined.

Zhovo, the inflorescence of the plant, specially vital.
Zodo, an animal's head.
Zogo, an animal's trunk.

SAMPLE WOED-BUrLDING. 119

Zobo, an animal carcass.
Zovo, the liviiig animal body.

Zodoso, pertaining to or resembling an animal's head,
Zogoso, pertaining to the trunk of an animal's body.
Zoboso, pertaining to the animal carcass.
Zovoso, relating to the live animal body.
ZoYoli, in the manner of a living animal body.

Ho, human.

Ho,io, (ho-ee-o), the Human Sphere or Bealm.

Hobo, the Human Body.

Hoboma, the mass of the human body ; (ma, mass.)

Hobogo, the trunk of the human body ; the torso.

Hobodo, the head of the human body.

Hobobo, the embodiment of the human body, as an

organically constituted whole,
Masa, (mah-sah), mass, collection ; (sa, collection.)
Homa, or homasa. Society, The human mass(es.)
Homabo, the body of human society.
Sama,io, (sah-mah-ee-o), a collection or assemblage

of objects.
Hobosamaio, a collection of human bodies.
Hoboso, (adj.) relating to the human body.
Hoboni, (adv.), within the human body.

152. It wiU be appropriate to conclude this chapter
with some notice of Diacritical Maries, as a sort of
Secondary Alphabet,- or of accessory means for modi-
fying, further discriminating, and, as it were,- multi-
plying the Sounds and thei*: Meanings of the Basic
Alphabetic Signs — the proper Alphabet.

120 DIACRITICAL MABKS.

The most familiar instance of a Diacritical
Mark is the Accent (not the so-called French Accent
Marks but) as meant and used in English, as the sign of
a predominant or increased stress of the voice upon a
particular syllable of a word ; as present (the Verb),
and present (the Noun or Adjective). The same
Accent Mark is retained, in the same sense, in Al-
wato.

153. The Nasalization-sign (°) has been already no-
ticed and described as merely a Diacritical Mark (93,
97.) This sound (the Nasalization) which abounds in
French, Polish, Sanscrit, and many other languages,
offers, ordinarily, a great stumbling-block to English-
speaking people, but one which even a slight explana-
tion win tend greatly to remove. It is confounded
with the English Throat-Nose-Consonant-Sound ng,
to which it is related, but from which it very de-
cidedly differs. The English rngf-sound is a true
Consonant-sound, that is to say, the parts of the
mouth where it is made completely close upon each
other, hindering entirely the passage of the sound-
ing-breath through the channel of the mouth, and giv-
ing it no other exit than through the nose. Of this
any one wiU convince himself by putting the finger
deep into the mouth, and then saying kingr / he will
feel the back part of the tongue rising at the end of
the word and pressing the finger very closely, striving
to close that passage-way. But the French Nasal
sounds are mere Vowels with a tinge of Nasalization
or of Nose-sound upon them;. that is to say, they
are produced with the passage-way of the mouth

DIACKITICAL MARKS CONTHTOED. 121

completely open, a portion of the sounding breath
merely being at the same time thrown through the
nose. In the utterance of the French an (ah°), the
organs of the throat and mouth are as completely
open as in pronouncing a (ah), and the slight n-
quality which is heard with the vowel comes of the
surplus of sounding breath thrown at the same in-
stant into the nasal passages, or into the head and
nose. The French un {uh°) is merely a slight grunt,
often heard in Enghsh, not as a recognized part of lan-
guage, but as a sort of involuntary interjection. For
a full account of these Nasalized VoWel-Sounds, as
they occur in French, see Andrews' and Batchelor's
" French Instructor," Introduction, p. 47 ; and " The
Key " to the same.'

154. The Vowel-Scale of Eight Vowels, Table No. 1,
(94) leaves the Len^tli, Stress, and Peculiar Ictus of
which those sounds are susceptible to be determined,
as may be necessary, by Additional Marks (called
Diacritical,) These are mostly such as are already
of familiar use in English for similar purposes ;
namely the " Long Mark " (a), the " Short Mark "
(a), and the "Accent Mark " ('), already noticed (151.)
The so-called Grave-Accent (k) is used to mark
" Stopped Vowels," or such as are both Short and
characterized by Ictus, or a sudden and abrupt style
of utterance, as i, e, \ in ptt, pet, pat, etc. These
words are, therefore, represented, Alwali, thus : pit,
pet, pdt ; while peet, pate, pare, are printed as pit,

1 New York : D. Appleton & Co.
6

122 DIACRITICAL MAEKS CONTINUED.

pet, par, etc. Some details of this subject will have
to be omitted here. Vowels Unmarked are to be
understood as of the medium and ordinary length
and character, or, as Ukdiacriticised, but susceptible
of being rendered definite by the addition of the
marks — ^like Unvocalized Phonography.

155. The hyphen (-) is only retained for casual pur-
poses, as, chiefly, for connecting the parts of a word,
when occurring at the end of a line and at the com-
mencement of the next line. In the real composition
of words it is dispensed with, and . the following im-
proved system is adopted. Commas, Semicolons and
Colons — ^the bulk, as it were, of the Ordinary System
of Punctuation as it has heretofore occurred between
words only, and then " spaced out," as the printers
say, or with openings between the words — are used,
also, Alwali, in the body of tlie words themselves, but
without spaces ; to mark the divisions of Syllables in
any way liable to undue coalescence, and to indi-
cate the composition of the words, generally. Thus,
i,ki,ia is a different word in composition and meaning
from ik,i,ia ; and the English word 'pot,ho6k is so pre-
vented from being pronounced po,thoolc. If it is not a
mere separation of Sounds and Syllables, but a Com-
pound Word, which is to be indicated, the semicolon
is substituted for the comma ; as in English we might
print thunder ;storm or house /carpenter (instead of thun-
der-storm, house-carpenter) ; and in the case of still
more complex combinations the colon is introduced ;
as if m journey man:house;carpenter, where the rest of
the voice is something greater after the first word,

DIACEinCAX M4.RKS CONTINDED. 123

than between the last two. In other respects the Or-
dinary System of Punctuation remains unchanged
except by a few additions which need not be speci-
fied here. This endo-lexic (within the word) punc-
tuation is not rigorously prescribed ;' but may be
employed somewhat ad libitum, according to the
views or purposes of the author ; as, in a preceding
paragraph sama,io employs the comma, but in hobo-
samaio it is dispensed with. (000.)

156. The small raised letter », used to denote the
Nasalization (97) ia of a style of types called techni-
cally, among printers, " Superior " letters or types.
A still more extended use is made, diacritieally and
Alwali, of this variety of types, solving many of the
most difficult problems, met by Lepsius and others,
in the attempt to arrange a Romanized Ethnical or
International Alphabet. The " Superior " ^ is used
to express the slight Aspiration which accompanies
at times nearly every consonant in the Sanscritic
family of Languages, as 'kP, g'>,t'i,etc. The "Superior"
vowels are used to express " Glides " or Indistinct
Vowel-Sounds ; the " Superior " 7 (or the cognate
vowel ') is used after a back or middle-mouth Con-
sonant, to soften it, and so to constitute what is
called The Palatal Consonants, as Span, anyo, or an'o
(for ano, A yeak), Fr. family or famiy (for fainille,
family), etc. The Sanscritic " Cerebrals," The Se-
mitic " Gutturalizations," the Zulu " Clucks," and
some other of the rare phenomena of speech are
provided for by Special notations, for which see
"The Universal Alphabet."

CHAPTER VIII.

CONTINUED EXPOSITION OP THE PRINCIPLES AND METHOD
OF ALWASO WOED-BUILDING.

157. In order to a further expansion of tlie results of
what has been previously shown, it will be requisite,
now, in part to recall, and in part to state anew, certain
prehminary considerations : 1. The Diphthong au,
(pronounced ah-oo) may be adjoined to each Conso-
nant-Sotmd, as a Yowel-stem such as is necessary to a
full exhibit of the Consonant value (92, 94, 109, 126.)
This has been already done, in a prehminary man-
ner. 2. It must be known that each Consonant-
Sound has, first a Direct Value or Meaning (such
mainly as has been shown in theprecedingTables),and,
then, an Inverse, Counter-, or Reflected Value or Mean-
ing — according as the Consonant precedes or follows
the Vowel-Stem. Thus, auk is the Inversion or
Counter-presentation of kau. The Consonant has, in
other words, a Final Valve, which is the opposite of
its Initial Value. 3. It is to be observed that each
Boot-word which has in it the Diphthong au (ah-oo)
or iau (ee-ah-oo), that is to say, as representing the
whole Vowel-Scale, is, consequently, a Fasciculated or

FASCICULATED EOOT-WOKDS. 125

Bundle-Eoot-Word, whicli breaks up by Analysis
into a Series of Eleven (or including the au, Tivelve,
and including iau, Thirteen) Single or Special Root-
Words, one for, and containing, each single Yowel
and Diphthong, so represented. To illustrate :

Auski, (ah-oo-skee), is Philosophy in a very ex-
tended but yet in an Ordinary or Non-Transcendental
Sense ; and

Au"ski, (ah-oo"-ski), is Cardiaary or Transcen-
dental Philosophy ; the Absolute or Pure-Eeason-
Yariety of Knowledge.

157. Auski, (ah-oo-skee), then divides into :

Iski, (ee-skee), Ordinary Ontology (The Science of
Things.)

Eski, (a-skee). Ordinary Eelatology (The Science of
Relations between Things.)

^ski, (a(ir)-skee), Etherialogy (The Science of
Ethers, Aromas, Auras, and the Analogously tenuous
Realities in the Universe.)

Aski, (ah-skee), Materioid Substan-ce-ology (but
Philosophoid, or Indeterminately Considered) — Ordinary
Metaphysics or Philosophy ; Natuko-Metaphysic, or
Indeterminate NATUEOLOGT; (The Philosophy of
the Mere Inert Grossness.)

Usld, (wh-skee), Temporalogy, the Science of Sublu-
nary Eventualities; of Transitory, Passing-away, or
Currental Conditions ; Mortalities, etc.

Oski, (aw-skee), Spa-ce-ology, The Science of Ce-
lestialities, Spieitualities, of Spheral and Firma-
mental Permanencies, or Perpetuities, Immortalities,
etc.

126 OBDINAEY PHILOSOPHIES.

Oski, (o-skee), Ideo-Morphology ; Science of Ideas
as Types of things ; of the Platonic " Ideas ; " of
Type-Forms, in Science — Richard Owen ; Sciento-
Philosophy, Indeterminate SCIEJfTOLOGY, based
on the Abstract Typical Eepresentation of Principles
and Laws ; Pure Scientific Theory.

Uski, (oo-skee), Actucdogy ; Science of the Practical,
or of Eeal Activities; Practiced Philosophy ; Akto-
Philosophy ; Indeterminate AETOLOGY.

luski, (ee-oo-skee), Conjuncturology, Eventuology,
Transitology ; Science of Conjunctures (Lat. con,
WITH ; and jungere, TO join), of Epochs, Climacterics,
Transitions, Critical, Transitional, or Supreme Events ;
of Births and Deaths ; of Marriages, Copulations,
Beconciliations and Alliances ; of Inosculations, Im-
pregnations and Beproductions, universally.

Oiski, (aw-ee-skee), Super(n)ology; Science of Over-
shadowings. Canopies, Coverings, Protections ; of
Divine Efflux and Spiritual Generative Force ; of
Male Potentialities, etc.

Aiski, (ah-ee-skee), Infer(n)ology ; Science of Suc-
cumbencies ; Bases, Grounds ; Beceptivitios-and-Ee-
actions ; Concubinisms, Conceptions, Pregnancies
and Prohflcations ; of all Earth-and-womb-Kke Ca-
pacities and Potencies ; of Female Quahfications and
Attributes, etc.

Auski, (ah-oo-skee). Philosophy in the sense so
general as to include all the preceding so-called
Sciences or i^ranches of Theory and Knowledge ;
The Yague or Inexact Aspect of Human Knowledge,
generally ; although, at i (ee), and o, The Indetermi-

CAEDBSfARY PHILOSOPHIES. 127

nate approximates the Determinate, or Eahosophic, ( The
Articulateiiess of the Consonants ; as Thpse Two Vowel-
Sounds are, among the Yowels, the nearest approxi-
mations to the Consonants, and so generate the "Weak
Consonant-Sounds y and w). Indeed, iu the i (ee),
as THING in se (or per se) is the Natural Basis of all
Eeality, and hence of all Determinateness, and in the
o, as -Manifestation in Idea, Presentation, or Ee-
presentation, is the Natural Basis of aU Lucidity of
Exposition, and hence of Science itself in its highest
expression; or more properly of the Philosophy of
Science, or of, in a word, Sciento-Philosopht.

158. Finally, Au"ski, (ah-oo"-skee), then subdivides,
in hke manner, into I°ski, B"ski, ^"ski, etc., which re-
peat the same Grand Departments of Philosophy as
in the subdivisions of auski (ah-oo-skee), with the sole
difference that they pass over from the Empirical
or Ordijiary to the purely Rational, Cardinary,
or Transcendental regions of Thinking. It will
suffice to give some idea of the whereabouts of these
subtle departments of Thought, to suggest that Fichte
modulates in I"ski ' the Doctrine of Pure Transcen-
dental Intelligence ; Hegel in that of E"ski, the Doc-
trine of Pure Transcendental Thotjght-Eelation(s)
(Dialectics)^ SchelMng in that of Ie°ski, (a seeking to
Unite The Thing and the Eelation, the Subject
and the Object in a common Ground) ; The Her-
mctics, Mystics, and Magi in ^"ski ; the Great bulk

' When a Science is abstruse and subtle, note tbe corresponding
difficulty in the pronunciation of the word which names it, AlwaH

128 OBDINAET AND CARDINARY.

of the more Ordinary Transcendental Philosophers
in A"ski ; the Experientialists in ?7"ski, The Idealists
in 0"ski, Plato in 0"ski, Charles Fourier (Transcen-
dental Practical Philosopher) in TJ°ski, etc. To
Kant may be assigned the whole range of Au"sld, or
Transcendental Philosophy. The i (ee) and o, pass-
ing, by merely more stress or pressure (a squeezing
process), into y and w, Schelling (ie°=ye") was the
only German Transcendentalist who went so -far
towards Mysticism as to affiliate with Jacob Boehme,
and Plato by the similar tendency of his Vowel (o)
to become w (o-au=wau) holds a corresponding re-
lationship to Swedenborg, the great Theandrologist
and Pneumatologist, or the Prince of Theological and
Spiritual Science mixed with Mysticism; (Modulating
in «;au,?/au,^au, or, in a word, in Hwau^io.)

159, Is it any wonder that a staunch Echosophist like
Herbert Spencer, (modulating in shaup and zhaub, or
pf and bv) has but Httle comprehension of, and finds
nothing to admire in Hegel, for example, (in e°), whose
range of thought was so different from his own; or that
Auguste Comte (in mlau) should feel so little sym-
pathy for the Metaphysicians, even those to whom he
was so greatly indebted. It will be the sublime of-
fice of Universology to interpret all these conflicting
systems of Thought to each other ; reconciling and co-
ordinating them all in a Higher Complex Unity ; and
in effecting this Grand Eeconchjation Alwato will
serre as one of the most effective Instruments. (For
the letter-references not explained above — shaup,
zhaub, mlau — see 138, 139, and Chapter X.)

FASOICTJIiATED KOOT-WOEDS. 129

160. The subjoined list of Alwaso words consists of
Fasciculated (or Bundle-) Boot- Words, (eacli dissolv-
able into Twelve, according to the preceding model.)
They are given in their Plural Forms, the Singulars
being readily inferred, by rejecting the Signs of
Plurality. These signs are -s (sometimes -z), or
when requisite, to facilitate the utterance -es (or -ez),
as in English. Whether as bundled or dissolved, as
singular or plural, these very primitive words do not
figure so much as Actual Single words of the Alwaso
language (although they occur in this way), as they
do, as Abstract Roots (as in the Sanscrit), capable of
being converted into any Part of Speech, by Special
Affix or Suffix, or by the Context merely ; and capable
of entering, with infinite variability, into the composi-
tion of the less elementary or more elaborate words.

Fasciculated (or Bundle-) Root-words arise, then,
of the following orders :

Aus, (ah-oos), Oedinaet Bealities, (Unlimited, Inde-
terminate), Froto-pragmata or First Entities (i. Being,
e. Relation, o. Space, etc.). Sensuously realized.

Au°s, (ah-oo"s), Caedinaby (or Transcendental)
Realities — the same as aus, but rationalized or enter-
tained in the Reason.

(Aiis, Integral Entities, Wholes ; aus. Fractional
Entities, Parts; aas or aus Equalities; aiis or aiis
Inequalities ; Odd Things, Odd-like properties,
actions, etc. Observe that an,ia (ah-oo-ee-ah) Or-
dinariness and au"ia (ah-oo°-ee-ah) Cardinariness
hold an echoing relationship to Ordinal Numbers and
Cardinal Numbers, respectively, in the Mathematics ;

130 BUNDLE-EOOT-WOKDS.

that au,ia, (ah-oo-ee-ah), Wholeness (of Reality), and
aujia (ah-bb-ee-ah) Partness (of the Eeality), have
similar correspondences, respectively, with Integral
and Fractional Numbers ; and that Inequality and
Equahty in mere Length of Yowel-Sounds echoes in
like manner to the difference between Odd and Even
Numbers. It is at this point that the Analogy between the
Elements of Speech and Elementary Mathematical Dis-
criminations begins to occur. It is barely noted here
for reference, explanation, and expansion elsewhere.)

Kaus (kah-oos), kauts (kah-oots), or kautos (kah-
oo-tos), Single or Simple abstractoid liniar Partings
or Parts. (Cf. Eng. Cuts, Cuttings.)

Taus, (tah-oos), Single or Simple abstract point-
like Unitings, as of any two different Attributes or
Qualities in the Constitution of the (ideal abstract)
Thing or Object; togethernesses, wholenesses. Things.
(Cf. French tout, Aii.)

Paus, (pah-oos). Single or Simple abstractoid liniar-
PAETiNGS-anc^point-like-IJNiTiNGS ; single Hingingb
viewed from the Flanges to the Eivet-and-joint ; or
Single Triangulations viewed from the Legs to the
Apexes (or Apices) of the Angles; Converging or
diminishing Conicities; Comings or bringings to a
Point, whence Positings, pointings. {Puts, Puttings.)

T, k, and p hold the relation to each other of as 1.
Centre, Absolute Point (the t) ; 2. Out and hence Line
(the k) ; and 3. Relative Point, Index, Pointer, the
Diminishing End of a cone, aid, dagger or other
pointed object, hinging of Point and Line Quality.

BUNDLE-EOOT-WOEDS. 131

Aiiks, (ah-ooks), single or simple ahstractoid liniar
Co Mwfer-PABTINGS. (Of. Eng. awJe-w3.rd for Fr. gauche.)

Auts, (ah-oots), single or simple ahstractoid Cowro-
fer-pointings or wholenesses ; Othernesses. (Of. Fr.
autre, othek ; Eng. out.)

Aups, (ah-oops), single or simple ahstractoid liniar-
Oounter - Partings - and - point - Hke- Unitings ; hence
single ahstractoid Ooarafer-HrNGiNGS, viewed from
Eivet-and-joint to the Flanges ; single Counter-Trian-
gulations viewed from the Apexes (or Apices) to the
Legs of the Angles ; diverging or diminishing Coni-
cities ; goings or carryings outward and apart from
a point or angle, whence Openings, Overtnesses, Pub-
hshings, etc. (Of. Eng. open ; Gr. dps, the Eye.)

(Thans, (thah-oos), decussation-points, {ahstractoid)
cross-roads " carrefours," pivots, etc. Anths, other
or correlated pivots. Qaus, (§a-oos), radiating cen-
tres, foci ; auges, (ah-009-es), other or correlated
radiating centres or foci.)

Gaus, (gah-oos), single or simple concretoid hniar
(or shaft-like) De-par^-ings, Pro-cesses, or Peoceed-
INGS (forth-goings) ; Elongated or Trunk-like Move-
ments or Objects. (Of. Eng. go.)

Daus, (dah-oos), single or simple concretoid or head-
like Togethernesses, Wholenesses, or Things. Eoundish,
knobby, clod-like conceptions. (Of. Ger. ding, thing.)

Baus, (bah-oos), single or simple concretoid De-
partings- (Trunk-like Elongations-) AND-Head-like
Knobs or Endings ; Anthropoid or Man-shaped Bo-
dibs, or analogous conceptions. (Of. Eng. Body.)

132 BTINDIiE-EOOT-WOEDS.

Attgz, (ah-oogz), siBgle or simple concretoid liniar
(or shaft-like) Counter-Proceedings. (Cf. Lat. ago,

TO DKIVE.)

Audz, (ah-oodz), single or simple concretoid (or
head-like) objects or conceptions ; Other or Counter-
posited Objects. (Cf. Eng. aids, at, add; Lat. ad.)

Aubz, (ah^oobz), single or simple concretoid Coun-
ter-Processes- (or Proceedings-.) AND-Knobs-or-head-
like-Endings ; Man-shaped bodies inverted ; or
similar conceptions; Dead or Cast-off Bodies,
Corpses, Carcasses. (Cf. o6-sequies ; Lat. oh, against.)

(For dhaus, (dhah-oos), audhz (ah-oodhz), jaus
(jah-oos), and auj,es (ah-ooj-es) cf. Thaus, etc., above.

Shaus, (shah-oos), pluraloid or multiform ahstract-
oid liniar Partings, Dis-partings, Apartnesses, or Farts;
Bamifications, De-liniations, Distributions, Diffusive^
nesses. Unconditioned states. (Cf. Eng. shoo /)

Saus, (sah-oos), pluraloid or multiform abstractoid
punctate (or point-hke) Vhitings; Collections, As-
semblages, Groupings, Finitings, etc, (Cf. Ger. sam-

Vieln, TO GATHER.)

Faus, (fah-oos), pluraloid or multiform abstractoid
Liniar-Fartings-and-Functate- Unitings (fan-like ex-
pansions, the spider-web, etc.); Delineations and Dis-
tributions of Groups and Series ; Schemata of Co-ex-
istences and Sequences, (Classifications and Doings) ;
Actualities, Practicalities. (Cf. Lat. fac~eie, to do.)

Aush,es, (ah-oosh-es), pluraloid or multifonn ab-
stractoid liniar Counter-partings ; Conditionings, etc.

BTINDLE-nOOT-WOBDS. 133

Aus,es, (ah-oos-es), the related Counter-pointings;
Outnesses or Exclusions of tLe Unincluded or Un-
(con)fin(it)ed Points, or Entities. (Of. Ger. atis, out.)

Auf,es, (ah-oof-es), pluraloid or multiform abstrac-
toid liniar Gounter-partings-KSD-Oounter-pointings ;
Counter-classifications-AND-Performances or Doings ;
Counter-feits ; correlated Counter- Schemata ; Theoretic
Expansions, Theories. (Cf. Eng. off.)

Zhaus, (zhah-oos), pluraloid or multiform concre-
toid liniar (or linioid) Partings, Dis-partings, Apart-
nesses, or Parts ; Upward and Outward Ramifications
or Branchings in Eeal Being ; The Plumate or Super-
terranean Tree-or-Plant-like Orders of Existence ;
Arborifications, Vegetable or Vegetoid Entities ;
Growths, Developments. (Cf. Fr. jeter, to throw.)

Zaus, (zah-oos), pluraloid or multiform concretoid
punctoid (knobby, or head-like) Unitings; Organic
Collections, Clumps, BundUngs, Collections or Con-
geries of Organs, as in the Animal economy ; Living,
A nim al, or Animoid Organs ; Apparatus, Systems, and
Organoid Existence, generally. (Cf. Eng. 20,ology.)

Vans, (vah-oos), pluraloid or multiform concretoid
IAniar-Partings-and-Punctoid-{or -Knobby)- Gatlierings-
or -Collections, (pluraloid trunk-and-head-like ob-
jects ; fibrillated-and-ganglionic) ; Organic or Living
Entities or Orders of Existence, Vegetable-Am)-Animal ;
and their Analogues in Being Universally. (Cf.
Lat. vifia.. Life.)

Auzh,es, (ah-oo-zn-es), pluraloid or multiform con-
cretoid liniar Counter-partings; Branchings downward;

134 BTJNDLS-EOOT-WOEDS.

Roots, or Eoot-like Objects, Conceptions, Entities or
Conditions ; Eadications, or Counter- Vegetisms.

ATiz,es, (ah-ooz-es), pluraloid or multiform concre-
toid punctoid (or knob-like) Counter-pointings (con-
trasted objects) ; Embkyos, and Embryotic Orders of
Existence ; (Counter- Animisms ; Incipiencies of Ani-
mal Life, as the Roots are so of Vegetable life.)

Auv,es, (ah-oov-es), pluraloid or multiform concret-
oid Counter- Or ganismi ; Counter- Adaptations to Or-
ganic Life; Accessories, Adjunctive Attributes,
Possessions, (cf. Er. av-oir, to have.)

Mlaus, Generalizations.

1. Static, Direct.

Maua, (mah-oos), Exteriors, Outnesses, Large-
nesses, Gen£raloid 'pavtings, dis-partings or ex-fewsions ;
outstretchitigs of the Omnidirectionahty, of. the All-
around-ness, Space-wise. (Cf. Ger. mauer, walls.)

Naus, (nah-oos). Interiors, Innesses, Smallnesses ;
Contraction of the OmnidirectionaHty. (Cf. Gr. wows,

MIND.)

Aungz, (ah-oongz). Indifferences, Neutralities,
neither-out-nor-in-nesses ; neither-great-nor-small-
nesses ; moderate-nesses ; Generahid Equations.

2. Static, Inverse.

Aumz, (ah-oomz), Counter-Exteriors, (what stands
over against the outside), Bnvikonments, Embracings,
Bncirclings, Surroundings. (Cf. Ger. um, akound.)

Aunz, (ah-oonz), Counter-Interiors, (what stands
over against and is so related to the inmost of
things), Propria, INHERENT Properties; (differing from

BUNDLE-EOOT-WOEDS. 135

auvz which are adjunct properties, or acquisitions) ; the
Essential Unity of any Being, (ef. Lat. mw-us ; Eilg. one
and otyji, etc.) Ngaus, {Tag&la.-ooB),Counter-Indifferences,
(hardly pronounceable and hardly definable.)

3. Tempic, Direct.

Laus, (lah-oos), Longnesses, Longings, Patiences,
Continuities; Outstretehings of the Unidirectionality,
(of the On-going-ness, Time-wise), Oeneraloid Unities
of the Length-wise Dimension (cf. Eng. Long, Longing.)

Eaus, (rah-oos), Shortnesses, Breakages, Fractious-
nesses, Withholdings, (breakings off, and hachnesses) ;
Interruptions or " Solutions of the Continuity ; " Be-
yersings of the Uni-directionality, (of the On-going-
ness, ^ime-wise) ; Eetums, Generaloid Disunitions of
the Length-wise Dimension, (cf. ri-, re-, back.)

4. Tempic, Inverse.

Aulz, (ah-oolz). Counter- Gontimiities, Counter-out-
goings, relaxations, retardations, oldnesses, Cessa^
TIONS, lowerings. Deaths, (cf. Eng. low, {s)low, old, etc.)

Aurz, (ah-oorz), Coimter-breah-qffs or Coimter-stop-
pages, i. e. pro-cedencies ; Oeigins, arisings, hirtlis,
beginnings, (cf. Lat. or-ior, to aeise; orido, AN oeigin,
contracted into ordo, an oedee or peoceedtjee.)

Whaus — Spiritual Attenuations. ^
Hans, (hah-oos). Breaths, HaHtus, Spiritual Dif-
fusions. (Cf. Ger. hauch, beeath.)

Taus, (yah-oos). Spiritual /oci or Centers ; radiating
Points; Personalities ; Gods, Men, etc. (Cf. Span, yo, I.)
"Wans, (wah-oos). Mutualities, Literchanges, etc.
(cf. Wato, Speech-thing, Language.)

CHAPTER IX.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION OP THE ABSTKACT AND THE
CONCRETE.

161. After the preceding Grand Distributions of
Universal Being (into tlie Unlimited and The Limi-
tary, The General and The Special, etc.), none re-
mains of more intrinsic importance than that already
alluded to, and partially employed as a basis of
Classification, into The Abstract and The Concrete
(94, 139.) Herbert Spencer, not seizing on the more
subtle Philosophoid bases of distribution, to which
hardly anything else than the Analysis of the Alpha-
bet could have conducted us, commences, indeed, his
Classification of the Sciences, at this point, mating,
his first Threefold Division into, 1. The Abstract,
2. The Concrete, and 3. The Abstract-Concrete,
(or Mixed).' By adopting the termination -o-logy, we
may conveniently convert these designations into
Abstradohgy, Concretology and Abstract- Goncretology

' " The Classification of the Sciences, to which are added reasons
for dissenting from the Philosophy of M. Comte," by Herbert
Spencer — a Pamphlet.

THE ABSTRACT AND THE CONCRETE DEFINED. 137

(as a transition to the proper Ahvaso terms ending in
-ski.) By Abstract-Concrete, Spencer means to say
Mixed or Undifferentiated into either completely Ab-
stract or completely Concrete, embracing all that is
neither wholly Abstract nor wholly Concrete, (Mik-
tonology — B. O. Index, word Mikton.)

162. But what is the meaning of the terms Abstract
and Concrete? Few persons have a very definite
conception of this very fundamental Scientific dis-
crimination. Only recently a gentleman who had
spent his life-time in Scientific pursuits was heard ask-
ing for an accurate definition of these two terms. The
common reader need not, therefore, dread to confess a
certain obscurity which may rest in his thought on
this subject, and to seek by a little close thinking to
remove it.

163. Btymologically, Abstract, from the Latin words
abs FROM, and tractus drawn, means drawn asunder or
cmnpletdy separated, and so, as it were, rendered thin,
but, also, transparent or clear ; and Concrete, from the
Latin con with, and cresco to grow, means grown to-
gether, solidified, or closely compacted, and so make thicJc,
heavy, dense, impervious to the light ; like solid or oMual
material Things, contrasted with mere ideas or tJwughts,
which are Abstract. Such is what is directly meant or
implied by the words. So, to abst7-act, mentally, is to
separate completely some one attribute of a subject, as
the color, for example, in order to consider it sepa-
rately. But all of this does not give a sufficiently true
and distinct idea of the meaning of Abstract and
Concrete, or of " The Abstract " and " The Concrete,"

138 ABSTEACTISMXrS AND CONCEETISMUS.

spoken of as great Departments or Domains of
Being ; two halves, as it were, of the Universe — ex-
cept that plasmal and imperfectly characterized
Mikton which is not wholly separated into either.
Further statement and illustration will render this
difficult matter distinctly comprehensible.

164. The Concrete includes all Sensibly or Naturally
Real Things; every Mineral, including the planets as the
great Mineral Bodies, every Vegetable, every Animal,
including Man, as to his body, or all that is present
of him to the senses ; — ^in fine, the whole Sensibly
Eeal World. It may then be asked with some sur-
prise : where is there room for another equal half of
the Universe, The Abstract ? To this the answer is
that The Abstract is wholly confined to what is, /rom
this Natural SeTisuous point of view, A PuEE Nothing.
Hence, from this Outer and Material Standing-Point, it
is merdy Negative ; although, as we shall find, the view
is reversed rsoM its own Standing-Point, and The Ab-
stract is, then, the MOEE Positive Woeij) ; and the
World of Outer Sensible Appearances is Negative to it.

165. Space and Time are Abstractions, and are, in a
sense, mere Nothings. A Point is defined, in Geom-
etry, to be Position, without Length, Breadth, or
Thickness ; a Line to be Length without Breadth or
Thickness ; and a Surface to be Length and Breadth
without Thickness. All of these are, therefore. Ab-
stract ; and that which has Materiality, and so Sub-
stance, or a Eeal Value, is the only Concrete. Even
the Geometrical Solid, though it has a ghostly kind of
thickness, being yet destitute of Substance (as a pie-

ELEMENTS OP FORM AND NUMBER. 139

mim or fiUing-m of its depth or holding-capacity), is
also Abstract.

166. That which has neither Length, Breadth, nor
Thickness is, obviously, from the Sensible or Natural
Point of Yiew, a Pure Nothing ; so of the Line which
has Length merely ; so of the Surface, and so of the
Geometrical Solid, even. These are all Pure Nothings,
the mere Cut-up of the still more Negative or Noth-
ing-hte Pure Space, in which they, as well as the
Concrete World, are situated. Or, rather, they may
be merely Conceptions, in the Mind, of Positings and
Limitations which have no Beal Existence in Actual
Space even ; but which are put there, by the Mind, as a
means of Measuring and so of thinking (or thinging)
other things. All these Primary Elements of Form
are Abstract, and, in a sense, very unreal ; but, on the
other hand, if all Points, Lines, and Surfaces were re-
moved, or thottght-away-from the Universe, nothing
would remain before the mind ; or, if the process
were even partially effected, nothing but The Sub-
stance of Things would remain ; for the Things them-
selves must have Eorm, in order to remain Things ;
and Form consists of precisely these Abstract Points, Lines
and Surfaces, M^hich, when analyzed, are Nothings ;
except for the Reason or the Mind's eye, within us.

167. So in respect to Number ; A Unit is not a real
object, not anything Concrete or sensibly real ; not a
mineral, a vegetable or an animal; though it may
represent any of these. So of any number of Units.
A Bum is only an aggregation of Units, or of Pure
Nothings ; except to the reason. Number is there-

140 THOUGnT-LINES AND -STJKFACES.

fore, as well as Form, an Abstract Domain. A Unit
repeats a Point, a Sum of Units repeats an Aggregation
of Points ; both of these may be representative of an
Aggregation of Things, as of Stars, for instance, in the
Heavens ; but the moment we make this Beal appli-
cation of them, we have gone over from the Abstract
to the Concrete Domain.

168. Between any two Units in a Sum, between the
separate Units in the Number Two, for instance, there
is an almost imperceptible Thought-line, which con-
nects them togetJier, and makes them into a Sum. This
Thought-line repeats the Geometrical Line as reaching
from one Point to anothsr in Space. If three Units
are held in the mind connectedly, and at the same
time, they are necessarily in the same Thought-plane ;
that is to say, there is a fhny surface in the mind's
perception, in which the three points he, of which we
are ordinarily unconscious, but which can be h'ought out
by Ohse Reflection; as the picture upon a daguer-
reotype plate is. developed by a chemical process.
Through the existence of these very Attenuated or Ab-
stract Thought-lines, and Thought- Surfaces, intervening
among the Units of Number, there is an exact Echo of
Likeness (hitherto occult), between The Elements, or
Least and Lowest Components, of Number and the
known Elements of Form. It is here that an exact
Analogy between The Two Grand Departments of the
Mathematics — -the Geometrical, and the Abstract (the
Calculus) — stakes origin, an Analogy which Universohgy,
in its Scientological or Exact Branch, developes into an
immense new science of Syrnbdic Morphology, and Deter-

THOUGHT-POINTS. 141

minate Correspondences. Abstract Peinciples, as Ori-
gins, repeat Points; and Laws, inherent in Being, cor-
respond ia like manner with Lines. Logic, in the
grand sense, as the Science of Laws and Principles, is
thus also swept into the same circle of Correspondences
or Analogies. Spencer reckons Logic and The Mathe-
matics as the only Abstract Sciences. Univer-
sological Scientology is a Third ; and remains to be
demonstrated to the Scientific world. Laws and
Peinciples, are, then, another special variety of Ab-
stractions.

169. It will be a first step towards comprehending
these mysteries of Abstraction, and one of the least
difficult ones, to realize that a Unit ; not any thing
whatsoever, (as an apple, or a block) ; but a purely
Abstract Unit of Number, is a Thought-Point, in the
mind ; nothing more and nothing less than that. It
is not (necessarily), even in imagination, posited or put
at any particular place in External Space, but it is
nevertheless posited as a point of thought, rationally,
or before the mind's eye ; in, as it were, an Internal
Thought-Space, or " in the Mind." These exceeding
subtleties or refinements of Speculation on the Echoes
or Correspondences of what happens in different
Spheres of Being; as, here, between Number and Form
in their very Elements ; loom up, in the higher depart-
ments of Universology, into great importance. The
subject is only introduced here, incidentally, to aid
in furnishing an idea of Abstractness or The Abstract;
which extends to and covers the whole field of those
conceptions which are so fine that they only exist ^e-

142 NEGATISM BECOME POSITIVB.

fore the Mind, or in the Scope of the Season ; but which
externally, and as things to be seen by the natural
eye, or heard, smelled, tasted, or handled, are Pure
Nothings.

170. And yet these same Abstract Ideas, as Units,
Points, Lines, Surfaces, and those finer Thought-
Lines and Thought- Siorf aces, intervening among Units
(or Thought-Points), are, from the High Scientific, or
Abstract (also called the Logical) Point of View, more
PosiTiVB and Beal Things, than Eocks, Trees and
Animal Bodies ; somewhat as superheated steam, or
gas, which bursts a solid encasement of rock or iron
(though in another sense far finer and feebler than
it) is, in this encasement, more Positive or Potent
than the Bock or Iron itself. Or, as — for a better il-
lustration — the Diamond-Point which cuts the Glass,
though a mere point (and hence, theoretically, as it
were, a Nothing) is stronger and more Positive, more
a Beal Something, than the more massive Glass itself.
Or, again, The Thin and Yanishing Edge of any Cut-
ting instrument, though a Mere Edge, that is to say,
a mere Line, (as nearly as any thing Concrete, for the
knife is still Concrete, can be the imitation of an Ab-
stract thing such as a Liae is, geometrically consid-
ered), is Positive to the wood,or meat, or other Concrete
Object, which it cuts ; and the Concrete Object is, as
it were, Negative, or a mere Nothing before it. Such
or similar is the relation between the Ken or Keenness
(the acumen) of the Intellect, or those Clean-cut Dis-
criminations which represent it, (as Points, Lines, Prin-
ciples, Definiiions, Laws and Bdations), and the Gross

WHY THE ABSTRACT IS THE SCIENTIFIC. 143

Outer Substances and Objects to which we subse-
quently apply them. So it is, also, that Points and
Liaes — ^which are really the Domain of the Science
of Geometry, the leading (relatively " Concrete ")
branch of Mathematics — and Units or Thought-Points,
the Subject-Matter or Domain of Arithmetic (or the
Calculus), another (and the more Abstract) branch of
Mathematics; that the Mathematics, in fine, are or
belong to The Scientifically Positive or Governing
Domain of Being which is "The Abstract; " as against
the whole world of Sensibly E.eal Things, which are
The Concrete. This happens while, at the same time,
this whole Abstract Domaia of Being is, from the Na-
tural, Eeal, or Materialistic Point of View, no Being
at all ; a mere congeries of Pure Nothings ; a Set of
Ideal Positings (Puttings of Points) and Cuts of mere
External Vacant Space, or still more subtly, of
Thought-Space ; or of still other Pure Nothings.

171. But why is this Nothiag-Eealm, The Abstract,
assumed, as in the last preceding paragraph, to be
more cognate or closely allied with Science, than the
Eeal World of Objective or Concrete Things ? It is
because the outer Eeal World is Nature ; or has the
same alliance with Nature which the Abstract World
has with Science ; and because Nature is Spon-
taneous and utterly (or, at least, seemingly so)
Irregular. There are, for example, positively no
Straightnesses or Straight Lines in Nature. The near-
est approach to Straightness in her domain is, per-
haps, in the Edges of Crystals ; but even these suf-
ficiently magnified, or, at any rate, when tested by

144 NATURE TEANSMUTED INTO ART.

the ideal straightness of a mathematical line, are ir-
regular. But straightness is the one essential quality
of a Bule or Bvler; and so of a Law which is a Eule
of Conduct, or a Begulator of our ways of Thinking,
and hence of Acting. We cannot, therefore, look to
Nature for EuL s or Laws ; and Science itself being
nothing but a Systematized Collection of Eules and
Laws, it follows that we cannot look to Nature
for Science, in the highest, most exact sense of that
term. Even in Astronomy, it is not the bodies
of the sun and planets, primarily, but only their
geometrical rdations, which we study. From the High
Scientological Point of Yiew,AbstractScience is, there-
fore, The only Teue Science ; Natural and all Obser-
vational Science is Psewdo-Science ; or, at least. Sub-
ordinate and less positively entitled to the name.

172. In Pure Ideal, in Thought itself, in Blank Ex-
ternal Space, or in the Echoing Mind-Space within,
nothing hinders us from drawing Lines Absolutely
straight, (saving an ulterior transcendental criticism
upon even this statement.) It is here, therefore, and
here alone, that we can establish Euues, and Laws, and
Systematic Scientific Schemes of Thought, with which
afterwards to compare the Deviations of Nature ; by
which, therefore, to measure Nature ; and so even, ulti-
mately to control and systematize her operations ; to
regenerate Nature, in fine, through Science ; and so,
ultimately, to convert the Crude Eealm of Nature into
the Sublime, Beautiful and Divine Eealm of Art.

173. It foUows, therefore, as said above, that Science
is radically planted in " The Abstract," and not in

1

TWO KINDS OP TEUTH. 145

"The Concrete;" That Abstract Science, as The
Mathematics and the Logic of Being, or, otherwise.
Exact Science, is Science pre-eminently, or Science
in the ruhng sense; and that Concrete Science or
The Natural Sciences are ordy Scientific in a Secondary
and Inferior seTise.

174. Some quarrel arises, however, at this point, be-
tween The Mathematics and The Natural Sciences.
As Natural Science proceeds upon the minute and
careful Observation of Nature, what it perceives
and records, must, it is urged, he true — although its
Facts are confessedly full of deviations, intertwinings
and overlappings, which nearly defy classification at
all ; and ahsolutely defy Exact Classification, such as
is illustrated by Straight Lines, Squares and Cubes, in
Geometry. On the other hand. Mathematical prop-
ositions, as that Two are Equal to Two, that Two
and Two are Four, that a Square has (and must
have) four Eight Angles, are not only true, but are
peculiarly true, not to the Exterior Senses, but to the
Eeason ; and even, in the sense that it is inconceivable
that tJiey should be otliervnse.

175. The Solution is that there are two kinds of
Truth; one addressed to the Senses, and one to the
Pure Eeason. To discuss radically the claims, rank
and offices of each of these hemispheres of truth
would take us too much aside from the present pur-
pose. It must suffice to indicate the issue, as the
real issue in the conflict of all past thinking ; and as,
agaiu, especially, the rising issue of the hour. The so-
called "Positive Science" now triumphantly dominant

146 SUBDIVISION OF ABSTRACT AND CONCRETE.

in the Scientific World, stands, representatively, for
the Supremacy of the Senses, of Observational Knowl-
edge, of Materialistic Eealities and Tendencies, or,
in a word, of Nature over Science. Universological
Scientology will re-assert and vindicate, on the con-
trary, the Euling Function and Legitimate Supremacy
of the Abstract and Absolute Reason ; of Eeflective
and Analytical Truth ; of Spiritualistic Bealities and
Tendencies ; or, in a word, of Science proper ; of the
Higher Positivism, over Nature or the crudity of the
Primitive Appearances. The Theologica-Metaphysical
First Essay of Thinking has yielded or is yielding, it
is true, to Observational Positivism ; butUniversology,
reverting from this surrender ; on higher grounds ;
while standing on and affirming infuU that Observational
Basis, (but merely as basis), reasserts the Superior
Dominion of the Pure Reason ; tJie Metaphysics oj
Sdemx- itself.

176. The Abstract is named, Alwali, Shaup,io (cf.
Eng. shape, as Form ; Ger. schaffen, to make) ; and the
Concrete is ziiau1t>,io (139.) These, again, subdivide
immediately into their own Abstracts or Concretes,
respectively. Within the Concretismus, for example,
all Light, Thin, or Attenuated and Trivial Objects,
and markedly such as, by some other quality than
massiveness or weight, attest inherent power ; as the
gases and cutting edges above cited (170) ; echo, from
their place in the Concrete world (for such objects
are still concrete), to the Entire Pare Abstract World,
outside of the Concrete ; while Bulky and Heavy Ob-
jects within the Concretisaius echo, or repeat within

ANALOaUES DEFIKED. 147

The Concrete, the Entire Concrete World itself. This
echo (of the Abstractoic? of The Concrete to the Ab-
stract, and of, as in the instance just given, the Con-
oveioid of the same to the Concrete) is an instance,
and an important one, of Scientific Analogy, (11.)

177. The Objects and Ideas which so repeat each
other, are called Analogues of each other ; and this
subtle echoing character of Objects to Objects, of
Ideas to Ideas, of Objects to Ideas, of Objects and
Ideas to entire Spheres or Domains of Being, of Do-
mains to Domains, and the like, throughout all the
Departments of Being, is what is meant by " Universal
Analogy" or "The Doctrine of Correspondences," as
it is now specifically discovered, and is about to be
utilized in the Sciences. It is' this discovery which
renders a Universal Language and a Universal Sci-
ence possible, because it establishes the possibility
of a True although Transcendental Classification of
All Things, and even of all possible Ideas.'

178. Nothing can be more striking, to one who is
familiar with the qualities of Sound, than the exact
appropriateness of the Thin, Light, (or Abstractoid)
Class of the Consonant-Sounds, f, k, p, etc., to the
denotation of The Abstract, universally, (The Ab-
STEACTlSMUs), and of all the Details and Particulars
of the same ; and of the Thick, Heavy, (or Concre-

' I cannot speak too highly of the recent work of Dr. McCosh, on
" The Discursive Laws of Thought " (Logic), as furnishing to the
careful student one of the best preparations for the still subtler
definitions, and the deeper descent into the profundities, of the
Universoloarical Abstract. S. P. A.

148 "spirit" and "the spieit of teuth."

toid) Class d, g, h, etc., to that of The Concrete, uni-
Tersally, (The Conceetismus), and its Particulars.

179. In addition to the several namings for these
two Classes of Sounds, previously noticed (113), Prof.
Elsberg has very happily called the Thin Sounds Un-
intoned, and the Thick or Heavy Sounds Intoned, refer-
ring to the Vocalify (the same Substance of Sound
which makes the Vowels), which is brought up from
the Larynx and blended with The Jbntracfs for the
production of The Concretes. They might also be
named Consonets and Oonsonads. (B. O. c. 7, t. 43.)

180. Concrete Objects, Heal Things, and Persons, as
regards their Personality, exhale or emane those Finer
Odylic Substances or Spheral Essences (" Spheres "
or Atmospheres) which are ordinarily meant by Spirit
in the dififusive sense of the term ; the Analogues of
which are the Cosmical Airs, Ethers, and Auras, and
the more determinate Radiations (as of Light, Heat,
Electricity and Magnetism) which infill the Inter-
stices between the Planets and blend them by Influx
and Efflux ; but Abstract Entities, as Lines and Laws
(168) project still finer Spiritual Axialxties which pen-
etrate, and co-ordinate, or organize the more Massive
and imstable Spirit of The Concrete, which otherwise
" bloweth where it lisfceth." These last are " the Spirit
of Truth," or of Science and of Inherent Necessity and
Law — The Scientific Spieit. (B. O. c. 8, t. 9 ; a. 47,
48, t. 204 ; t. 634 ; and B. O. Vocabulary w. Spirit ; see
also what is said ch. xi. o^ the Bi-trinacria, and con-
ceive the Projecting Segulative Radiations, axially,
from the Intellectual or Eational Axes of Being.)

CHAPTER X.

EE-STATEMENT AND EXPANSION OE THE CLASSEFICATION
OE THE EEALMS OE DOMAINS OE BEING; WITH NAM-
INGS IN THE TEEMINATIONS -10, -SO, AND -TO.

181. The present chapter will be devoted mainly to
a further exercise in word-building, and with the pre-
dominance given to the namings of Domains by the use
of the termination -io ; (with -so, and -to.) It will be
the close thinker only, and one who is somewhat versed
in Philosophical discriminations who will fully ap-
preciate the far-reaching and exhaustive nature of
the Analysis, upon which these namings depend.

Au,io, (ah-oo-ee-o), The BEALiTY-Domain (as con-
•trasted with Limitation), The Homogeneous; The
^Masi-Indeterminate, The Qwasi-Inarticulate ; Proto-
plasmal, Confused.

Au"io, (ah-oo"-ee-o). The IncompreJi.ensibility-Do-
main, The Unknowable, The Puee Eational; The
Cardinary or Transcendental Philosophical Eealm.

Engkauvlio, (eng-kah-oov-lee-o), or Shaumbho,
(shah-oombl-ee-o), The Heterogeneous; representg-
collectively the Consonants, as Au,io does the Vowels.

150 DOMAINS, IN -10.

Laumbzhio, (lah-oombzli-ee-o), The Limtabt or
Eelational (Lat. re, back, and lattis, side) ; Re-siding
or Coaptation of borders or edges ; (cf. Lat. limbus,
EDGE, BOEDEB ; Eng. Umh.)

Kau,io, (kah-oo-ee-o), The Fart-ing, De-part-ing,
Pari^-uritional, Originative, Caus-ative Domain ; The
Domain of the Therefoee, (for that reason, or
cause — the Logical Conclusion) ; End-to-end-ness,
Demonstration, Indexism, Indication; Logic, as to
Co-Sequenciation or the process of Ratiocination,
(The Chain of Logical i?easomwgr — Sequences.)

Aukio, (ah-ook-ee-o), The Counter-VAB,T4ng, Adjust-
ative. Correlative Domaia ; Side-by-side-ness (Lat. con,
WITH, re, BACK and latus, side) ; The Analogical, Corre-
spondential, Comparological Domain. Logic as Ana-
Logic, or the Law and Doctrine of Correspondences.

(Kaukio is the unition of the preceding two, and
is the Pantologicnl or Total Logical Domain — relates
to the distribution of Parts. B. O. c. 8, t. 15.)

TaUjio, (tah-oo-ee-o), The Point-ing, Ap^oint-ing,
Designating Domain; The Qiven-Individuality-'Do-
main.

Aut,io, (ah-oot-ee-o). The Goiinter-point-iug or Al-
ternative Domain ; (The others, things or persons.)

(Tautio is the unition of the preceding two, and is
the Entirety-Domain, as contrasted with the parts ;
cf. Fr. tout, ALL.)

Pau,io, (pah-oo-ee-o). The Positivity-Domain ; the
Hinge- wise Integration of the Whole and the Parts ;

Meclianization ; (cf. Lat. pon-Oj-pos-, Eng. put.)

DOMAINS, m -10. 151

Aupio, (ah-oop-es-o), The (7oMwfer-Positivity-Do-
main ; the Dubiosity-Domain, Possibility, May-be ;
(cf. Eng. " open-to-donU") (B. O. 632.)

QaUjio, (tshah-oo-ee-o), The Abstract Distribu-
tive ; The Selective or Elective Domain ; (cf. Eng.
choice, cJioose.')

Augio (ah-ootsh-io), The Abstract Alternating or
Counterpointing Distributive Domain ; (cf. Eng. each.)

Thau,io, (thah-oo-ee-o), The Abstract Pivotal, and
StabUiological ; (cf. Gr. theos, God.)

Authjio, (ah-ooth-ee-o), The Abstract Counter-piv-
otal.

Gau,io, (gah-oo-ee-o), The Proceeding, On-going,
or "Becoming "-Domain; (cf. Eng. go.)

Aug,io, (ah-oog-ee-o), The Counter-Proceeding,
Eesisting, Antagonizing Domain ; Action or the Effort
to overcome ; (cf. Lat. ag-o, to act, Eng. agonj, etc.)

DaUjio, (dah-oo-ee-o). The Hard, Permanent, Ob-
jective, Enduring Domain ; (cf. Lat. diw-us, hard.)

Audio, (ah-ood-ee-o), The Counter-Objective Do-
main ; Adjunctive and Coadjutive ; (cf. Eng. aid) ;
Keterberation ; (cf; Lat. aud,ij:e, to hear.)

Bau,io, (bah-oo-ee-o). The Corporate, or Incorpo-
rate Domain ; (cf. for meaning, Lat. corpvs, body.)

Au,bio (ah-oob-ee-o). The Counter-Corporate-Do-
main ; The Inert or Dead-body Domain.

Jau,io, (jah-oo-ee-o), The Concrete Distributive
Domain ; (see gauio.)

152 DOMAINS, IN -10.

Auj,io, (ah-ooj-ee-o), The Concrete Alternating or
Counter-pointing Distributive Domain; (see augio).

Jaujio distribution and counter-distribution ; mu-
tual assignment of parts; (cf. Bng. judge, judgntent,
etc.)

Dliauio, (dhab-oo-ee-o), The Concrete Standard-
and-Pivotal Domain ; Stabiliohgical. (B. O. t. 632.)

Audbio, (ab-oodh-ee-o), The Concrete Gounter-
Standard - and - Pivotal Domain ; (see tbau,io and
autbjio.)

Sbau,io, (sbab-oo-ee-o), Tbe Abstract BamiJicaticM-
Domain ; witbin Limits, wbence The Conditioned.

Ausbio, (ab-oosb-ee-o), Tbe Abstract Oounter-
Eamification-Domain ; Tbe Conditioning, -wbence, it-
self. The Unconditioned.

Sau,io, (sab-oo-ee-o), Tbe Collective Individuality-
Domain ; { JncZwc^ec^-Many-Pointism) ; mtbin Limits,
wbence The Finite ; (cf. Engkauvlio, 127.)

Au(s),io, (ab-oos-ee-o), Tbe Counter-Collective Li-
dividuality-Domain (^cccMed-Many-Pointism) ; with-
out or outside of and beyond Limits ; wbence Jhe
Ineentte ; (126 ; cf. Ger. avs, gut.)

Pau,io, (fab-oo-ee-o). The Peactical or Actual
Domain ; Tbe Hinge-wise or Cardinated Relation of
Tbe Finite and Tbe infinite ; (cf. Eng../act.)

Aufio, (ab-oof-ee-o), Tbe Counter-Actual-Domain ;
Scbemative ; The Theoketical Domain, The Suppo-
sititious; (cf. Eng. if.)

DOMAINS, IN -10. 153

Mau,io, (mah-oo-ee-o), Tlie Exterior ; The Object-
ITE (Kealm) ; The Maceocosm, (The Big World.)

Nau,io, (nah-oo-ee-o), The Interior ; The Subject-
ive (Eealm) ; The Mickocosm, (The Little World.)

Aiingio, (ah-oong-ee-o), " The Mean State or Con-
striction between The Objective and The Subject-
ivej in which Eeason consists," (see Comte's Catechism
of Positive Beligion, Eng. Ed. p. 168.) (Ct. Lat. an-
guis, THE SERPENT, from the idea of throttling or con-
striction round the waist or throat ; Eng. anguish,
terrible stress or stringency of sorrow.)

Aumio, (ah-oom-ee-o), " The Entieonment," of any
generalized unity.

Aunio, (ah-oon-ee-o), Any Given Generalized Uni-
ty ; The Environed ; The given Subject, under con-
sideration ; The Core or Centrum, which the Matrix
or Medium encloses ; One ; A One ; Any thing.

Lauio, (lah-oo-ee-o), The Long Run ; Ulterior and
Br/zctionary Consequence; The (Eealm or) Career of
The Eternities ; (Gentleness, Calmness, Eest) ; The
Integral, Continuous, Entire ; (of. Eng. long, longing,
lingering.

Eau,io, (rah-oo-ee-o). The Shoet Etot ; Direct and
Immediate Consequence; The (Eealm or) Career of
The Temporahties, (Disturbance, Trouble, Transi-
toriness) ; The Broken, The Fractional ; (cf. Eng. rack,
rag, rocky.)

Aulio, (ah-ool-ee-o). The Einai or Ultimate, (con-
tinuing to the end). The Complete, The Falling or
Failing, The Mature ; (cf. Eng. Old.)

154 DOMAINS, IN -10.

Auric, (ah-oor-ee-o). The Incipient or Immediate ;
tliat of the HOTTK ; The New, The Young ; The Eising
(as of the Sun), The Original ; (cf. Lafc. hora, Ital. ora,
Eng. liour ; Lat. origo, origan ; Lat. or,rior, TO KlSE,
and or-do, for ori-do, obder, etc.)

Hau,io, (hah-oo-ee-o). The Spiritttai, (Eeahn), The
Spirit-world, or Spiritual-Eational' Universe, (God,
Men, Spirits) ; The World of Spiritualities ; " The
Church."

Yau,io, (yah-oo-ee-o), TheEealm or World of Piv-
otal Spiritualities ; The Personal (Domain) ; The
Guild of Personages; of distinguished or Eepresent-
ative Individuals ; of " Stars " (central and radiating
entities and personalities) ; " The Court " (of
Heaven.)

Wau,io, (wah-oo-ee-o). The World of Intercom-
munications, Intercourse, Interchanges, Language,
Commerce, etc. ; of Conversation, Association, So-
ciety; "The World."

182. The remainder of this chapter is occupied by
• certain Special branches of Distribution, related to
what precedes, either as more specific, or as otherwise
elaborative of the same ideas. They are merely speci-
mens of what becomes an infinite expansion, a limit-
less ocean, of verbal Forms, as the Inherent Natural
Namings of every possible variety^ of Human Thought,
and of External Being. These, in turn, force the
thought into new channels of Discrimination and
Analysis ; both tasking and cultaring the intellectual
powers :

Al.la, (aU-ee-ah), "Quamty''
East.

DOMAINS IN -10. 155

Alio, (aM-ee-o), The Univeksal.

Au,io, (ah-oo-ee-o), "Reality" — Kant

Laumpshio, (lat-oompsli-ee-o), or Limit-
oio ^'Limitation''— Kant.

Aiingio, (ah-oong-ee-o), The Indiference of
Being ; "No Matter ; " " Neoatiom "—
Kant.

(Tlie Essence of The Eeality is kw,al-ia, or kw.al-lti.)

Aii,io distributed.

I,io, (ee-ee-o), Domain of Entities (Things.)

E,io, (a-ee-o), " delations ; Sidings, Wings.

^,io, (a(ir)-ee-o), " Materioidal Essences, Etherial Emanations.

A,io, (ah-ee-o), " Material Realities ; Gross Substances.

C/",io, (ah-ee-o), " Temporalities, Transitory Things ; Sublunary.

0,io, (aw-ee-o), " Spiritualities, Permanencies (The Firmament.)

0.,io, (o-ee-o), " Luminosities, Ideas, Theory.

tr,io, (oo-ee-o), " Turbidities, Mixed Movements, Practicalities.

Iu,io, (ee-oo-ee-o), " Conjunctures, Events, Copulations, Transits or Crossings.

{?i,io, (aw-ee-ee-o)," Superincumbencies, Overshadowings, Masculisms.

.4i,io, (ah-ee-ee-o), " Subrecumbencies, Pundamenta, Feminisms.

183. The distribution of au"io repeats the " same "
series in the Cardinary or Transcendental sense. So,
also :

Ie,io, (ee-a-ee-o). Tub Elementismus. (82.)

jl,io, (a(ir)-ee-o). The Nascent State, intermediate between Elementism and
Elaborated Composition.

3. U,io, (oo-ee-o). Indeterminate
AET.

2. 0,lo, (o-ee-o). Indeterminate
SCIENCE.

1. A,io. (ah-ee-o), Indeterminate
NATURE.

laUjio, (ee-ah-oo-ee-o). The Summation of the Elementismns with the Elaboris-
mus, including the Nascent State as Intermediate or Transitional.

184. Or, re-stated in short, we have :

Au,io, (ah-oo-ee-o). The Elabokismtis, (
(From below upwards.) ,

156 ADJECTrPES IN -SO.

„, -J lio —The Entical Eoalm ; of Entities, Beings, Things,

j Eio —The Relative World ; of Relations, Laws.
Aio —The Magic World ; Transmntational.
Aio — The Eakth ; The Mundane World.
Uio — " Continuity ; " The Time World. (Transitory.)
Oio — " Solidarity ; " The Space World, (Eternal.)
Oio —The Ideal World ; Imaginative.
Uio —The Practical World, (Mixed, Tarhid.)
luio — ^The Germinative World ; (Emhryotic.)
Oiio— Hbatbh. (Space-Centre-Woria.)
Alio — Hbi,l. (Earth-Centre-World.)

Engkauvlio (eng-kah-oov-lee-o) distributed.

Mlanio, (mlah-oo-ee-o), Geiteiiaijzaticn — ^Hickok.
Shanbio (sliah-ooh-ee-o), Spboiaiization— Hickok.
Hwanio, (hwah-oo-ee o), PAHTiotnLAJiizATioN— Hickok.

Shaubio distributed.

Shanpio, (shah-oop-ee-o ; cf. Eng. shape), The Abstract— Spencer.
Zhanhio, (zhah-ooh-ee-o), The Cokobete.— Spencer.

185. Adjective Distribution of Au,io.

Iso, (ee-BO), Absolute ,' Ontological ; but in the Auso sense (t. 126).
Bso, (a-so), Belatlve ; but within the Au,io (t. 137).

jlso, (ffl-so), Elherial, Thin, Attenuated ; Spirit-like-Material.

Aso, (ah-so), (Gross-) Substantial; Thick, Dense; Solid-like Material.

ZTso, (uh-so), temporal, temporary, transitory, sublunary.
Oso, (aw-so), Spa-ce-al, eternal, permanent, celestial.

Oso, (o-so). Theoretical, aspectual, clear, luminons, full-face.
Uso, (00-80), JPractical, experiential, dubious, turbid, averted.

Inso, (ee-oo-so), Conjunctional, copulative.

Oiso, (aw-ee-so), mounting ; covering, overshadowing ; male.
Also, (ah-ee-so), substrate, covered, occult ; female.

Mlauio distributed.

Man,io, (mah-oo-ee-o), The Objective- Kant, Comte.
Nau,io, (nah-oo-ee-o), The Stjejbotive— Kant, Comte.

SUBSTA1\TIYES IN -TO. 157

Aungio, (ah-oong-ee-o), The Intermediate Eational— Comte, CatecMsin, p.
168. For notice of the omission of this mean term by Kant, see " Ves-
tigee of Civilization," p. 51.

Aunio, (ah-oon-ee-o), The Iniierent ; PropHum — Swedenborg.
Aumio, (ah-oom-ee-o), The Medium or Envikokment— Comte, Spencer.

Lrauio distributed.

Lan,io, (lah-oo-ee-o), The Long Run ; Ulterior and Reactionabt Conse-
quence, see " Structural Outline."

Ilau,io, (rah-oo-ee-o), The Short Run; Direct and Immediate Consbquencb,
see " Strnctural Outline."

Mnaungio, (mnah-oong-ee-o), The General Static; The Statical—Comte.
' Lrauio, (Irah-oo-ee-o), The General Motic ; " The Dynamical," as it should
have been conceived by Comte, who, however, went over, here, to hia
" Three States " which are eminently Special, instead of being General ;
not, therefore, of the same order as Mau and Nau.

Shaupio distributed.

Kaupio, (kah-oop-ee-o ; cf. Fr. coup-er, to cut), The Cut ; the Domain of Cut-

up ; Outlay^ Outline ; Simple ; Oo-existential.
Shaiifio, (shah-oof-ee-o ; cf. Eng. shape ; Ger. schaff-en, to create). The Make ;

the Domain of Fabrication, Creation, " The Becoming ; " Complex ; Co-

Gaubio, (gah-oob-ee-o ; cf. Eng. gob)^ Aggregation, The Inorganic World
(Gau " Force," jau " MLsture," Bau " Structure," Vest of Cre., p. 162.)

2^auvio, (zhah-oov-ee-o), The Organic World ; (zho Vegetable, zo Animal,
VoMental; sight, insight;— "Growth," "Life," "Mind," Vest, of Ore.y
p. 1fi3.)

186. Substantive Distribution in -to.

Ito, Being, Thing, Entity ; Centre.

Eto, Side-wise Adjunct ; Wing, Relation.

Ato, a ghost, ef&gy^ attenuated object.

Ato. a Substancial Object.

ZTto, fluxionoid object.

Oto, a solid or permanent object.

Oto, a hyaline or clear object ; an Idea.

Uto, an opaque object, etc.

CHAPTER XI.

SPECIAL AND TECHNICAL INSTANCES OF THE -COMPOSITION
OF ALWASO WORDS. ILLUSTRATION OF ALWASO GRAM-
MATICAL STRUCTURE.

187. It may be appropriate to give at least a siagle
illastration of the unequaled Capacities of Alwato to
serve as the Lingual Instrument for Technical Ex-
pression, by the amount and precision of the Mean-
ing or Meanings which may be compressed into the
single word.

188. Conceive, in the mind, in the first instance, a
Figure composed of Three Straight Lines cutting
each other, centrally and at right angles (in the diam-
eters of the three dimensions), and this figure placed
(as to Posture or Position), so that One of these
Lines (the dimension of thickness) shall stand per-
pendicularly to the earth's surface. This Piguee-
AND-PosiTiON. is One of pecuhar value and importance
in tlie "study of Cosmical Morphology, a New Branch
of Science growing out of Universology ; and is a
Pigure-and-Position for the simple naming of which
the resources of our Old Style Languages are wholly
inadequate. In " The Basic Outline of Universol-

COSMICAL MOEPHOLOGY. 159

ogy " it has been called Bi-trinacria, a word which
denotes, however, no more .(for the want of a better
term) than any object having six (twice three) Legs
or Arms.

189. To illustrate more concretely this important
idea (of the Basic Bi-trinacria of the Cosmical Outlay)
one may conceive of a simple Ordinary Turn-style
(having a standard-post with two sets of arms at
right angles) ; but, to be more definite, imagine the
four arms adjusted to the four cardinal points of the
compass. North, South, East and West, and the
centering or standard-post to the Zenith and Nadir.

190. This Figure-and-Posture is very fundamental
or governing in the Morphic Distribution of the Earth
and Heavens ; in the Plumb-centering, and Orientation
of the Great World-Dome which stands above us ;
and this again in alliance with the Pathagnomic
Lines in the Structure of the Human Body and
Head ; ' with the Heavens and Hells in the Spiritual
Cosmogony of Swedenborg ; with Abstract Ethical
or Moral Conceptions and Science (as when we
speak of the Uprightness of a character), with the
Nature of Chemical Substances (see Introduction),
with numerous other branches of Science and Phil-
osophy ; and, pre-eminently, with the Analogical Echo-
ing of each of these aspects of Being to every other.

191. By reference to these Axial Lines of Cosmical
Structure, and by the Analogical Outworkings of

' " Outlines of Anthropology," by Joseph R. Buchanan. For
Definitions, see Vooabolary, p. xi-xi'i.

160 THE BI-TBINACEIA.

Principles and Laws derived from and relating to
them, tlie Shapings of all things in the Universe and
their Correlations in situ will come to be as well un-
derstood scientificallj, in the final Outworkings of
Universology, as the parts and connections of any
simple machinery ; and these, in turn, will become
the infallible Working Patterns or Models to guide
us in our Industrial, Political, Societary, Moral and
Eeligious Constitutions and Constetjctions of all sorts.

192. The earliest, and, for a time, the governing use
of Alwato will be to supply all the old and the new sci-
ences (those begotten of Universology) with Nomen-
clatures of infinite potency, minuteness, and exten-
sion ; to reconstitute, in a word, the entire Word-
World of Technicality, in Science, and in Art, and
in Practical Lite.

193. To revert, now, to the proper Alwaso descrip-
tion of the Figure-and-Posture in question (190), the
following statement of the Vocal Elements, and their
Meanings, and of the resulting technical Namings
involved, will be suificiently intelligible :

E, relation, siding.

k, cut, division, distribution, Hmitation.

w, 'doubleness, counterpositional equation, or

wing-like expansion.
a, the substance (or even mere space) which is

cut, limited or described.
1, prolongation, liniar extension,
-sta, a termination meaning System.

In combination, e,kwal,sta, meaning Relational (e)

e,kwal;a,kkin,sta. 161

•

Cut, Division, or Distribution (k), equally duplicated
or adjusted in balance (w), of the Cosmical Sub-
stance or Expansion (a), prolated (1), in the opposite
directions, or as elongated arms (of the Bi-trinacria) ;
,sta System or Sohemative arrangement. This is a
sufficiently accurate description of the object or con-
ception under consideration, in respect, only, however,
still, to CoiwiGUEATiON, which is only the Absolute (or
iso) Factor or Constituent of Form, (cf. Eng. Equal.)
It remains to describe the Posture or Position which
is assigned to the Figure in question, (230, Relative).

194. The composition of this definition of posture
is the following :

K, cut or division (de-liniation.)

1, laxity, permitting indination or deviation from
standard Directional Positions.

r, rigor, resisting inclination or subsidence from
the standard positions ; (cf. Gr. hhin-em, to tEAN or
INCLINE, and k&in-eva., to judge ; to exercise the func-
tion of a judge ; that is to say, to non-incline—to the
right or left ; to be impartial ; to decide equitably ;
to hold the balance of justice.)

195. KruijSta is, then, a System or Constitution (Lat.
con, WITH and statuo, to set up, allied with, sto, stare, to
stand), a standing together (of, in this case, Lines or
Axes) in a Posture or Position non-inclined from the
Standard Directions (Perpendicular and Horizontal.)
The prefixing of a (ah) — A,krinsta — gives Substance
or Reality ; whence it follows that e,kwal;a,krin,sta is
the technicahty sought for.

The scientific definition of this single compound

162 THE COSmCAL BI-TEINACEIA.

word, ekwakkrinsta, is, then, as follows : The Con-
figurative Cosmioal Bi-trinacria, posited mon-inclinis-
maUy (or without leaning) in exact adjustment to the
I'erpendicular and the Horizon ; or, more fully : The
Universal Principle of Cosmical Adjustment symbol-
ized by a Figure composed of Three Axial Straight
Lines crossing and cutting each other. Centrally, at
Eight Angles ; and erected, as to Position and Di-
rections, upon one of its Axes placed perpendicularly
to a Basis-surface (as that of the Earth) ; so as by
its Non-indirdsm and Regulated Equation, in all Senses
or Directions, to serve as the General Measurer of
Exactitude or Non-deviation on the one hand, and
as Points (or Base-Hnes) of Departure, on all sides,
from which to determine the degree of Inclination,
Deviation or Declinature, of all sorts, on the other
hand. A single word charged with this amount of
meaning, of a new and rare variety, but of intrinsi-
cally scientific importance, for a conception, without
which first fundamentally posited in the mind, all
constructive thinking is necessarily at random, will
exhibit the power and necessity of the new language.
Bkwalakrinstaso is the Adjective relating to this
Noun Substantive ; and ekwalakrinstaH is the Corre-
sponding Adverb.

196. The following instances further illustrate the
extreme exactitude or logical precision of which the
Structure of Words in Alwato is susceptible :

Kauso means cutting, severing, dividing ; hence
pa,rl-\ng, Ais-part-mg, DrFPERENTiATiNG ; and distrib-
utes into kiso, keso, kaso, etc.

KISO, KESO; IKSO, EKSO. 163

Autso is the reversal of kauso, and means connter-
part-ing, Confeeentiating, re-coaptating, or re-com-
bining of the parts previously dis-paried. It dis-
tributes into ikso, ekso, akso, ete. These special
roots are also varied in respect to the length of_ the
vowel, ki or ik, ki or ik, etc.

Kiso (indifferent as to the length of the vowel)

means cutting along (lengthwise), as the edge of a

knife, or as a geometrical line i^foiuced.

kiso, the same as kiso, but with prominence given

to the idea of continuity or persistency in the action.

kiso, the same as kiso, but fractionally, or the

action suddenly or shortly interrupted.

kin, (Eng. keen), relating to the sharp edge, or to
that which cuts.

ikso, counterparting, at the end, lengthwise, (cf. Eng.
elce, to piece out at the end.)
ikso, the same proterided or continued,
ikso, the same, but sudden or abrupt.
Keso, (ka-so) cleaving or separating sideirise.
keso, the same plus idea of continuousness.
keso, the same, but sudden or abrupt,
ekso, counterparting, liniarly, at sides, or side-
wise ; hence collateral.
ekso, counterparting, liniarly, at sides, or si'c^e-
hy-side, and continuously, or in a steady, equal
manner ; with the relation prolated or " pro-
duced;" hence PARALLEL,
ekso, counterparting, linially, and coUateraUy (as
collateral lines, or the legs of a triangle), but
in an ahrupted manner, as, by their converging,

164 PAKALtELISiSI AND EECTANGULAEITT.

the legs of a triangle intersect and limit each
other ; hence angular, (cf. Ger. eclce, an angle.)

ekia, or ekizm, parallelism.

ekia, or ekizm, angularity.

ekfco, an angle.

ekso, or ekioso, angular.

twekso, (t, at, w, wingness; folded-wing-posture),
ac iife-angular.

pwekso, (p, hingeness with an implication of
openness, cf. Lat. ^^andere, to open ; Eng.
open ; open-wing-posture), oSittse-angular.

kwekso, (k equal cut ; half-ness ; haK-expanded-
wing-posture), eeotangulae ; or rek meaning
straight (r break, e side, and k cut for straight
edge), rekti,ekso, or rekti,ekioso, rectangular.

kwekia, or rekti,ekia, or rekti,ekioia, rectangular-
ly.

Qekioso, direct-and-reversed angularity as in the
checktr.

thekioso, decussation-anga\ixr ; (double apices.)

197. Perhaps no severer test could be appHed to a
new language claiming to be a disooteby, not an in-
vention, than to demand of it accurate terms signify-
ing Parallelism and Rectangular ity. These two ideas
are the Core of Scientific Bxactification. The Rectan-
gularity and Gubic Dimensions of the New Jerusalem,
seen prophetically in vision by John, the revelator,
on Patmos (Revelations, v. 16, ch. xxi.) has come
xinder consideration elsewhere. (B. O. Index.)

198. The ideas named by the preceding list of words
are such that each one might be delineated diagram-

THE ONENESS OF ELEMENTS. 165

maticaUy. It is at these Elementary Fountain-lieads
of Thought itself, that Language and the Domain of
Form are demonstrated, by Universology, to be in-
herently related, and, as it were, made identical. It
wUl be the supreme triumph of Scientology, the Ex-
act Branch of this new Universal Science, to exhibit
in Diagram, and by illustrative object-teaching, all the
Boot-tJioughts of which the Human Mind is capable,
and of which the Root-words of the newly-discovered
but inlierently natxieal Universal Language (Alwato)
are merely the intrinsically appropriate vocal expres-
sions or Namings. (69, 73.)

199. It cannot be too emphatically repeated thati/ie
Elements of Sound, the Elements of Form, the Elements
of Number, and the Elements of whatsoever other domain,
or, in a word, of all Things, and of Thought itsdf, are
in close relations with each other, and are, in a word, so
identified by an infinite echo of analogy, that they are
substantially One. There is, therefore, at the bottom
of all Science an Alphabet of Sound, an Alphabet of
Form, an Alphabet of Tliought, and, so, an Alphabet of
aU Things ; and these Alphabets, are, in an important
sense. One. They are. The Alphabet or Fountain-head
of the Pure Abstract Realm; The Essential or In-
dwelling Law of all Being ; in a word, the Logos
of Scripture, or God himself, manifested through the
Universe of Existences, (19.) The discovery and
revelation of this Divine " "Word " cannot, therefore,
but be the Orisis-event of Human Development; the
inception of a brighter or more glorious phase of Human
Destiny, the Advent of Order and Harmony in fke

160 THE CEISIS-EYENT.

regulation of Human Affairs. At all evetfts, Scjienob
takes a new and more commanding relation to Gov-
ernment and Human Administration in all tbings
from the time when it is, itself, unified and centrally
and organically constituted by the discovery and demon-
stration of Univeksal Scientipio Peinciples. (19, 115.)

200. We have hitherto dealt with the Structure of
the Words of Alwato. It will be well to glance, for
a moment, at the principles of its Syntax or Gram-
matical Structure. The Central Department of
Grammar is the Conjugation of the Verb ; and pre-
eminently therein the Variation of the Tenses — The
Temporology of the Verb ; and there is nothing more
intricate and troublesome than this in the whole
composition of the Instinctual, Chance-begotten, or
Old Style languages. It is only necessary to refer to
the Greek Verb, with its compKcation of Tense-
forms, and its immense difficulty in this particular.
The Structure of Alwato, in the same respect, is the
perfection of simplicity, conciseness, and precision,
and is . dictated by that Law of Nature, scientifically
evolved, which is applicable to the subject, as follows :

201. The vowel sound a (ah) is the Pivotal Vowel-
Sound at the Back-Mouth ; the o at the Front-
Mouth, and the i (-ee) at the Middle-Mouth, or Mean
position. Bach-w&xdi position corresponds with Past
Time, as the Past is behind us ; Front-^av'di position
corresponds with the Future, as the Future is hefore
us ; and Midway position, between the other two, cor-
responds with Present Time, or the No2o.

202. In accordance with these simple facts -a (-ah)

ALWASO VEEB ENDINGS. 1G7

as a Verb-ending denotes Past Time (or action), -o the
Future, and i (-ee) the Present. In other words, i (ee),
a (ah), o, are the terminations of all verbs, for signify-
ing the Present, the Past, and the Future Tenses, re-
spectively — as the Three Basis Tenses of the Verb.
A repetition of these Vowels distributes the Tenses
into a Eelative Past, Present, and Future (called Per-
fect, Imperfect, etc.) The vowel -u (-65) is the ending
for the Imperative Mood (third Person) ; otherwise the
Eoot-word serves for the Imperative ; -u also denotes
the Subjunctive Mode, and receives the Pivotal Vow-
els added for its Tenses ; and -i,e (ee-a) denotes the
Conditional or Optative — an assumed state (-e) of be-
ing present (-i), the e serving for resultant state — see
the Participles. The ending -ya denotes the Infinitive.
203. The Personal Pronoun I is, in Alwato, yo, or io,
as in Spanish and Italian (y, radiating centricity, i, cen-
tral being, and o, presence.) For a verb-stem we may
assume the English word speak, merely changing the
spelling of it to spik, for while a word wrought
out from Alwaso Elements to mean the same might
serve, it is equally -permissible to naturahze adopted
citizens, in the New "Word-Eepublic, from any of the
existing languages, only requiring of them to con-
form, in decency of appearance (their orthographic
dress), and in their relations with the natives (their
prepositions, verb-endings, etc.), to the constitution
and laws of the New Domain. These two words, to-
gether with the Verb-endings shown in the last pre-
ceding paragraph, suffice, to exhibit substantially the
whole Conjugation of the Verb, as follows :

168

CONJUGATION Or THE AlWASO V£KB.

TABLE No. 7.

INDICATIVE MODE.

yo spiki.i, lam speaUng,

{Imperfect)
Present. yo Bplki,a, Ihave spoken,

Yo spiki, I speak, ' (Perfect.)

yo BpIki,o, lam about to speak,
(Prospective.)

Yo splka, I spoke.

f yo spika,!, I was speaking,

(Imperfect.)

\ yo splka,a, (or splk(a)ha, or ka), I had spoken,

(Perfect.)

yo Bp:ka,o, I slimM speak, (I said that . . . )

(Prospective.)

Future.
Yo Bpiko, I shall or will speak.

yo Bplko,l, IshaU be peaking,

(Imperfect.)
yo BpIko,a, I shall have spoken,

(Perfect.)
yo spIko,o (or Bplkwo) IsliaMbe about to speak,

'■■)

IMPEEATIVE MODE.

Splk, speak, (them, or you.)

Splkfl (pr. speek-00), or ke ro splkll, let him speak.

OPTATIVB OE CONDITIONAL MODE.

Yo Bplki,e, (pr. speek-ee-a), da, I should or would speak, if . . .

Yo 8plki,e,ia, (pr. &peek-ee-a-ee-ali), / should or would have spoken, (if) , .

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.

. ke yo splka,i, (pr. speek-oo-ee), . . . that Imay or should speak.

. ke yo spIkUjia, (or splkaya), . . . t/iat Lmay or should have spoken.
, . ke yo Bplka,a, . . . that 1 might or should speak.
, . ke yo Eplku,a,a, (or ka), . . . that I might or sluyuZd have spoken.

INFINITIVE MODE.

Splkya, (Bplkiya or splkoya), to speak.
Bplkaya, to have spoken.

ALWASO PEONOUNS. 169

PARTICIPLES.

1. Active.

Present. Splkin (or -ing), speaking.

Perfect ot j SplMan or 1 »„„•„„ ™„t,™
Past. \ Splkan \ fi^vrng spoken.

Future. Splksn, being about to speak.

S. Passive.
Present,. Splkint, (bdng tww) spoken, (d for t adds the idea of neceesity— spiMnd.
Pe^at or^ Spftiant or ^^^^^ ^^ (j^„^j ^^

Future. SpIkOnt (or d) what will (or must) be {being) spoken.

Special Acljectivoid Passim Past PartiiAples— Permanent States.
Splk,et (or -ed, contract for -enta, -enda) Spoken ; cf. Eng. and Ger. Regular.

fSpIkt (8plk(e)t, cf. Eng. Contracted forms; d after Concretes,
Contracted \ Liquids and Vowels.

tSpIk,5, cf. Fr. prevalent forms in -^, -le, -€5, -ees.

H^ective or Middle.
Splkin5(tsli), speaking itself.
Splkian^, or Splkanf , having spoking itself.
SpIkOn?, about to speak itself.

204. The additional termination -ta converts tte
preceding Active iato the Passive Voice Tense-Forms ;
thus, Alwato spikita, spikata, spikota, Alwato w
spoken, was sjjolcen, will be spolcen, etc. ; and -§a gives
the Eeflective or Middle sense ; spiki§a (pr. speek-
ee-tshah), speaks itself. See Conspectus (of the Pro-
nouns) below.'

TABLE No. 8.

THE OEDINAET PBESONAL PEONOTJNS.
1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person.

SOM.

OBJEC.

NOM.

OEJEO.

KOM. OBJEO.

Ma^.

To, I;

mo, me ;

vo, thou ;

zo, tliee ;

ro, Ae ,' lo, him.

Fern.

ya, I;

ma, me ;

va, i/um ;

za, thee ;

ra, she ; la, her.

Mas

yi, we ;

mi, m ;

vi, ^ou ;

zi, you ;

ri, they; H, them.

Fern.

ye, we ;

me, us ;

ve, you ;

ze, you ;

re, they ; le, them.

Indif.\

1 yu, /,

mu, me,

vu, thou.

zu, th£e.

ru, he, lu, her, him

ferent.^

1 or we.

or MS.

or you.

or you.

she or they, or them.

'Notice tlie Confused Irregularity of the Enjrlish Pronouns.

CHAPTER XII.

MNAL RESUME OF THE SUBJECT.

205. A final word must be said, here, in respect to
tlie Alwaso namings of Naturology, Scientology, and
Artology, respectively, which namings furnish the
proper beginning-point for aU subsequent distribu-
tions ; and the several senses in which these terms
may be taken must be pointed out and carefully dis-
tinguished by appropriate special sets of Alwaso
terms. The Indeterminate, Unlimited, or Infinite As-
pect of Universal Being, represented by the Vowel-
Sounds, is first in order, and has its own Naturism,
Scientism and Artism. Some re-statement will be
necessary. The Central (Middle-mouth), most con-
densed, and, consequently, slenderest of the Vowels,
i (ee) signifies Thing, Entity, Being. The ending -ski
(sfee) means Science. Iski is therefore Ontology (Gr.
onta, THINGS, BEINGS, from ei-mi, to be, and Logos),
the Science of Thing in se — or abstracted to the
uttermost, or, so far as may be, from those Relational
or Conditions in which Things are always acttially
found. Ordinary Ontology is still, however, not the
Science of Ralional Pure Being (I"io, 149, 158),

PHILOSOPHOID NATUEOLOGY, ETC. 171

but of Actital or Bensible Thing, considered apart
from Eelations. The ending -io (-ee-o) means a
Domain or Eealm, and -ia {-ee-ah) a Principle.
I,io is the Thing-Domain, and i,ia the Thing-Prin-
ciple, otherwise called Entity (Lat. em, being or
naiNG). Finally i,ia,io (ee-ee-ah-ee-o) is The Eealm or
Domain in which i,ia (ee-ee-ah) or the Thing-Principle
especially exists, presides or predominates ; and this
is peculiarly real (Lat. res, thing ; recdis, heal) ; and,
hence, in this high Indeterminate Elemental sense
i,ia,io is Nature, the Actual or Eeal World (of Con-
fluent, Undifferentiated Substance) ; and i,ia,iosld is
Naturology, in this attenuated elementary sense ;
i,io,io is, then, the Corresponding Scientismus, or
Differentiation into Domains; etc. But, contrasted
with eski [a-slcee), which follows, (206) the whole of
iski (ee-sJcee, 205) is Naturology.

206. The next slenderest (protensively) and most
central vowel, but more thinned or flattened (than i)
sidewise (laterally, or re-?a<-ively), is e, (pronounced
like the English name of a.) This vowel, e, signifies
Belation (the hetweenity of Things.) Eelation general-
ized or drawn out, or elongated or — in the phrase of
the geometer pro-duced, — is Law, which is, therefore,
denoted by e, (the same vowel-sound as e, but pro-
lat-ed or bearing the hng-msLvk, expressed or under-
stood.) Eski (a-skee) is, therefore, Nomology, or the
Science of abstract and necessary Laws existing in the
Constitution of Things, (Gr. nomas, law ; and logos.)
E,io is the Law-Domain or Law-dom, and e,ia is the
'La.w-Vnnciple-jtha.toi certainty, regulation,permanency;

172 SCIENTOrD NATUEOLOGT, ETC.

the understanding and systematization of which is,
again, the very essence of Science. Finally, there-
fore, e,ia,io (a-ee-ah-ee-o) is the Eealm or Domain in
■which Law, or Certainty and Eegularity prevails — re-
JiecUng upon and governing Thing or Things — Science
governing or presiding over Nature. This is pecuharly
un-real, or abstract. In another high Indeterminate
Elemental Sense e,ia,io is, therefore. Science (as pure
Logic, or the Eealm of Laws) ; and e,ia,ioski is
Scientology.

207. 1 and e are the Elementary (central and slender)
Vowels. The Eemaining Vowel-Sounds are Elabo-
rate (circumferential, bulky, weighty). Again, there-
fore, in the more Elaborate and usual Aspect of this
Philosophical View of Being, (denoted by the Vow-
els), it has been shown already that AsKi is Natu-
EOLOGY, OsKi, Scientology, and Uski, Abtology, (57-
59, 130-131.) All of this Elaborismus is contrasted
with the Elementismus represented by i and e (130.)

208. StiU, however, all the preceding distributions,
inasmuch as they rest wholly in the Vowels, are Pliilr
osopMcal rather than Scientific ; and are quite vague.
The Scientific namings are NA,ski (Naturski or Natura-
ski) for Natukology ; SKi,ski for Scientology, and Ae-
ski for Aetology. Observe, however, also, that Maski
(prefixing m for macro-, or exo-) signifies Exo-Naturol-
ogy, including the whole bulk of the Existing Sciences,
as sporadically developed ; and Naski (prefixing n for
micro-, or endo-) signifies Endo-Naturology, the Natu-
rology especially developed from Uaiversology and
presided over internally and centrally by the Sciento-
logical Principle and Idea. (75.)

GENERALIZED NATUEOLOGY, ETC. 173

209. But, again, Nature, Science, and Art, general-
ized to that final extent that they are inclusive and
combinative of both the Phtlosophioai and the Scientific
Aspects of Being demand still other yarieties of nam-
ings. IndeedjthePhilosophicalModeof this Distribu-
tion (208) itself, (that-of-Universal-Being into-Nature,
Science-and-Art), is Naturismal, the Scientific Mode
of the same (208), is Scientismal ; and the final
Mode, remaining to be specified (210, 211), is Artis-
mal, and Culminative.

210. In this ulterior and inclusive aspect of the Dis-
tribution in question, Am,^\ (the Yowel-Domain=Phil-
osophy) is Natueology ; Engkauvlski (or Limitoski,
the Consonant-Domain, 127) is Scientology, and
Alski (Universology itself), as including, combining,
and reconcihng Nature and Science in the Grand
Artismus or Completed Structure of Being, is Abtol-
OGY ; but it is Hwau°ski, the Science of the Vital and
Attenuated Domain intervening between the Yowels
and the Consonants (124, 158), which is Artology in
tJie Special Sense of The Fine Aets.

211. Al (ahl) is a word which is constituted by the
combination of the leading Vowel a, (ah), and the ul-
timate Consonant (in the return-career from Con-
sonantism to Yowelism), the 1; and as this wotd
means the Unbroken "Whole, so Ar (ahr) denotes
the brokenness' of the same into Specialty, or
Parts. These Motic Liquids (1, r), likewise put the
otherwise Static Universe into Movement, or, as it
were, into an Orbital Career. The following table
exhibits those namings of Nature, Science, and Art,

8. Skibei, SCIENTOLOGT

174 NATURASKI; SI,ENSKI ; AKTOSKI.

which take into account this new feature, that of
Movement. (Read from below upwards), the order
is here reversed, as that of Actual Discovery is so from
Nature, and begins with Art as Speciality thence
rising to Nature as the Grand Whole :

TABLE No. 9.

3. Albki, NATDEOLOGT, as TJniTerBology, or the Science of Nature in the
Grand or TJniverBal Sense.

- 2. AlrsM ; A Priori Order ; from the UniverBal
to the Particular, or from Whole to Parts ;
(Oitiaski.)
1. Ablski ; A Posteriori Order; from Particulars
to Universals, from Parts to Wholes, from
Causes to Effects ; (Aitiaski ; cf. Gr, aitia^
OAirsK.)

1. Aksei, AKTOLOGT (cf. Fr. Art, pronounced ahr, ;5^«aaH<e— Balzac.)

212. Finally, as the Condensed Extract, and Gen-
erally Representative Trigade Series of terms for Na-
TTJEE, Science and Art ; the following namings will
most frequently and generically occur.

*TABLE No. 10.
3. Abski or AETOSKI — ^Artology.

2. SKISKI— SCIENTOLOGY.

1. Mnaski, Naski, Natueski or NATUEASKI— Na-

TUEOLOGy.

213. Or, in fine, as follows :

TABLE No. 11.

3. AETOSKI— Aktology.

2. SKISKI (or SI,ENSKI)— Scientology.

I. NATUEASKI (Nah-toor-a-skee)— Naturologt.

traiSMi; DUiSMi; sesquismi, etc. 175

214. The au,io (Homogenismus, 126) of Speecli, or
of the Universe, or of whatsoever Domain is the fun-
damental Unismus of that Domain ; the enkauvlio (He-
terogeuismus, 127) is the corresponding Duismus; and
the aho, (Totismus, 211), is the corresponding Trinis-
mus (6.) The Vowels are, therefore, the Unismus of
Oral Speech (not now including Music) ; the Conso-
nants, the Duismus ; and The Syllable, and all the Ela-
borate Structure which grows out of it, the Trinismus.
The Vowel-and-Consonant Domain is Elementary.
At the Center of this Elementismus of Speech, be-
tween the Vowels and Consonants, are the Ambigu's ^
(Hwau»io, 129, 158, 210), the Pneumatismus of Speech,
the Analogue of Viscerism and Vital Spiritual Exist-
ence, universally; technically Sesquism (Lat. sesqui,
ONE-AHD-A-HALP.) Ti,ia (tee-ee-ah), ki,ia (kee-ee-ah),
and pi,ia (pee-ee-ah) are The Abstract Limitological
Aspects of Unism, Duism, and Trinism. Un,ia (oon-
ee-ah), Du,ia, (doo-ee-ah) and Tre,ia (tra-ee-ah) are
the more generalized aspects of the same.

215. Before concluding this Httle treatise, let ns re-
turn, for a moment^ from the special consideration of
Alwato, as an Epitome of the Universe, to that of the
Universe itself ; and of some few of the other and
correlated branches of the Grand Whole. It is only,
in a sense, accidental, that we have been mainly oc-
cupied, while introducing the investigation of Uni-
versal Science, with Language, and especially with
the Elementary or Alphabetic aspect of this par-
ticular subject ; but, on the otlier hand, there was, as
previously shown (63, 71, 80, 81), a sufficient deter-

176 ALL DOMAINS MODELIO.

mining reason, for the choice of this special current
of investigation in a certain centricity of position
which is held by this rational core of Speech or Ut-
terance (64, 67), as, representatively, the Logos or
G^ocZ-Principle of all Being (199, 216.)

216. But apart from this consideration of a certain
Pivotal ox God-like Supremacy in the Logos or Bational
fundamentum of the Speech-Domain, there is, intrin-
sically, no reason why we might not as well have
sought for and illustrated the same Governing Pkin-
ciPLES OF Untveesal Being in the Elementismus of
any, and, so, in turn, of every other Domain ; for, by
virtue of their being Universal, they occur equally
in every Realm ; but, most specifically, in that which
is most Elementary in every Realm of Matter, Mind,
and Movement, in the Universe at large, or within
and throughout the Absolute Totahty of Being : So
that, had we commenced our investigation, instead
of choosing the Domain of Language, in that of
Number, we should have been dealing mainly with
Zero and the Units ; with Units, Duads and Triads
(Ones, Twos, and Threes) ; and with the Numerical
Series, as Cardinal and Ordinal ; Integral and Frac-
tional ; and Odd and Even ; — which are the Elements
of that Sphere of Being ; or, in fine, with Numbers as
The Absolute [iso), and with +, — , and =, as The
Relative (eso) Elementism of Numerical Science ; — all
of these as Analogues of Silence and Speech-Utter-
ance ; of Vowels, Consonants, and Syllabic Elabora-
tions ; of Lingual Developments expansively in Space
and historically in Time ; of Metropolitan Integra-

LANGUAGE, NXTMBEE, FORM, ETC. 177

tions and Provincial Fractionalities or Divergencies ;
of Monologue and Dialogue ; and, finally, of Prosaic
Absolutism, or Free Utterance (iso) and of Poetic and
Musical Measured Harmony, or Verbal Relativity,
(eso, .)

217. Or, had we commenced in Morphology (the
Ercalm of Form, Geometrical), we should have been en-
gaged in dealing mainly with another set of Analogues,
echoing to the two sets just noticed; with Blank
Space and the Inscribed Points, Lines, and Surfaces ;
with Point, Line, and Surface ; with Side-wiso-ness
and Length-wise-ness ; with Uniformity (Integral) and
Pluriformity (Fractional) ; with Unequal and Equal, or
Equaled, Shapes ; and with Figure as the Absolutism
{i,ia), and Posture or Direction as the Eelatism (e,{a)
of Form. In Mechanics, we should have dealt with
Pull and PusJi and Reciprocating Action (Unismal,
Duismal, and Trinismal) ; in Astronomy with Centri-
petal, Centrifugal and Orbital Forces and Move-
ments ; in Optics (representative of Physics), with
Incidence, Reflection and Vision ; in Chemistry with
Synstasis (Primary Agglomeration), Analysis, and
Synthesis ; in Biology with Feminine, Masculine and
Copulative Phenomena ; in Sociology (and pivotally
iu the Science of Government) with 1. Convergent
Individualitt (Social Unity or Mutuality represented
in some Pivotal Personage) ; 2. Divergent Individu-
ALiTT (Democracy, " The Sovereignty of the Indivi-
dual ") ; and 3. Social Reconciliation {PantarchaUy, of
those two Opposite Principles), the Trinism, from the
two former as Unism and Diiism ; in Morals with

178 THE PIVOTAL IDEAS EE-STATED.

1. Inclination, The Absolute or Individual WiH, 2.
Kectitude, the Eelational Equity, and 3. " Geace "
or Gracefulness, from the True Compromise and Har-
monic Eeconciliation of the other two ; in Theology
■with Fetishism, Polytheism, and Monotheism ; or in
another Sense, with Unifcarianism, Trinitarianism, and
the Scientific Beconcihation of these two, etc.

218. In conclusion ; UNIVEESOLOGY is the Cen-
tering and the All-inclusive One Grand Science,
unifying and interpreting and expanding aU the
known Sub-Sciences, and developing a crowd of New
and hitherto Unthought-of Sciences ; and recon-
structing Education. INTEGEALISM is the New
and Final Philosophy ; the All-sided and Complete
Eeconciliation of all possible Sectarian Divisions in
All Spheres ; not as extinguishing Individual differ-
ences, but as softening, co-ordinating, and utilizing
them ; and, finally, PANTAECHISM is designed to be
the Ulterior Planetary and Scientific Oegaotzation and
Admtnisteation of all Human Affairs, protecting and
subserving the utmost practicable range of Individual
Freedom, in the bosom of a Peesiding Oegaotc Unity;
• — the harmonically constituted Polity or Activity of
Humanity, centeredby EELIGION,as the Irradiating
Spirit of the "Whole. United, they may be conceived of
as the Inauguration of the MUlennium, through Intel-
lectual Discovery and Science reconciled with Inspira-
tion and All the Experiences of the Past. Such is the
Nature and Spirit of the Programme, to which the
World is now invited ; — Affectional Enthusiasm and a
New Eehgious Fervor, based on Intellectual Gratifica-

THE CONCLUSION. 179

tion and Triumph, demanding as their completion
the Sanctified and Consecrated Best Exertions, in
the Future, and from this hour, of every Individual
Member of Society, in behalf of the Universal Good
of our Collective Humanity.

219. And, again, in conclusion of this special work ;
Universology, as such, is a Determinate Science, as
much so as Geometry or Chemistry, and is not to be
classed with any speculative theory or so-called Sys-
tem of Philosophy whatsoever; but it is, at the
same time, a METHOD, still more distinctively than
a Science; and, as a Method, it is characterized,
1. By a Primitive Radical Analysis of the Elements oj
AS, Things ; that is to say, by the Analysis of the
Elements of each particular Sphere or Domain of
Being or Things ; 2. By the discovery of the exist-
ence of Universal Echo, Analogy, or He/lection, as be-
tiveen the Elements of each Domain, and those of every
other Domain; or of Univeesal Analogy in Elements;
and, 3. By the demonstration, thence, of Parallel Series
of Evolution, from Analogic Elements, in all Spheres ;
and so, of Universal Analogy, also in Elabokation
or Results ; ioth in respect to what is, in Nature, and
to what remains to be accomplished by Man. (193.)
The student-reader is reminded that this work is only
the glimpse of an outline of an immense fabric. He
may see, as the child sees, at first, only a blurred inii-
age of the New World which it opens ; it is, never-
theless, a New World of Ideas, and it will clear to his
vision as he advances.

180 APPENDIX A.

APPENDIX A.

HYBEIDITY, AND THE " MECHANICS OF LITEEATUEE."

220. In the matter of style and the Mechanics of
Literature it is impossible to please all critics. The
term Universology is open to objection as a literary
Hybrid ; it has great popular advantage, however,
over any term of purely Greek extraction, ■which
would suggest no idea to the common apprehension.
The whole subject and others similar have been con-
sidered and discussed in " The Basic Outline " (B. O,
Ci 1-9, t. 3) ; it is also alluded to farther on in the
work— Appendix D, t. 246, p. 296.

221. At the point cited in The Basic Outline, the prin-
ciples and policy of the liberal use of Capitals, Ital-
ics, etc., as appliances for emphasis and distinction,
which I have adopted in this, and shall continue in
my subsequent scientific works, have been explained
somewhat in detail. One additional consideration
may be stated here. It is my desire and intention
to introduce a system of Scientific Eeadings, for the
more rapid promulgation of these new scientific
views ; and, where ideas are both weighty and new,
a judicious rendering of them for the ears of others
requires a deliberate and special management of the
voice, with appropriate pauses, and a considerable
variety of emphasis, changing with the degree of
importance which attaches to each word or phrase.
The exceptional system of Punctuation and Literary
Dress which characterizes this and the accompanying
work, is intended to aid the reader in this respect ;

VOWEL-SOUNDS AND THE ATEECTIONS. 181

and, in a sense, to teach a special liahit of reading
adapted to this style of svbject.

222. I have also adopted the habit (Hable to some
criticism) of signing my initials to Notes and fugitive
documents, whether they accompany my more formal
labors or not, especially where the subject requires
that I fall down to the famihar style which author-
izes the use of the pronoun I. It is not altogether
the usage, but it suits best my idea of the confiden-
tial relation which I hope to establish with the Stu-
dents of TJmversology. S. P. A.

APPENDIX B.

SWEDENBOEG ON THE MEANING OE THE VOWELS.

223. The Homogenismus of Mind is Affection, as its
Heterogenismus or Limitary Aspect (Form-like) is
Intellect, Intelligence, or The Knowing Faculty
(Ideation.) The Vowel-sounds (homogeneous in
character) echo, therefore, to, or correspond with, or
are the analogues of, the Afectionality of the Mind, (as
the consonants are related to the Thought-Element.)
Music, which is the Language of the Affections,
modulates mainly in the Vowels, and Thought or
Cogitation prefers the Consonants. It is vaguely
recognized among musicians that each Key and
Note of music tends to awaken a different and spe-
cific kind of eniotion ; Helmholtz has proven that
the Varieties of Vowel-Sound (in Oral Speech) rest
on a Musical Basis. We are on the verge of a demon-
stration, therefore, from purely empirical and me-
chanical considerations, of the fundamental idea of

182 "speech of the angels."

Alwato ; which Universology demonstrates in its own
way. Intuitions of these occult facts of science are
not wanting in the writings of certain inspirational
thinkers ; and notably with Swedenborg ; even to a
dogmatic affirmation of the Meanings of the different
Vowels, as shown in the following extracts :

224. [" Of THE Ajtgeiic Language] ; e [a] and i
[ee] properly belong to the Spiritual Affections,"
Doctrine conaerning the Soared Scripture (90) ; Heaven
and HeU (241.) That is to say i and e, Middle-
Mouth and Slender- Yowel-Sounds, being Elementary
(130) — and the Vowels meaning Affections — these
two Sounds, the most meagre or skeleton-like of the
Vowel-Sounds, and very like Consonants, mean Affec-
tions ion: Abstractions and lAmit-like Tenuities, or Subtle
Entities, and, hence, they are " Spiritual " or Related
to Intelligence (Definition) which is the characteristic
of Swedenborg's " Spiritual " Sphere.

225. " The Speech of the Heavenly (or Celestial)
Angels [above the " Spiritual " Angels] sounds much
from the vowels o and u [oo.] From the expressions
in The "Word, in the Hebrew language, it may in
some measure "be known whether they belong to the
Heavenly class or the Spiritual class, thus whether
they involve Good or Truths ; those which involve
Good partake much of u [oo] and o, and also some-
thing of A [ah] ; but those which involve Truth [In-
tellectual, Spiritual] partake of E [a] and i [ee.]
Because Affections manifest themselves chiefly by
Sounds — [Clangs — ^Helmholtz], therefore, also, when
great subjects are treated of, as heaven and God,
those words are preferred in human discourse which

THE GOOD, THE TRUE, AND THE BEAUTIFUL. 183

contain the vowels u [oo] and o ; musical sounds also
have an elevation to tlie same vowels, when similar
things are expressed ; it is otherwise when the sub-
jects treated of are not of importance ; hence it is
that the art of music is able to express various kinds
of Affection." Heaven and Hell (241.)

226. The meaning of these mystic utterances, trans-
lated by the light of Universology and Alwato, is this :
The Back-Mouth (Basis) vowel-sound a (ah ) is The
Analogue of Nature, oi 8ubstance,'Riches, Goods, Good
(151), in the Lower, unspiritualized, or Natural Sense
of Good; it characterizes, therefore, the Speech of
Swedenborg's angels who iahabit the "Natural
Heaven " beneath the " Spiritual " and the " Celes-
tial." The I (ee) and E (a) are intermediate between
this and the o and u (oo), which last pertain to the
Elaborate or Artistic, the region of the Higher or. Ul-
terior Good subsequent to Spiritualization, and are
made at the lips — the top of the mouth ; hence i (ee)
and e^a) are Transitional, Evanescent, "Spiritual;"
while, finally, o (clear, presentative, Scientig) and u
(oo) (retiring, shaded, modified, modulated. Artistic)
are conjointly " Celestial," Elaborate, Perfect, Com-
plete. A (ah) is also Elaborate as contrasted with i
and E — elementary. This adaptation of the Elaborate
Vowels A (ah), o, u (oo) to loftiness of the affections
or feelings, as, in part, shown by Swedenborg, is well
illustrated in the pompous character of the Spanish
language where these three vowels abound. When
Language shall be printed phonetically. The Natural
and Ethnical Phrenology (or the Mental Constituency
of the different Peoples of the Earth) may be meas-

184 MUSICAL RECONSTEUCTION.

ured with more accuracy than Callipers and Cranios-
copy can apply to the heads of Individuals ; by the
simple means of weighing fJie types employed in printing
the different languages, observing the predominance
of the different sounds, and apportioning the types,
— and a new branch of science will thus be born. The
same -tendency to prefer different Sounds and Classes
of Sounds, or the words which contain them, will cause
a modified idiomatism to prevail even in the body of
Alwato, characterizing different nationalities and
classes of Society, down to the " Individual Equa-
tion " — ^but without disturbing the general unity of a
language which is rallied by a constant appeal to its
scientific bases.

227. I shall take pains elsewhere to do justice to
the original and profound instinctual and poetical
feeling of Benjamin Blood for the inherent mean-
ing of Sounds, as related to Poetry. When Oral
Sounds, Inherent Meaning, and Musical Experience,
are finally adjusted to each other (as they will read-
ily be) in the Sublime Musical Compositions of the
Future, Music will have experienced the influence of
Universological discovery, and will be radically re-
generated. S. P. A.

APPENDIX C.

228. Mr. Dana, of " The Sun," (newspaper) recently
requested of me, for his paper, a statement in brief of
my " whole idea," measuring off on his finger (in the
true spirit of modern journalism) the space in the

DOTVERSOLOGY, INTEGRALISM, PANTAECHY. 185

column which could be assigned to me. The follow-
ing attempt at the condensation of a whole scheme
of philosophical thinking into a paragraph was the
result ; as introduced and published in " The Sun " of
December 11, 1870. S. P. A.

UNIVEESOLOGT, .INTEGRALISM, PANTAECHY.

229. We are informed that the claim of Mr. Stephen
Pearl Ajjdbews to the discovery of a new science of
unparalleled extent and importance, which he de-
nominates TJniversology, is receiring privately the at-
tention of influential parties in this city, among the
men of culture, general science and wealth. Private
meetiugs are held, and explanations made of the
subject. We have procured for the benefit of our
readers the following statement of the leading points
of the claim :

WHAT UNIVEKSOLOGY IS.

230. As a science, in the exact or rigorous sense of
the term, the discovery is named TJniversology.

INTEGRALISM:.

231. As a Philosophy of Reconciliation among all
the Sects and Parties of Mankind, upon the basis of
the Scientific Principles revealed by Universology, it
is called IntegraKsm, which is defined to mean AU-
sidedness,

A UNIVERSAL GOVERNMENT.

232. As a presiding practical organization over aU
• human affairs, to culminate in the institution of a

186 MATHEMATICAL BASES.

Single or Uniyersal Goverriment for the planet, to
•whicL. all the existing governments shall become sub-
ordinate as branches — this Governmental Institute
to be based, in turn, upon the Science and the Phil-
osophy — it is called Pantarohy, from two Greek
■words which' mean universal government. By Gov-
ernment is not, however, here meant government in
the ordinary sense, but a Eational-Spiritual Govern-
ment, or an Organized Practical Influence of the
Thinking and Aspirational Leaders of Humanity
and their coadjutors; to intervene, systematically,
for the promotion of the highest principles of states-
manship and social culture ; and to serve as Umpire
between the special governments and the nations.

ITS BASIS IS MATHEMATICAL.

233. This new system of thought, which divides into
these three branches (Science, Philosophy, and Polity
or Practical Life), and which is best described, generi-
caUy, by its pMhsojohical title, Integralism, is mathe-
matical in its foundations ; is, in a word, the re-dis-
covery and the expansion, in the modem scientific
spirit, of the half-completed mathematical doctrine
and discoveries of Pythagoras, the old Greek phil-
osopher. It claims to be more abstractly and meta-
physically profound than Kant or Hegel ; more
analytically and specifically positive than Comte, as
preparatory to a larger, more scientific, and more
powerful synthesis of ideas, and of Society, than that
which he has proposed ; more varied and magnificent
in its outlook for the future of humanity than the

THE FUTUEE VEENACULAK OP MAN. 187

semi-scientific dream of Fourier; more accurately
correspondential than Swedenborg; more exhaust-
ively and minutely a Philosophy of the Sciences than
Spencer ; more beneficently regulative of human ad-
ministration than all the merely experiential govern-
ments, and more truly religious than the church ; in
a word, to be Whole or Integral ; and all this, not as
any miracle, but as the simple and natural result
of recurring for First Principles to Mathematical (the
only certain) Origins, carrying back all possible con-
ceptions to this primitive source, and deriving thence,
by a simple and infallible deduction, the Unitary Laws
which permeate and regulate all the sciences.

WHAT ABE ITS FIRST PKINCIPLES ?

234. These First Principles — after Positive and
Negative Polarity, derived from Unity (distributed into
the positive numbers) and Zero — are UNissi, Dtosm,
and Tbinism, by which is meant, 1. The spirit of the
number One (primitive synthesis or integration, more
properly synstasis) ; 2. The spirit of the number
Two, (analysis, differentiation, variety) ; and, 3. The
spirit of the number Three (ultimate or teleological
synthesis or integration, the true synthesis). All the
primary mathematical notions, as of Number, Form
and Mechanical Action, are found in a similar manner
to furnish the elementary principles and illustrations
of, and so positively to teach All Scientific Laws, Clas-
sification, and Doctrine, throughout the sciences, up
to Sociology, Morals, and Theology. The Ordinal
Series of Numbers furnishes, for example, the typo

188 FIRST PEINCIPIiES.

of Ordinary affairs, and so of Temporalities, related
to Time (Latin tempus) ; and the Cardinal Series, that
of Gardinary, or Transcendental Affairs, and so of
Spiritualities, or the Fixed Axes and Spheral Exten-
sions of the Circumambient Heavens, related to Space.

THE NEW UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE.

235. Mr. Andrews also discovers that all the artic-
ulate sounds of the human voice, vowel and consonant-
sounds, are inherently laden, by Nature herself, with
distinctive and representative meanings, the same, by
an echo of analogy, which are signified by the math-
ematical origins of thought just alluded to ; whence
it follows that words compounded of these Sounds,
so first rightly understood in respect to their natural
Meanings, denote precisely and technically the
Things and Ideas compounded, in a parallel manner,
from their Mathematical Elements; so that nature
hao, herself, as absolutely provided, as she has pro-
vided music, an exhaustless system of the true Techni-
calities of all the sciences. Mr. Andrews is therefore
engaged upon the foundations of a New Scientific Lan-
guage, the future vernacular of the planet, which he
calls Alwato. This new language wiU be derived in
part from the exact scientific bases above indicated,
in which sense it will furnish self-defining words by
the million, and, in part, from the harmonious inter-
blending of the materials of existing languages.

APPENDIX D.

236. This remaining Appendix contains the An-
nouncement of The Basic Outline of Universology,
referred to in the Preface.

OISCtrLAB.^

In Frees, the exceedingly important Scientific and PhilosophicWorh, the title-page
and descHption of which are as follows ; —

THE BASIC OUTLHSTE

UE-IVERSOLOGY;

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE NEWLT-DISCOVERED SCIENCE
OF THE UNIVEESE ; ITS ELEMENT AEY PRINCIPLES ;
AND THE FEIMAKY STAGES OP THEIK DEVEL-
OPMENT IN THE SPECIAL SCIENCES;

TOGETHER WITH PRELIMINARY NOTICES OF

THE NEWLY-DISCOVERED SCIENTIFIC UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE,

RESULTING FEOM THE PEINCIPLES OF UNIVEESOLOGT.

BY

STEPHEN PEARL ANDREWS,

URMBEK OF THE AMRniGAN ACADEMY OP ARTS AND 8CIKNCEB ; OF TDE AllRRIOAN

BTIINOLOGICAL SdOIKTY, ETC.

AUTUOB OP "TUE SOIBNCK OP SOCIETY," "DISCOTKRTEa IN CIIINESB," ETC.

'O flebs iieI yew.aerpet— God perpetually geometrizes. — ^plato.

REVELATION THROUGH SCIENCE ; PHILOSOPHY OF INTBGRALISM;
ADVENT OF THE HARMONY OF IDEAS.

WITH EIOETY ILLUSTBATIVE DIAOBAMS.

NEW YORK :
DION THOMAS, 142 NASSAU STEEBT.

1870.

190 publishek's .ciecular.

STATEMENT BY THE AUTHOR.

237. I am requested by my publisher to give some
condensed account of " The Basic Outline of Univer-
sology." It is difficult to do this, in any small
compass, more explicitly than is done in the title-
page. The work is the result of a life-time of labor
devoted to the exhaustive study of all the great sub-
jects of human thought, and especially of those
which agitate the present age, culminating in specific
discoveries which it is believed will greatly enlarge
the scope of the Sciences and hasten the already
rapid progress of humanity. The work contains no
less than five distinct Introductions from the able
pens of as many learned gentlemen whom the devel-
opment of the new science has gathered around me
for some years past as students, and, to some ex-
tent, as collaborators. A preliminary exposition was
given by me some months since before the Polytech-
nic branch of the American Institute. This ehcited
various notices from the metropolitan press, which
were appreciative and flattering. I prefer, to any-
thing which I might add, to supplement this state-
ment by extracts from these two sources — the several
Introductions to the work, and the notices of the press,
238. The publication of a work definitely establishing
the Unity of the Sciences, if it be really such, must,
from the highest point of view, be regarded as the
most marked event of the age. Humanity takes a neto
departure from the time when tJwre is a Clearly Recognized
Sarmony in all our Intellectual Conceptions.

Decsmber^vm. STEPHEN PeARL AnDEEWS.

FROM THE INTRODUCTIONS

TO THE

BASIC OUTLINE OF UMVERSOLOGY.

1. By Prof. M. A. Clancy :

239. " UniTersology is a Science which — owing to
its peculiar character, the extent of its subject-matter,
the intricacy and complexity of its applications, and
the importance of its influence upon the interests of
Humanity — is beset, in the labor of making it under-
stood and appreciated, with difficulties commensurate
with its vastness. If the discovery of an isolated
fact or principle be not easy of exposition and com-
prehension, the difficulty in the case of Universology
is enhanced by so much as the whole is greater than
a part. The problem is the more severe owing in
part to the fact that the extreme simplicity of the fun-
damental aspect of the discovery is such that it is
exceedingly difficult first to apprehend it, and then
to express it in intelligible language ; and in part to
the novelty of view which the student is called upon
to take of facts and phenomena with which he is al-
ready to a considerable degree familiar .... This
discovery has, therefore, a twofold character. It is
not only a Science vast as the Universe in its scope, hut a
Method of Scientific Procedure capable of application to
every domain of Thought and Being, in the new in-
vestigations which will ever be demanded in exploring
new special departments of Being .... It is proper
to notice here one of the more immediate and im-

192 publishee's oieculab.

portarit results of the application of the Science —
namely, the discoTery of a Scientifically constructed
Universal Language. The necessity for such a lan-
guage, as one of the exigencies of the Science, is
patent, as, without a Universal Language, Universal
Science would be destitute of its proper adequate
Terminology."

2. By Eev. Bdwaed B. Fkeeland :

240. "Looking at Universology from the same point
of view in which this celebrated Naturalist (Agassiz)
regards Classification, we may announce it as the
complete discovery and ferfect interpretation of ' the
Deity in creation,' and the entire unfolding of 'the
creative plan of God,' not only as expressed in ' or-
ganic forms,' but as involved in every Sphere of
Thought and Being in the Universe of Matter and
of Mind."

3. By David Hoxle :

241. " With the Evolution of this Science is inaugu-
rated, if I mistake not, a new era in the history of the
world, and one transcending, in the importance of its
results, any by which it has been preceded. It
possesses potency sufficient, under enlightened direc-
tion, peacefully and beneficently to revolutionize the
world in aU its domains, whether Ideal, Physical,
Social, Moral, Political, or EeHgious ; and the results
of its application, iu the solution of Problems within
these departments of Being, will exceed those here-
tofore attained by blind efforts merely, in proportion
to the power of achievement which methods of

PUBUSHBE'S CIECUTjAH. 193

Scientific Exactitude possess over the incertitude and
failure of perpetual guessing and believing. It is,
in fine, the Sublime Expounder of the Universe of
God ; and the means of the eventual introduction of
the Bace to a Paradisic Existence whose pleasures
win transcend the highest imaginings of so-called
Utopian dreamers."

4. By J. West Nevins.

242. "A Universal Philosophy, and its absolute ap-
plication in a Positive Science, whose demonstrations
shall be beyond the reach of question, must be the
preliminary theoretical step, [to the practical regen-
eration of the race.] The tools must first be fur-
nished with which the work is to be done. Such is
Universology, the Science of the Whole Universe, or
the Positive and Bational Revelation of the Organic
Laws of Thought and Being by means of their Cor-
respondences, or of the Grand Pervading Analogies
between them."

5. By Prof. A. E. BoTLE :

243. " I feel as if the world wants it at just this nick
of time, and that it will, in the end, prove to be just
the book that should have been written, even if it
have, for the first year or two, only a dozen readers
who fully appreciate it."

NOTICES OF THE PRESS.

"A NEW SGIENCB."

244. " On Thursday evening, before the Polytechnic
Branch of the American Institute (Cooper Institute
Building), a lecture, -every way remarkable, was de-

194: publisher's cieoulas.

livered by Stephen Pearl Andrews. It purported to
be 2«poM ilie Unity of the Sciences, but it was, in fact,
the first pubKc announcement and exposition before
the scientific world of the nature of what Mr. An-
drews claims to be a new science, the most important
of the sciences, and a science inclusive of and under-
lying all the other sciences. From time to time,
during the last five or ten years, the public have
been made aware, through partial announcements or
intimations, that Mr. Andrews was devoting himself
to an unusual series of scientific and philosophic in-
vestigations which looked to the discovery of some
recondite ground of unity between all the sciences.
A^ series of articles by him and .by his coadjutor,
Edward B. Freeland, published in The Gontinental
Monthly, three or four years ago, upon branches of
the subject, attracted considerable attention. The
New Science, or that which is claimed to be such, is
denominated Univeesologt. One of the branches
of the discovery is said to be the basis of a new
Scientific Universal Language, which, it is supposed,
will be ultimately the vernacular of the world. The
lecture, or entertainment, of last evening consisted
mainly of readings from the Introduction to the
Fundamental Exposition of the New Science, which,
we understand, is now in type, and will be forthcom-
ing at an early day, as a bulky volume fiUed with
diagrams and demonstrations. The introduction is
in turn made up of a series of papers or special in-
troductions by five or six other writers than Mr.
Andrews, who have studied, and more or less thor-

publishbe's ciecuiab. 195

oaghly mastered tlie new science, and who belong, it
is said, to an incipient University which the new
scientific discovery has already been the means of
organizing. The claim is certainly sufficiently ex-
traordinary to excite general attention, and the wri-
ters in question, it must be confessed, give the im-
pression of being men who understand themselves
and their subject ; but a mere introductory statement
is necessa,rily general, and for that reason, in a sense,
vague. The exact nature and scientific vaKdity of
this supposed discovery of imiversal scientific prin-
ciples could only be judged of after the most thor-
ough opportunity should have been granted to make
the exhibit, and it is to be hoped that the American
Institute which has been established to render pre-
cisely this kind of service to the community, will not
fail to get to the bottom of this extraordinary claim."
—From the JSf. Y. Tribune (April 3, 1868).

245. " A paper was then read by Mr. Stephen Pearl
Andrews, upon a new science, under the name of
Univebsologt, which had received his attention, with
that of others, for the past five years. The gentle-
man first spoke of the embarrassment he felt regard-
ing the proper method of presenting his subject, as a
generalization would perhaps only expose him to the
charge of entertaining speculative opinions ; while,
on the other hand, he could not be expected to give
an exposition of the science in the space of one
evening, as the claims of Universology were of un-
paralleled extent and importance. He stated that

196 poblisheb's cibctilae.

there was a work upon the subject in type, which
would comprise some 900 pages, explanatory of the
science ; he should therefore simply rely for first im-
pressions upon statements contributed to this book
by those who have had opportunity to know of the
nature of the science, in preference to his own affir-
mation of its value. The immensity of the field, the
necessity for lucidity, and the novel character of the
scope of investigation, together with many other
things, made the problem of presentation one of ex-
treme difficulty. The speaker then remarked that it
is obvious, on reflection, that there must be a science
of the universe as such, distinguished from the spe-
cial sciences of the parts, or of the spheres, or do-
mains of the universe ; and yet the very idea is one
which is hardly entertained with any clearness of
conception in the scientific world.

246. "All Philosophy has, indeed, aimed, in a sense,
at this result, but the methods of Speculative Philos-
ophy are too vague to satisfy the demands of the
Scientific World, and in the sense of a Science prop-
erly so called the idea of anything Universal has been
almost entirely wanting. The Scientific men are
Specialists. Their labors are as if a colony of learned
ants were to have undertaken the investigation of
the Human Body. One section of the little Com-
munity devotes itself to the exhaustive examination
of a finger nail, another to that of a lobe of the ear,
another to that of the hair of the beard, and others
to the investigation of all the various parts and or-
gans and systems segregated aiid regarded singly ; but

PUBLISHEES CIECULAK. 197

they have been so busy in these special and minute
examinations, that it has never occurred to any one
of them to guess even, or, in any event, to give due
consideration to the fact, that all of these various
subjects are the parts and constituents of a Mmi ;
aad that, therefore, the first thing to know, logically
speaking, in order to know anything rightly, of these
particular subjects, is the General Design and the
Exact Outlay of the Man himself." (B. 0. Introduc-
tion.) — From the Mining Journal

Univeesology, Alwato.
247. " Last evening, before the Polytechnic branch
of the American Institute, Stephen Pearl Andrews oc-
cupied the evening in making an extended prehmi-
nary statement of what is claimed to be a new sci-*
ence, which he denominates Universology, and one
of the results of which is to be a new scientific
universal language, to be called Alwato. Sufficient
enthusiasm was excited to draw from the learned
body, contrary, we believe, to their usage, a vote of
thanks in behalf of Mr. Andrews for the able papers
read by him. This was not, we understand, to be
considered as an approval of the- extraordinary
claims of that gentleman, but as a recognition of the
able manner in which he had stated the claims and
made his introductory exposition. "We have several
years since called attention to the fact that Mr.
Andrews was engaged upon inquiries of this sort.
With the appearance of this book, now going through

198 publishee's circulae.

the press, the public will have the opportunity to
judge of their value.

248. " The term Universology is liable to objection
among the learned, on the ground of its hybridity,
but no more so than sociology, which has now be-
come current. The objection has, we understand,
been well considered by Mr. Andrews, and he prefers
to incur it rather than to adopt a more classical but
less popularly intelligible name. The name bestowed
on the new language, wrought out from the language
itself by its own laws, is Alwato, pronounced Ald-
ivali-to. - The public will await with interest the
further development of these important statements
and claims." — From tlie Evening Post.

249. " New Yoek Polttechoto. — Last evening the
usual routine of proceedings at the weekly meetings of
this useful institution were varied by the introduction
of a subject, which may prove to be something of
real importance. Stephen Pearl Andrews made be-
fore this body the first formal announcement of the
discovery of a new science. He read, from the in-
troduction to a forthcoming work, an elaborate state-
ment of the domain and nature of the science in
question; and notwithstanding the novelty and
strangeness of the claim he presents, it would hardly
be possible that a deeper impression should have
been made by the exposition of a single evening. It
is true, the principles of the science itself were not
reached ; but a very clear case was made out to the

rUBUSEEE'S CIECULAB. 199

extent that there is room in the nature of things for
precisely such a science as it is claimed is now dis-
covered, and that there ought to be, if there is not,
precisely such a discovery. The new science, so
claimed to be, is denominated ' Uuiversology,' and is
said to have the same relation to the universe, as a
whole, as that which any special science now holds,
or has held, to its own special domain. The lecturer
goes so far as to propose the introduction of a scien-
tifically constructed universal language with a uni-
versal alphabet." — From the Sun.

250. "A New Science. — ^A lecture was delivered last
evening before the members of the American Insti-
tute, by Stephen Peael Andrews, on " The Unity of
the Sciences." The speaker claimed to have dis-
covered an entirely new science, as exact and pro-
found as logic or mathematics, and even more far-
reaching and inclusive than either of them, or than
any other science. He endeavored to show that
there is, in fact, only one science, of the principles
of which aU the special sciences are merely particular
modifications or instances. Mr. Ajtoeews affirms that
heretofore there has not been a single universal prin-
ciple known in positive science, and that conse-
quently science is yet in the chaotic or fragmentary
stage of its development. The new science is to
supply this defect, and to base all the known sci-
ences, and, indeed, all possible sciences, upon an
a 'priori knowledge of exact scientific laws of uni-

200 pttblishek's ciecxjlar.

versal application, whether in the department of
matter or that of mind. Upon this new science he
bestows the name of ' Universology,' or the Science
of the Universe. As a branch of it he also an-
nounces the discovery, and, to a great extent, the
elaboration, of a new scientific universal language.
Mr. Andrews' audience appeared to be deeply inter-
ested in his theories." — From iJic N. Y. Times.

SUBSCRIPTION SHEET

FOB

THE BASIC OUTLINE OF UNIVERSOLOGY.

AEEAN6EMENT OF THE WOEK.

I. The Text ; II. The Commentary ; HI. The An-
notation. The text is the basis of the other two.
The Commentary consists of such additional original
matter as has been prepared in direct connection
with the text, for its greater elucidation or on minor
particulars. The Annotation includes extracts from
other authors, and from Mr. Andrews' previous
manuscripts, upon points related in some measure to
the subject treated of in the Text or the Commen-
tary, ly. A Yocabulary or Glossary is prefixed, con-
taining definitions of all philosophic and other un-
usual terms. V. A digested Index to the entire
work, of nearly 100 pages. The whole will be com-
prised in 900 pp. 8vo, containing eighty illustrative
diagrams.

The author says in conclusion :

PTIBUSHER'S CmCTILAE. 201

" I Jiave thus laboriously brouglit to a conclusion that Prelimi-
nary Treatment of Universal Doctrine upon which I have thought
it fitting to bestow the name of ' Basic Outline of Unlversology.'

. . . Whether this Treatise shall meet at once with the wel-
come reception and grateful appreciation of many minds — the an-
ticipation of which has served to brighten my solitary path in the
deep recesses of abstract contemplation for thirty years — the event
alone can determine The Signs of the Times may in-
dicate, and Science may confidently predict ; but the prevision of
Science, in this behalf, is not yet perfectly secured from the possi-
bility of error. The Principles of Univeraology are held to be in-
fallible ; but no personal infallibility is claimed for its exponent "
— [An extract from the work.]

All names received in season will, unless ordered
to the contrary, be placed in the printed list, now
being prepared, of the first patrons of the work.

There will be a limited edition of the work pub-
lished on Large Paper, 4to, bound in cloth, (to sub-
scribers only), at $15 per copy ; to non-subscribers,
if there should be any copies of it left over, the price
win be raised to Twenty DoUars per copy. The re-
gular edition, 8vo, bound in clothy will be furnished
at $7.50 per copy, payable on delivery of the work.

Subscribers will please send their names at their
earliest convenience to DION THOMAS, Publisher,
142 Nassau St., New York.

Please signify which edition, and the number of
copies you desire.

INDEX.

A.

Abbkeviations, p. X.

Absoldte, The, (Suts.), The Aunio, 1. 126, p. 94. ; (Adj.), Form = Figure,

t. 193, p. 161 ; Number, t. 216, p. 176. Speech, do. ; of. 1. 180, p. 148.
Aestbaot, The, in connection with Sounds, 1. 101, p. 65 ; 1. 113, p. 78 ;

The, — Spencer, t. 13S, p. 102 ; named, do. ; formally treated, t. 161-180,

pp. 136-148 ; defined, 1. 163, p. 137 ; inclusion of, t. 164r-170, pp. 138-

143 ; 1. 169, p. 141 ; consists of Pure Nothings, 1. 170, 171, pp. 143, 144;

Alwani, Shaupio, t. 176, p. 146 ; divides into Abstract and Concrete

(-old), do. ; 1. 184, p. 156.
Absteaot-Conobetb — Spencer, 1. 139, p. 102 ; naminga for, do., and Note.,

1. 161, p. 137.
Abstbaotioit(s), Pure Nothings, 1. 164, p. 138, and to end of chapter ; t.

168, p. 141 ; Mysteries of, 1. 169, do. ; or Pure MtUngs, 1. 164, p. 138 ;

yet Most Positive, do. ; 1. 170, p. 142.
Absteaotismcs, limits of, t. 164, p. 138 ; Shaupio, t. 176, p. 146 ; fitness of

the Thin Consonants to express, 1. 178, p. 147 ; see Abstract.
Aestbaot Soienoes, only two — Spencer; — a third, t. 168, p. 141.
Academy, French, see Agaesiz.
Accent, and other marks, 1. 152-156, pp. 119-123.
Acumen, see Ken.

Agassiz, on Universology, Tfote, 1. 12, p. 7.

Aggeeqation, of Points, repeats do. of Units or Things, t. 167, p. 140.
Alphabet(s), kinds of, t. 64, p. 41 ; Imperfect Phonetic, t. 66, p. 42 ; Perfect

do., to be ; t. 66, do. ; the Sanscrit, Ifote, t. 65, p. 42 ; a fountain of lingual

development, t. 67, p. 43 ; t. 69, p. 44 ; a Univeksal, how to be founded,

t. 79, p. 49 ; Elements of, extend thi'oughont Language, t. 80, p. 50 ; t.

81, do. The Skeleton UNrvEESiL (Alphabet), t. 93, p. 59 ; t. 95, p. 61 ;

t. 96, p. 62 ; in Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60 ; number of Letters in, t. 95, p. 61 ;

1. 108, p. 68 ; English Adapted, do. ; Pitman's Phonographic, Table No. 2,

1. 106, p. 67 ; Uie Intemaiional, 1. 109, p. 68 ; names of Classes of Sounds ~

of. Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60; Table No. 2, t. 107, p. 67 ; 1. 113, p. 77;

Universal, Ethnical, Eomanized, 1. 156, p. 123.

204 INDEX.

" AiPHABETios," Science of, Alexander Melville Bell, t. 79, p. 49 ; t. 87, p. 55.

Alski, as Artology, t 210, p. 173 ; derivation and distribution of, t. 211,
o.. Table No. 9, do., p. 174.

Altab, see Fire-place.

Alwato, (abl-wa-to), The New Soientifio Universal Lanouaoe, t. 78,
p. 48 ; how founded, t. 79, p. 49 ; composed of two kinds of words, 1.
Those which are sclf-deflning, and 2. Those not so, t. 150, p. 109 ; how-
will affect Old Style Langnages, do. ; will serve to effect the Geaito Eb-
ooNoiLiATioH of all the Philosophies, 1. 159, p. 128 ; first use of, to sup-
ply tedinicalities, 1. 187, p. 158 ; 1. 192, p. 160 ; the element of precision
in, illustrated, 1. 195, p. 162 ; a Discovery, not an invention, 1. 197, p.
164 ; Syntax (Conjugation of the Verb) of, t. 200-203 (Table No. 7), pp.
166-169 ; Pronouns of. Table No. 8, t. 204, p. 169 ; As the ScrEnnrio

OpENINQ Off THE SlUlOEWATS TOE THE FkAOTIOAI. CoALESOENOE Off ALL

ExisTDfo Lahouageb, 1. 150, p. 109 ; t. 203, p. 167 ; naturalization of
words in, t. 203, p. 168 ; t. 235, p. 188; t. 239, p. 191 ; t. 244, p. 194; t.
248, p. 198 ; t. 249, p. 199 ; see Elements, and Sounds.

Alwatoni WoBD-BuiLDiifo, sce Word-building.

Ambigu's, see Sounds.

Amebic A, description of, used for illustration, t. 41, p. 29.

Amp£be, cited, t. 26, p. 21 .

AwALOoTiES, defined and illustrated, t. 177, p. 147.

Analogy, first Vague, Unscientific ; trnscientifio use of, t. 9, p. 4 ; Chem-
ical illustration of, do. ; Underlying Principles of the True Scientific, t.
11 p. 5, 6 ; t. 62, p. 39 ; between Elementary and Elaborate Domains, of
Speech, etc., t. 83, p. 53 ; hetween the Elements of Arithmetic and of Geom-
etry, 1. 168, p. 140 ; 1. 169, p. 141 ; between Points and Principles j Lines
and Laws, 1. 168, 169, p. 141 ; between the Out, keenness, or acumen of the
Intellect and the Cut of the Line, 1. 170, p. 142 ; Vmversal, defined and
illustrated, 1. 170 ; Infinite Echo of, among Elements, 1. 199, p. 165 ; see
Universal Analogy, and Correspondence.

Analysis, of Speech, t. 64, p. 41 ; the more rigorous " Phonetic," t. 69, p.
44; equivalent to do. of Universe, t. 71, p. 45.

" Analysis," see Spelling by Sound.

Angdlabity, named, Alwali, t. 196, 198, pp. 162-165.

Ahimal Kingdom, the, a Minor Universe, t. 62, p. 39 ; named, 1. 110, p. 103

^"SKi, Magic, t. 158, p. 127.

AKTHBOPomuiE, man-shaped Little Figure, t. 54, p. 36.

Ants, learned, illustrate Specialists, t. 246, p. 196.

AonsKi, Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97.

Appeabanoes, World of, Sciento-Negative, 1. 164, p. 138.

Appendix A, p. 180 ; B, p. 181; C, p. 184; D, p. 188.

INDEX. 205

Abithiietio, and Algebra, the Abstract branch of Mathematiea, t. 170, p.
143.

Aeski, ArtoBki, Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211, 212, 213, p. 174.

Art, there is a Grand Domain of, in Uniyerse, t. 44, p. 31 ; oorresponds
to JHniem, t. 47, p. 32; defined; meaning of the term enlarged, t.
49, 50, do.; Upper End of Column or Line, and Punchim Vita (in
plant or man). Analogues of, t. 54, p. 35 ; androgyne, t. 56, p. 37 ; further
defined, t. 59, p. 38 ; see Nature-Soience-aud-Art, and Fine Arts.

Aktioui.atios', {lAttU-jointmg), 1. 121, p. 90 ; 1. 122, p. 91 ; 1. 124, p. 92.

Abtismus, defined (see Vocabulary), t. 45, p. 31 ; there is one, of every
Sphere of Being, t. 62, p. 391.

Abtistio MoDirioATiON, cited, t. 59, p. 38.

Aetoloqy, defined, t. 59, p. 37 ; of Language, t. 74, p. 47 ; t. 77, p. 48 ; t.
131, p. 97 (Table N0..5) ; Uski, t. 157, p. 126 ; named and tabulated.
Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-218, p. 174 ; cf. Naturology, and Scientology.

Aeto-philcbopht, Table 5, 1. 131, p. 97.

AsKi, t. 207, p. 172.

Aspirates, Sanscrit, 1. 156, p. 123.

Ac, diphthong, representative of all the vowels, t. 92, p. 58 ; a stem for
consonants in Bundle-Eoot-Words, 1. 127, p. 94.

Aii,io, The Infinite, 1. 126, 127, p. 94; Subdivisions of into Scale, Table No.
4, t. 130, p. 96 ; re-statements of, 1. 131, 132, do. ; 1. 157, p. 126 ; distri-
buted, 1. 181, p. 149 ; 1. 182, p. 155 ; 1. 184, p. 156 ; Adjective do. in -so,
1. 185, do. ; substantive do. in -to, do., p. 157.

Annio, t. 127, p. 94; 1. 160, p. 129 ; t. 181, p. 149 ; t. 183, p. 155.

AunsKt, Tramcendental Philosophy, 1. 126, p. 94 ; 1. 157, pp. 125, 127-128,
et passim ; see InsM.

AnsKi, Philosophy, t. 126, p. 94; Table No. 6, t. 132, p. 98; t. 157, pp.
125, 126 ; as Naturology, t. 210, p. 173. ; et passim.

AsiAL Lutes, 1. 191, p. 159 ; t. 194, p. 162 ; see Bi-trinacria, or Ekwal-a-
krinsta.

B.

Baoon, cited, t. 26, p. 21. '

B-iLZAo, cited. Table No. 9, t. 211, p. 174.
Barbabisms, defined, t. 25, p. 21.

" Basic Outline of Universology," the larger work to which this is an In-
troduction, alluded to, Preface, pp. iii, iv, v ; el passim.
Basis, see Foundation ; of Inverted Procedure above, t. 54, p. 35.
" BEOoMura," The, equal to Art, t. 69, p. 88.
Pell, Alexander Melville, cited, t. 79, p. 49.
Ri-LATEEAL Eooo^woEDS, 1. 146, 147, p. 106 ; see Working JClements.

206 INDEX.

Bi-TBnrAORiA, defined, t. 188, p. 159 ; named Alwali, 1. 193, p. 160.
"BI.AMKS," "Spaces," 1. 123, p. 92, see Silences.
Blood, Benjamin, cited, t. 227, p. 283.
BoDT, see Human Body.
BcEHUE, Jacob, cited, t. 158, p. 128.
BuoHANAif, Dr. Joseph B., cited, 1. 190, p. 159.

BuNDLE-Koor-WoEDS, meanings and list of, t. 157, pp. 12i-135 ; see, also,
1. 181, pp. 149-157 ; see Boot-words.

c.

Cabd, a, on Universology, signed by Parke Godwin, and others. Preface,
p.v.

Cabddjai., Cardmated, Cardinism, t. 6, p. 3.

Cabddtast, meaning of, 1. 158, p. 127 ; t. 160, p. 129.

Cabdikation, see Hinging.

Cabdo, Latin for a hinge, t. 6, p. 3.

Cabeeb, every, has a Beginning, Middle, and End, t. 54, p. 34.

Gabeebs, Liqnidoid and Protenaive, 1. 143, p. 105.

GATEOoBiBa, of the Understanding, and of Being, distributed, t. 71, p. 45.

Qatisei, Logic — Spencer, t, 139, p. 102, and Note.

Cavities, see Interstices.

Genteb, = t, etc., 1. 160, p. ISO.

Centeum, of Speech, The Alphabet such, t. 87, p. 56.

Cebebbals, Sanscritio, t. 156, p. 123.

Chaos, Primitive, Analogue of Inarticulate Sounds, t. 125, p. 93.

Ghemioai, Elements, illustrations by, t. 9, p. 4 ; t. 12, p. 9 ; v/pmard, and
downward, tending, 1. 13, p. 10 ; and Edifice, and Lightning, 1. 14, p. 11 ;
1. 15, 16, pp. 11, 12; 1. 17, p. 14: t. 217, p. 177.

CheuioIl Temple, 1. 13, p. 10 ; see Dome, Temple.

Ghemistbt, (MasaBki>, Special, ;auski, 1. 139, p. 102 ; and Cosmical Mor-
phology, 1. 190, p. 159 ; Synstasis in, etc., t. 217, p. 177.

" Cheoniole, WASHiNQTOir," Extract from. Preface, p. vi.

Classes, of Sounds, new names of. Solids, etc., 1. 113, p. 77.

Classifioation, in the Natural Sciences inexact, 1. 12, p. 10 ; of the Sci-
ences variously attempted, t. 26, p. 21 ; really a Universology, t. 27, p.
22 ; but not complete, do. ; Scientific Universal, t. 62, p. 89 ; of Lan-
guage and the Universe, 1. 121, p. 90, and to end of chapter ; the Exaot.
1. 174, p. 145 ; a true, possible, 1. 177, p. 147 ; see Sounds.

Class-Naminqs, of Sounds, see Glasses.

Clijokb, Zulu, 1. 156, p. 123.

Ooalesoents, see Sounds, (Ambigu's.)

Coexistences, 1. 185, p. 157.

INDEX. 207

Colon, Alwaao uses of, 1. 155, p. 122.

Colors, gamut of; 3, 7, 12 ; referred to, t. 26, p. 21.

ComiA, Alwaso uses of, t. 155, p. 122.

CoMPAKOLoaT, defined, t. 69, p. H ; Table No. 5, t. 132, p. 98.

Composition, of the Vocal Elements into Words ; see Word-building ; of
Words themselves, 1. 155, p. 122.

CoMTE, Auguste, t. 26, p. 21 ; Eohosophio Generalogist, 1. 138, p. 101 ; t.
159, p. 128; t. 185, p. 157.

CoH-OEETB, The, in Connection with Sounds, 1. 101-103, p. 65 ; 1. 113, p.
78 ; The, — Spencer, t. 139, p. 102 ; named, do. ; formally treated, 1. 161-
180, pp. 136-148 ; defined, t. 163, p. 137 ; inclusion of, t. 164, p. 138,
only imperfectly scientific, (t. 12, p. 10), 1. 171, p. 143 ; The, Zhaubio, 1. 176,
p. 146 ; divides into Abstract and Conoret(-oid), 1. 176, do. ; 1. 184, p. 156.

CoNOEETiSMUS, limits of, 1. 164, p. 138 ; zhaubio, 1. 176, p. 146 ; the, fitness
of the heavy Consonants to represent, 1. 178, p. 148 ; see Concrete.

CoHDmoNBD, The, see The Unconditioned.

Confection, in Cookery, 1. 149, p. 108.

CoNiuQATioN, of the Alwaso verb. Table No. 7, t. 203, p. 168 ; t. 204, p. 169.

Consonants, represented by ng, k, v, 1, t. 127, p. 94; the Heterogenizing
Element of Language, t. 142, p. 104 ; as Scientology, t. 210, p. 173.

Consonant-Sounds, see Consonants and Elements.

CoNSTEUOTioNS, liuman, how to be guided, 1. 191, p. 160.

Cook, Confection of Proximate Elements by, t. 149, p. 108.

Copulation, between Ground and Heaven, t. 55, p. 36 ; denoted by iu, t.
109, p. 70, et passim.

Cokkbspohdenoe(s), between the Constitution of Language and that of
the Material Universe, 1. 121, p. 90, and to the end of the chapter ; be-
tween Mathematical and Lingual Elements, t. 160, pp. 129, 130 ; doc-
trine of, embraces Logic, t. 168, p. 141 ; doctrine of, defined and illus-
trated, 1. 177, p. 147 ; see Analogy, and Universal Analogy.

CosMioAL MoBPHOLOOT — Bi-triuaoria, etc., 1. 188-195, pp. 158-162.

Cosmos (or Kosmos), distributed into Grand Sciences, 1. 139, p. 102 ; into
Grand Spheres, 1. 145, p. 105.

Ceisis-event, The, of Human Development, 1. 199, p. 165.

Ctibio Dimensions, of the New Jerusalem, t. 197, p. 164.

Cdbio Lines, of Dimension, see Bi-trinacria.

Cut, = k, etc., 1. 160, p. 130.

D.

D'AxEMBEBT, cited, t. 26, p. '21.

Deductive Method, improperly so called, t. 9, p. 4 ; see Method.

Definitions, see Logic.

208 DTOEX.

DsrixmssTB, of Language (Alwato), two, self-defining, and not so, 1. 150,
p. 109 ; The Elementary and The Elahorate compared, t. 83, p. 53 ; see
Domains.

DiAOBrrioAi. Mabks, nasalization, t. 97, p. 62 ; accent, nasalization, long
and short marks, etc., 1. 152-156, pp. 119-123.

DiAQBAUMATio Eepeesentation, of word-meaDJngs, 1. 198, p. 165.

Dialects, of Alwato ; t. 77, p. 48.

DiEEOT, and Inverse Order, of Bomids, 1. 157, p. 124.

DiBEOT AOT) Immediate Conseqcenoe, Ban,io, 1. 185, p. 157.

DmEOTiON, see Drift.

Djsooteet, distinguished from Invention, 1. 197, p. 164.

DisTKiBCTioif, see Classification.

DoHEEnr, Hugh, Epicosmology, 1. 145, p. 105.

Dome, of Earth and Heaven, 1. 13, p. 10 ; 1. 14, 15, p. 11 ; 1. 16, p. 12 ; t.
17, p. 13; t. 180, p.' 148; 1. 190, p. 159.

DouAiKs, of Being or Existence, what is meant by, t. 25, p. 19 ; larger or
smaller, t. 24, do. ; are of all sorts, t. 25, p. 20 ; named by -io, 1. 126, p.
93 ; distribution of, in -io, 1. 181-183, pp. 149-157 ; Elements in different,
identified, — Number, Form, Language, — ^t. 216, 317, pp. 176, 177.

DoOB-WAY, Analogue of Functum Vitw, t. 54, p. 36.

Deift, or Direction, the First, t. 53, p. 34 ; First, Second, and Third, t. 54,
p. 35.

DxnsM, introduced, and naming of, t. 2, p. 1 ; various (ordinary) namings
of, t. 5, p. 2 ; bifweates, do. ; alliance of, with Plurality, do. ; referred
to, t. 8, p. 4 ; t. 46, p. 31 ; echoes to Science, t. 47, do. ; the Second Uni-
versal PrmeipU, related to the Number 7ho, t. 214, p. 175 ; various (Al-
waso) namings of, do.

DuisMiis, how same as Heterogenismns, t. 214, p. 175.

" Dykauio "— Comte (motio), 1. 185, p. 157.

E.

Eae, abused by the Eye, t..l06, p. 67.

Echo, see Correspondence.

Edoe, vanishing, of Cutting Instrument, t. 170, p. 142.

Edifioe, to illustrate Universal Distribution, t. 54, p. 35 ; see Dome.

Eddoation, to be reconstituted by Universology, Preface, p. vii. ; Unity of

System in, do. ; t. 218, p. 178.
Ekwai-akrikbta, 1. 195, p. 162.
Elaboeismts, the, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 83-87, pp. 53-55 ; t. 87, p. 55 ;

1. 130, 131, pp. 96-97 (Tables Nos. 4 and 5) ; 1. 183, 184, pp. 155, 156 ; t.

207, p. 172 ; of Speech, t. 214, p. 175.
Elaboeoloot, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97.

INDEX. 209

EiEOTEO-NEQATrTE, 1. 14, p. 11 J Bee Dome,

Eleoteo-Positivb, 1. 14, p. 11 ; see Dome.

EiEMENTABY SouHDa, See Elements, and Sounds.

Elbmentissids, the, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 83-S7, pp. 53-55 ; t. 87, p. 55 ;
1. 130, 131, pp. 96, 97 (Tables Nos. 4 and 5) ; t. 183, 184, pp. 155, 156 ; t.
207, p. 172 ; of Speech, t. 214, p. 175 ; the Ambigu's are at centre of,
do. ; of various Domains, t. 216, p. 176.

Elementoiooy, defined, t. 82, p. 52 ; Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97.

Elements, 24 Chemical, supposed, t. 9, p. 4 ; 1. 12, p. 9. ; true number of,
uncertain do. ; Phonetic, t. 64, p. 41 ; equal to do. of Universe, t. 71,.p. 45 ;
of Sound charged with Meaning, t. 72, 73, pp. 45, 46 ; t. 80, p. 50 ; gov-
ern Elaborations, t. 83, p. 53 ; Sounds distinguished from Signs, t. 88,
89, p. 56 ; contradictory usage of signs of, in different languages, t. 90, p.
57 ; Vowel, and Consonant, defined, t. 91, p. 57 ; Vowel, few, t. 92, p. 58 ;
how pronounced, do. ; t. 94, p. 59 ; Exceptional Sounds, t. 95, 96, p. 61 ;
t. 97, p. 63 ; t. 99, 100, p. 64 ; intimate, and WarUng, t. 146, p. 106 ;
Mathematical and Luigual, Analogy of, t. 160, p. 130 ; Primary, oi
Form abstract, 1. 166, p. 139 ; of different Domains, identical, t.l98, 199,
p. 165 ; t. 216, p. 176 ; see Alphabet, and Sounds.

Ellis, Alexander J., cited, t. 79, p. 49.

Elsbebq, namings of Classes of Sounds, 1. 116, p. 79; 1. 179, p. 148.

Ehdo-lexio Punotuation, 1. 155, p. 123.

Endo-Nattebology, Naski, t. 207, p. 172.

EuGKAuvLio, defined, 1. 127, p. 94; distribated, 1. 184, p. 156.

Enokauvlski, as Scientology, t. 210, p. 173.

EnsKi, Transcendental Dialectics — Hegel, 1. 158, p. 127, et passim.

Entibohmbnt, Aumio — Comte, Spencer, 1. 185, p. 157.

Epioosmoloqt, Hugh Doherty, 1. 145, p. 105.

Eqcalaeeinsta, see Ekwal-akrinsta.

Etheb, type of Homogenism, 1. 136, 137, p. 100.

Ethebeaxogy, Table No. 3, 1. 130, p. 96.

Ethics, and Morphology, 1. 190, p. 159 ; Elements of, t. 217, p. 177.

Etymology, Comparative, t. 70, p. 44.

Eves, and Odd, 1. 160, p. 129.

EvoLTJTioir, is Art, (in Nature), t. 50, p. 33 ; has Three Stages, t. 54, p. 34 ;
threefold, t. 55, p. 36.

ExAOTiTDDE, sec Preoision.

Exo-Natdeologt, Maski, t. 208, p. 172.

F.

Fasoioul iTED, see Bundle-Eoot-Words.
Feminism, of Nature, t. 56, p. 36.

210 INDEX.

Febrima, see Form.

Fetiohism, t. 217, p. 178.

FioHTE, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3 ; a Transcendental Ontologist, 1. 158, p. 12V.

FiQUBE, is Absolute, Position Eelative Form, 1. 193, p. 161.

FioDBE-ASfD-PosTDiiB, a Special, named, 1. 193, p. 160.

Fine Abts, see Hwaunslci.

Finite, The, 1. 127, p. 94 ; a Species of The Unlimited, t. 128, p. 95.

FiBE-piAOE, the Punetum VitcE of the Edifice, t. 54, p. 36.

Foous, see Fire-plaoe.

Fork,, the, used for illustration, t. 5, 6, p. 2.

FoBM, defined, (Forma, Ferrima), t. 52, p. 33 ; t. 54, p. 35 ; the Hetero-

genizing Element consonantal, 1. 142, p. 104 ; what it consists of, t. 166,

p. 139; t..217, p. 177.
FoEMA, (Ferrima), see Form.
Foundations, Electro-Positive, Earthy, 1. 15, p. 12 ; Analogue of Nature,

t. 53, p. 34 ; Spiritual, are above, t. 54, p. 35 ; Analogue of Root, do. ; t.

55, p. 36 ; of Languages, t. 87, p. 56.
FotmiEB, Transcendental Practical-Philosopher, t. 158, p. 128.
Feaotional, and Integral, 1. 160, p. 129.
Fbenoh AoASEm-, see Agassiz.

Gr.
GEHEBALisuns, referred to, 1. 137, p. 100 ; mlau,io, within the Limitary, t.

138, p. 101 ; 1. 143, p. 105 ; 1. 184, p. 156.
GEHEBALOaT, 1. 138, p. 101.

Generative Principle, science, Masculine, t. 56, p. 36.
Geospheee, 1. 145, p. 105.

German, and Italian Languages characterized, t. 85, p. 54 ; t. 86, p. 55.
GEBMnriL Point, Analogue of Art, t. 54, p. 35.
" Glides," 1. 156, p. 123.
GoD-PBiNoiPLE, see Logos.
God's Will, the Supreme Law, scientifically discovered in Universology,

Preface, p. vii.
GovEBNMENT, The Universal, see Universal Government.
" Gbace," meaning of, t. 217, p. 178.

Grammar, distributed, t. 64, p. 41 ; of Alwato ; see Conjugation.
Geand Eeoonoiliation, The, through Alwato, ot Philosophies, 1. 159, p.

128.
Ground, common, between Subject and Object — Schelling, 1. 158, p. 127.
GuTTUBALizATioNs, Semitic, t. 156, p. 123.

H.

Hamilton, Sir Wm., on The Unconditioned, 1. 128, p. 95.

INDEX. 211

HabmoniOloqt, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97.

Head, of Column, the Basis of Inverted Procedure, t. 64, p. 35.

Heoei., alluded to, t. 7, p. 3 ; Tranaoendeutal Dialeotioian,'t. 158, p. 127.

Helmholtz, cited, t. 223, p. 181.

Hekmetio, t. 158, p. 127.

Heteeogeitismiis, and Homogenismus, t. 138, p. 98, and to end of chap-
ter; how same as Buismus, t. 214, p. 175.

Huranfo, 1. 122, p. 91.

Hmonfoa, 1. 160, p. 130, see Elements, and Bundle-Eoot-Words.

HoMOGBSTEiTT, represented by Vowel-Sounds, t. Ill, p. 76.

HoMOGBNisMi, of Cosmos, Spheres, t. 145, p. 105.

HoMooENisMns, and Heterogenismus, 1. 133, p. 98, and to end of chapter ;
when Universal = The Infinite, t. 138, p. 101 ; how same as Uhismvs,
t. 214, p. 175.

Hpmatt Bodt, analogy of, with Edifice, t. 14, p. 11 ; the, a Minor Uhi-
■nerse, t. 62, p. 39 ; a Modelic Sphere, t. 63, p. 40.-

Human Mini), the, a Minor Universe, t. 62, p. 39.

HwAumo, The Spirit-World, Theandrismns, 1. 129, p. 95.

HwAunsKi, The Science of the Fine Arts, t. 210, p. 173.

Htbbiditt, lingual, t. 25, p. 20 ; justified, t. 220, p. 180 ; t. 248, p. 198.

Htphen, Alwaso uses of, 1. 155, p. 122.

I.
-Ia, termination, t. 205, p. 171.
lATJ, 1. 157, p. 124.
lAir,io, 1. 183, p. 155.
loTns, on stopped vowels, 1. 154, p. 121.
Ideas, all possible, may be classified, t. 177, p. 147.
Identitt of Law, t. 60, p. 39 ; Inherency of do., t. 62, do.
Ideology, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 96,
Iesei, Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97.
Inaetioolate Sounds, correspondence of, 1. 125, p. 93.
Inclination, in Morals, t. 217, p. 178.
Inoonoeivabilitt of the Opposite, t. 174, p. 145.
Index, pp. 203-224.

Individuality, Divergent and Convergent, t. 217, p. 177.
Inexpugnaeility op Pkime Elements, t. 84, 85, p. 54.
Ineeenologt, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97.
Inplnitb, The, see Eeality ; Species of The Unlimited, 1. 128, p. 95 ; t. 120,

p. 93 ; 1. 127, p. 94; = Homogenism, 1. 138, p. 101.
"Isfisitles, Special, 1. 138, p. 101.
Inhebenoy, Aunio, 1. 185, p. 157.

212 . INDEX.

Ikhsbbitt MsANiNas of Sonnds, see Sounds.

Inherent Nboebsitz, t. 60, p. 39 ; 1. 180, p. 148.

lNiTiAi.a, use of, t 222, p. 181.

iNQRaAirisucB, 1. 137, p. 101 ; 1. 185, p. 157.

InsKi, Transcendental Oiitology — Fiohte, 1. 158, p. 127, (etc.)

Instinotuai. liANanA-OE, see Old Style Languages.

Intbqbal, and Fractional, 1. 160, p. 130.

Inteobaiism, Final and AU-sided Philosopliy, t. 213, p. 178 ; t. 231, p. 185

Inteixiqenob, Pure Transcendental — ^Fichte, 1. 158, p. 127.

Intebspaoes, of Silence ; see Sileaoea = Negation, t. 143, p. 104.

Intbbstioes, = Negation, 1. 143, p. 104.

Inveesb akd Dieeot Okdee, of Sounds, 1. 157, p. 124.

-lo, as termination, distributed, 1. 181, 182, pp. 149-155 ; t. 205, p. 171.

-Isicus, as termination, defined. Vocabulary ; t. 45, p. 31.

Italian, and German Languages characterized, t. 85, p. 54 ; t. 86, p. 55.

Italics, etc., free use of, t. 221, p. 180.

J.

Jddoment, see Nim-inclinwm.

K.

Kant, General Transcendentalist, 1. 158, p. 128 ; cited, 1. 185, p. 156.

KauVjIO, the Speoialismus, 1. 139, p. 102.

Ken", or keenness of mind, 1. 170, p. 142.

Kingdoms, the Three, of Nature, 1. 118, p. 80 ; t. 140, p. 103.

Klis-ein, and JHn-ein, Greek, t. 194, p. 161.

Kiiix-EiN. kriusta, see Hin-ein; t. 194, p. 161.

L, (and E), Inherent Meanings of, illustrated in English, 1. 119, pp. 82-87.
IiANanAQE, u Minor Universe, t. 63, p. 39 ; the Modelic one, do., Media-
torial, do. ; two Naturismal Methods with, t. 64, 65, 68, pp. 40-43 ;
Soientismal Method repeats the Logic of Naturism, t. 69, p. 44 ; meas-
ures the distribution of the Universe, t. 71, p. 45 ; A New Scibntifio
Uniteesai., t. 74, p. 46 ; entire, distributed by the Alphabet, t. 80, p. 50
distributes the Universe, t. 81, do. ; t. 150, p. 109 ; only accidentally
the leading subject, t. 215, p. 175 ; t. 216, p. 177 ; Angelic, t. 224, p. 182,
Languaoes, some characterized by Vowels, some by Consonants, t. 85, p. 54,
Labdner, Dr. Dionisius, on Steam Navigation of the Ocean, 1. 120, p. 88
Law, of Analogy, not understood, t. 9, p. 4 ; Iriherent and Necessary, t,
62, p. 39 ; the Analogue of a Line, t. 168, p. 141 ; Essential, Indwellin,
of all Being, 1. 199, p. 165 ; Domain of, t. 206, p. 171.
-Leheb, (6er.) equal to lore or -logy, t. 25, p. 20.

INDEX. 213

Lepstob, cited, t. 79, p. 49 ; 1. 156, p. 123.

Lite, on Analogne of Art, t. 54, p. 35.

LiQHTESiNo, the, and the Chemical Elements, 1. 14, p. 11 ; see Dome.

LrmTAET, The, Consonantal, 1. 138, p. 101.

Limitation— Kant, 1. 112, p. 76 ; 1. 121, p. 90 ; 1. 122, 123, p. 91 ; 1. 124, p.
92.

Limitations, see Positings.

Limited, The, see Sounds.

Limiting, The, see Sounds.

Limitosei, t. 210, p. 173.

Line, an Analogue of a Career, t. 54, p. 34; — k, etc., t. 160, p. 130; de-
fined, 1. 165, p. 138; see AhstracCIons.

Linodo-Aetoloot, see Artology.

Lingho-Natdeoloot, see Naturology.

LiNGiro-SorENToLoaT, see Scientology.

Lip-Sounds, f and/, 1. 101, p. 65 ; S and «, 1. 102, do.

Liquidities, 1. 137, p. 100 ; 1. 138, p. 101 ; 1. 143, p. 105.

Liquids, Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60 ; 1. 113, p. 77 ; 1. 138, p. 101 ; distrib-
uted, 1. 143, 144, p. 105.

Litebattjbb, of Existing Languages, how affected by Alwato, 1. 150, p.
109.

Loaio, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41 ; Science of Laws and Principles,
embraced in Analogy, t. 168, p. 141 ; t. 170, p. 142.

LoGioAi. Alphabet, referred to, t. 81, p. 50.

Logos, the. Title-page, 1. 19, p. 17 ; as word-en ding, t. 20, p. 18 ; t. 199,
p. 165 ; the God-Principle, t. 215, 216, p. 176.

-LoGT, as termination, 1. 19, p. 17 ; t. 20, p. 18 ; t. 22, p. 19 ; t. 25, p. 20 ;
for Spencer's Abstract, etc., 1. 161, p. 136 ; for names of New Sciences,
see An,io, Auoio, Tables, Word-building.

Long Eitn, 1. 185, p. 157.

Lbadio, distributed, t. 185, p. 157.

M.

Magi, 1. 158, p. 127.

Mahginal Impeefbotion, alluded to, t. 12, p. 9.
Marked Letters, Accent, etc., 1. 152-156, pp. 119-123.
Masodiism, of Science, t. 56, p. 86.
Matehialoot, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 96.
Materials, see Homogenismus.

Mathbmatioal Elements, and Lingual, Analogy of, 1. 160, p. 130.
Mathematics, Scientifioally Poaitim, 1. 170, p. 143 ; quarrel of, with Na-
tural Science, 1. 174, p. 145 ; peeuUarly true, do.

214 INDEX.

MoCosH, ou LoQio, iffrfe, 1. 177, p. 147.

" Meawino," of Facts — Eiohard Owen, t. 17, p. 14.

MBAHiNas, of Sound, Inherent, see Elements, and Sonnds.

Meohanios, Panaki, 1. 139, p. 102 ; push, pull, etc., t. 217, p. 177.

Mbrb Pebpondebanob, t. 84, p. 54 ; t. 85, p. 55.

Mbtaxs, heavy, 1. 13, p. 10 ; see Dome.

Metaphysics, of Science, 1. 176, p. 146.

HBTAFHYSicA-THEOLoaioAL, See Theologica-Metaphysical.

Method, Universologioal, Condensed Statement of, p. xvi. ; The Ahtioipa
TORT, t. 9, p. 4 ; Inductive, Deductive, 1. 10, 11, pp. 5, 6 ; Universolog-
ioal, restated, t. 219, p. 179.

Methods, in study of Language, t. 64, p. 40.

Mtllions, of words, will be spontaneously formed, 1. 150, p. 108.

Mind, see Human Mind.

MiNiATUBE Uhitbrbb, SBC MinoT Universe.

MnroB UifrvEBSB, every Sphere is one, t. 62, p. 39 ; Language especially,
t. 63, p. 40 ; t. 71, p. 45 ; t. 73, p. 46 ; t. 215, p. 175.

MissioNAET Society, English Church, t. 79, p. 49.

MLAn,io, The GeneraJismuB, 1. 138, p. 101 ; 1. 185, p. 156 ; distributed, t.
185, p. 157.

Models, see Patterns:

MoNosPHEBOLooY, defined, t. 68, 69, p. 44 ; Table No. 6, t. 132, p. 98.

Monotheism, t. 217, p. 178.

MoBALS, see Ethics.

MoBPHOLoaY, the Science of Form, t. 23, p. 19 ; Cosmical Bi-trinacria, etc.,
1. 188-195, pp. 158-162.

MoTHEB-FBiNaiPi.E, NatuTC, t. 56, p. 36.

MoTonj, etc.. see Alphabet.

MoTOLOGY, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97.

Movement, Analogous with Art, t- 50, 51, p. 33.

McELLEE, Max, cited. Note, 1. 113, p. 77.

Mnsio, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41 ; t. 223, p. 181 ; t. 225, p. 183 ;
will be reconstructed by Alwato, t. 227, p. 184.

Mystios, t. 158, p. 127.

N.

Nabaiization, needed in English, t. 93, p. 59; what, how represented, t.
97, p. 62 ; sign of Incomprehensibility, t. 126, p. 94; twang in the nose,
1. 151, p. 113 ; fully defined, 1. 153, p. 120 ; sign of, 1. 156, p. 123 ; t. 168,
pp. 127, 128 ; 1. 183, p. 155 ; t. 205, p. 170; t. 210, p. 173.

Na bals, see Liquids.

IKDEX. 215

Nasoent State, 1. 183, p, 155.

Nation, Great Planetary, of the Future, t. 74, p. 46.

KATDiuLizATioir, of Foreign words, in Alwato, t. 203, p. 167.

Natueai, SoiBiroBS, inexact terms legitimate in, 1. 12, p. 10 ; not the High

Scientific Domain, t. 173, p. 145 ; facts of the, still true ; how ; t. 1T4,

175, do.
Natdkaski, Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211, 218, p. 174.
Natdee, a Domain of the Universe, t. 44, p. 31 ; corresponds to Unism, t.

47, do. ; defined, t. 49, p. 32 ; is Feminine, t. 56, p. 36 ; irregular, non-

Bcientoid, 1. 171, 172, pp. 143, 144 ; in what sense true, 1. 174, 175, p.

145 ; subordinate to Science, t. 206, p. 172 ; t. 209, p. 173 ; see Nature-

Science-and-Art.
NATUBE-SorENOB-and-ART, defined and shown as a Primitive Distribution

of the Universe, t. 47, p. 31 ; defined, t. 49, p. 32 ; t. 51, 52, p. 33 ;

compared to the parts of an Edifice, t. 53, p. 34 ; to a Line, t. 54, do. ;

further defined ; not mere Facts, t. 55, p. 36 ; Nature, Science, and Art,

Indeterminate, t. 183, p. 155.
Natubismds, defined, t. 45, p. 31 ; there is one of every Sphere, t. 62, p. 39.
NATnEoiosT, defined, t. 57, p. 37 ; its scope, t. 60, p. 38 ; t. 61, p. 39 ; of

Speech, t. 68, p. 44 ; t. 74, 75, p. 47 ; 1. 130, p. 96 (Table) ; Aski, 1. 157,

p. 125 ; named and tabulated. Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-213, p. 174.
Natdkoloqt, Soiehtologt,' and Aetoloot, various namings of, t. 205-

211, pp. 170-174 (Tables Nos. 9, 10, 11.)
Natueo-Metaphtbios, Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97.
Neoation— Kant, t. Ill, p. 76 ; t. 121, p. 90; 1. 122, 123, pp. 91, 92; t.

123, 124, p. 92 ; Vocal, 1. 143, p. 104.
Nboattve, see Positive.

New Jebcsalbm, the, dimensions of, 1. 197, p. 164.
NoMOLOGT, Tables, Nos. 4, 5, 1. 130, 181, pp. 96, 97.
NoN-IiroListiSM:, defined, 1. 194, p. 161.
Non-Metals, liglt, 1. 13, p. 10 ; see Dome.

N0ir-Pl.lIEALIZABLE SUBSTAKTIVBS, t. 144, p. 105.

" NoTHnsro," see Silences, Negation, Zero.

NoTHiwGS, Pure, all Abstractions are so, 1. 164, p. 138, and to eud of

chapter.
Notice to F-eadeb, p. x.
Ndmbeb, Elements of, 1. 160, p. 129 ; 1. 167, p. 139 ; t. 216, p. 176.

o.

OBraonoNS, to the possibility of Universology, answered, t.29-40, pp. 22-28.

Objeottve, The, Mau,io, 1. 185, p. 156.

Objeot-Teaohino, fbr Universology and Alwato, 1. 198, p. 165.

216 INDEX.

Odd, and Even, 1. 160, p. 129.

Old Styxe Lahqi;aoe3, 1. 150, p. 109.

-Oloot, see -logy.

Onb, Two, and Theeb, furnish the naminga of Ukism, Duism, aud Tbi

Nisu, t. 2, p. 1 ; t. 46, p. 31.
Ontoiogioai. Alphabet, referred to, t. 81, p. 51.
Ghtoloqt, Tables, Nos. 4, 5, 1. 130, 131, pp. 96, 97.
Obdeb, the First or Primitive, and the " Inverted," t. 53, p. 34 ; Eeverse.

of Discovery, Table No. 9, t. 211, p. 174 ; a priori and a posteriori. Table

No. 9, do.
Oedees, of Vowels and Consonants, t. 98, p. 63 ; Direct and Inverse of

do., 1. 157, p. 124 ; see Methods.
Oeoanismhb, The Grand, subdivides into three Kingdoms, 1. 137, p. 101 ;

1. 140, p. 103; 1. 185, p. 157.
Optiob, Incidence and Eeflection, t. 217, p. 177.
Obki, t. 207, p. 172.
OyBBLAFFnra, alluded to, 1. 12, p. 9.
Owen, Eiohard, cited, t. 17, p. 14; Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 96.

Faibs, of Sounds, see Elements, and Sounds.

Palatal Sounds, 1. 156, p. 123.

Pamtaeohism, the Organic Unity and Unitary Polity of the Humanity of

the Future, t. 218, p. 178 ; t. 229, 232, p. 185 ; see Universal Government.
Paeallelism, 1. 196, 197, pp. 162-164.

Paetiotjlaeization, IndimdmatUm, etc. ; Hwau,io, 1. 184, p. 156.
Paetinqs, and UnitJngs, 1. 160,, p. 130 ; see Elements and Bondle-Koot-

Words.
Pathookomio Lthes — Buchanan, 1. 190, p. 159.
Patteeitb, Working, for our Constructions, 1. 191, p. 160.
Pbeas, To, see Sounds.
Phtlobopht, Ordinary, named, 1. 126, p. 94 ; CardinEU^, Transcendental,

or Eational, do. ; Practical, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97 ; Table No. 5, t.

13(5, p. 97 ; named. Table No. 6, 1. 132, p. 98 ; 1. 157, pp. 125, 126 ; Grand

departments of, Fichte, etc, 1. 158, p. 127.
Phohbtio Alphabet, see Alphabet.
Phonooeapht, Unvocalized, to illustrate Undiacriticised types, t. 154, p.

122 ; see Pitman.
Phonos, the Something-Element of Speech, 1. 124, p. 92, see Eeality.
Phbenoloot, an Ethnical and National, a New Science, how to be found-
ed, t. 226, p. 184.
Physios, (Fauski), Special, Thauski, 1. 139, p. 102.

INDEX. 217

PmiAir, Isaac, referred to, t. 79, p. 49 ; distingniBheg Light and Heavy
Sounds, t. 103, p. 65 ; Extract from Steno-phonograpbio Alphatet of.
Table No. 2, 1. 107, p. 67.

Plan, of Nature, in Organization, t. 84, p. 53 ; in Language, t. 85, p. 54.

Plant, or Tree, Type to illustrate TJniversal Distribution, t. 54, p. 35.

Plato, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 96 ; cited, and classified, 1. 158, p. 128.

Pldmulb, of the Plant, Analogue of Superstructure, t, 54, p. 35.

PLmALiTr-TEKMnrATioNS, 1. 160, p. 129.

PnnTMATisinia, of Speech, Hwaunio, t. 214, p. 175.

Point, of Conjunction (Copulative), Analogue of Art, t. 54, p. 85 ; Ger-
minal, do. ; as Pointer, 1. 160, p. 130 ; defined, 1. 165, p. 138 ; repeats Unit,
t. 167,p. 140 ; Analogue of a Principle, 1. 168, p. 141 ; see Abstractions.

Polity, the Future Human, t. 218, p. 178 ; see Universal Government, and
Pantarchism.

Polytheism,' t. 217, p. 178.

PosmNQS, and Limitations, Abstract, in Space, t. 166, p. 139.

Position, First Normal, The Perpendicular, t. 54, p. 35.

PoBiTivB, and Negaime, reversal of, from Natural and Soientie Standings,
respectively, 1. 164, p. 138 ; 1. 170, p. 142.

" PoBiTivn " SciENOE, SO Called, rank of; The Higher ; t. 175, p. 145.

PosTuBB, and Figure, of Bi-trinaoria, 1. 194, p. 161 ; see Position.

Peeoision, of Alwato, illustrated, 1. 196, p. 162.

Pkeeaob, pp. iii-ix.

Peimitive Elemests, see Ultimate Elements.

Phinoiplfs, only Three ; apparent exceptions, t. 2, 3, p. 1 ; first statement
of, strictly Universal, t. 8, p. 3 ; t. 46, p. 31 ; analogous to Points, 1. 168,
p. 141 ; Universal Scientific, t. 199, p. 166 ; Goveemiso Univeesal, m
various Domains, t. 216, p. 176.

Peooenisu, of Art, Androgyne, as of the child partaking of the nature of
father and mother, t. 56, p. 36.

Peonouns, of Alwato, t. 203, p. 167 ; Table No. 8, t. 204, p. 169.

PnoKDifOiATioN, of the Vowels, t, 92, p. 58 ; t. 94, p. 59 ; of Exceptional
Letters, t. 95, p. 61 ; diacriticised, 1. 152-156, pp. 119-123.

Peoofs, kinds of, that, Sounds have Inbeeent Meakings, 1. 114, p. 78,
and to end of the chapter.

PEOPEitna, Aunio — Swedenborg, 1. 185, p. 157,

Peosthetio, b, 1. 127, p. 94.

PtjiroTDATioiT, Alwaso, 1. 152-156, pp. 119-123 ; Undo-Uxic, t. 165, p. 123.

Puhotcm Vit^, (Point of Life), defined, t. 54, p. 35.

R.

E, (and L), inherent me-anings of, illustrated iu English, 1. 119, pp. 82-87.

218 INDEX.

Bapf, cited, t. 79, p. 49.

BsABiira, art of, badly tanght amoDg ns, t. 106, p. 67.

EEALirr— Kant, the Vowels, t. Ill, p. 76 ; 1. 121, p. 90 ; t. 122, 123, p. 91 ;

1. 124, p. 93 ; 1. 141, p. 104 ; 1. 144, p. 105 ; t. 151, p. 115 ; 1. 179, p. 143 ;

1. 181, p. 149 ; t. 182, p. 155 ; t. 205, p. 171 ; t. 208, p. 172 ; t. 210, p.

173 ; t. 214, p. 175 ; t. 216, p. 176.
Beason, the Pare, the Supreme Faculty iu Science, 1. 175, p. 146 ; — Comte,

Aungio, t. 185, p. 157.
BEOONOII.IATION, Social, t. 217, p. 177; The Grand Pantarchal, t. 218, p.

178 ; t. 241, p. 192 ; t. 244, p. 193 ; see Pantarohism, and Universal

Government.
Ekotakoulaeitt, see Angalarity.
Eeotitdbb, in Morals, t. 217, p. 178.
Eelatiost, converted into Law, t. 206, p. 171.
Eelative, Form (eso) = Postare, 1. 193, p. 161; (i,ia), t. 217, p. 177;

Number (eso), t. 216, p. 176 ; Lingual, do., p. 177.
Eeligiok, named, Table No. 6, 1. 132, p. 98 ; The Pantarchal, irradiating

centre of all Social Affairs, t. 218, p. 178.
Ehetobio, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41.
Boot, Analogue of. Foundation, t. 54, p. 35.
BooT-woBDs, Two-letter or Bi-literal, t. 146, 147, p. 106 ; Number of, t.

149, p. 108 ; Uuiliteral, 1. 151, pp. 109-113 ; Two-Syllable, Mere Boots,

t. 160, pp. 129-135 ; see Elements, Bundle-Eoot-Words.
EuiiB, ruler, see Straightness.

s.

SANBonrr, Aspirates, Cerebrals, etc., t. 156, p. 123 ; Boots, 1. 160, p. 129.

SoHELUHO, cited and classified, 1. 158, pp. 127, 128.

SoiENOE, mast take on a new elevation, t. 17, p. 14 ; defined, t. 22, p. 18 ; a
Domain of Being, t. 44, p. 31 ; corresponds to Daism, t. 47, do. ; again
defined, t. 49, p. 32 ; Line or Perrima, Analogue of, t. 54, p. 35 ; is
Masculine, t. 56, p. 36 ; named. Table No. 6, 1. 182, p. 98 ; The Abstract
the Governing Branch of, 1. 170, p. 143, why, t 171-173, pp. 143-145 ;
The Only True, 1. 171, p. 143 ; new and commanding relation "of, to Gov-
ernment, 1. 199, p. 166 ; presides over Nature, t. 206, p. 172 ; see Na-
ture-Science-and-Art.

SoiBNOES, how many ? a difficult question ; t. 26, p. 21 ; as ninny as there
are Domains of Being, t. 27, p. 22 ; Ending for, Alwali, iu -ski, t. 126,
p. 94 ; 1. 157, pp. 125-127 ; et passim.

SoiENTismis, defined. Vocabulary ; t. 45, p. 31 ; there is one of every
Sphere, t. 62, p. 39.

SoiBNToLooT, defined, t. 58, p. 37 ; is mm, t. 60, p. 38 ; of LLingaage and

INDEX. 219

of the Universe, t. 69-81, pp. 44^51 ; 1. 130, p. 96 (TaWe) ; Oszi, 1. 157,
p. 126 ; Univeraologioal, a third Atatraot Science, t. 168, p. 141 ; TJui-
versologioal, asserts the supremacy of Spirit over Matter, of The Ab-
stract over The Concrete, etc., 1. 175, p. 146 ; jSnal triumph of, what will
be, 1. 198, p. 165 ; t. 210, p. 173; named. Tables, Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-
213, p. 174.

Soiento-Philosophy, Table No. 3, 1. 130, p. 96 ; Table No. 5, 1. 131, p. 97 ;
1. 157, pp. 126, 127.

Seats, of Sound, ihree, Back-Mouth, Middle-Mouth, Front-Mouth, t. 79,
p. 50 ; Table No. 1, t. 94, p. 60 ; t. 103, 'p. 65.

Semiooloh-, Alwaso uses of, 1. 155, p. 122.

Semitio Guttubalizations, 1. 156, p. 123.

Senses, the, opposed to the Eeason, t. 175, p. 145.

SbQDENOES (" Co-SEQDENOES "), 1. 185, p. 157.

Sesquism, = Pneumatismus, t. 214, p. 175.

Shape, see Form.

Shapinhs, of all things to be hereafter understood, 1. 191, p. 160.

Shaueio, t. 184, p. 156 ; distributed, 1. 185, p. 157.

Shaupski, Abatractology — Spencer, 1. 139, p. 102.

-Sho, termination, 1. 151, p. 114.

Short Eun, 1. 185, p. 157.

SigENSKi, see SMaki.

SiLEoiTES, in Speech, the Analogue of Zero, and of Nothing or Neoation
— Kant, t. Ill, p. 76 ; see Negation, and Nothings.

Sixty FocB, a Typical Number, t. 12, p. 9.

-Ski, termination for Science, t. 126, p. 94; 1. 157, p. 125 ; 1. 161, p. 137.

Skiski, Scientology, Tables Nos. 9, 10, 11, t. 211-218, p. 174.

-So, termination, t. 151, p. 114 ; distributed, 1. 185, p. 156.

Solid, (Jctometrical, an Abstraction, t. 165, p. 138 ; t. 166, p. 139.

Something-Element, represented by Vowels, t. Ill, p. 76 ; 1. 124, p. 92 ;
see Eeality.

SoMG, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41.

SoiiNDS, Elementary, of Speech, not always represented by single letters,
t. 99, p. 63 ; exceptional, as Compound Elements, do. ; Light and
Heavy ; Absteaot-oid and Conoret-oid, 1. 101, 102, pp. 64, 65 ; ZigM and
Slach-faced Letters, 1. 102, p. 65 ; distinction seized on by Pitman, t.
103, p. 65 ; in pairs, do., 1. 103, p. 66 (Male and Female) ; illustrated.
Table No. 2, 1. 107, p. 67 ; Inhebent Meanings of, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 83, p.
53 ; t. 84, pp. 53, 54 ; t. 85, p. 54 ; t. 87, p. 55 ; t. 108, p. 68 ; Table
No. 3, 1. 109, pp. 69-75 ; Justification of the assignments of do., 1. 110-
120, pp. 76-89 ; Olaases of, = Laws, 1. 110, p. 76 ; the Vowels plcmrml
siiihmiogeneous, = Eeality — ^Kant, t. Ill, p. 76 ; Consonants = Limits,

220 INDEX.

Heterogeneity, " ImiTATioir " — Kant, t. 112, do. ; The Limited, The
Limiting, to peras, do., p. 11 ; The Ambigu's or Coalescents = Spirit
and Vitality, do. ; names of Classes of, t. 113, do. ; L and E, mean-
ings of, in English, 1. 119, pp. 82-88 ; Cosmic Correspondences of, 1. 121,
p. 90, and to end of chapter ; t. 127, p. 94; Meaning of Ambigu's, t.
129, p. 95 ; Ultimate, and Working Elements, t. 146, p. 106 ; Shobt
Vowels, Marked Letters, etc., 1. 152-156, pp. 119-123 ; arrangement of,
in composition, t. 157, p. 124 ; Light and Heavy, or Thin and Thick,
fitness of, for naming The Abstbaot and The Conoeetb, 1. 178, p. 147 ;
other namings of, TJnintoned, Intoned, — Elsberg, 1. 179, p. 148 ; Conso-
nets and Consonads, do. ; Vowel, have a musical basis — Helmholtz, t.
223, p. 181 ; see Elements, and Seats of Sound.

" SovEBEioNTT, of the Individual," — Warren, t. 217, p. 177.

Spaoe, a Nothing, 1. 165, p. 138 ; Out-, and In-, 1. 169, p. 141 ; 1. 172, p. 144.

Spa-oe-oloot, Table No. 4, t. 130, p. 96.

" Spaces," " Blanks " = Space = Silences, 1. 123, p. 92.

SpEoiALiBxs, onr Scientists mostly so, 1. 10, p. 4 ; special facnlties of, need
training, 1. 12, p. 7 ; in Science, incompetent to judge Universology, t.
12, pp. 7-9 ; 1. 16, p. 12 ; 1. 17, p. 13 ; Universology declines the juris-
diction of, 1. 18, p. 15 ; are tending towards Universology, Note, do. :
who, 1. 139, p. 102 ; learned ants, t. 246, p. 196.

Speoiaxite— Balzac, Table No. 9, t. 211, p. 174.

SpEoiAiizATioN, Shaubio, 1. 184, p. 156.

Speoiaiogt, 1. 139, p. 102.

Speech, Oral, a branch of language, t. 64, p. 41.

Speeoh-Temple, its Portico and Inner Galleries, t. 150, p. 109.

SpELtma BY SororD, t. 91, p. 57.

Spenoee, Herbert, cited, t. 26, p. 21 ; his distribution of the Sciences, t.
139, p. 102, and Note ; an Echosophist, 1. 159, p. 128 ; 1. 161, p. 136; t.
168, p. 141; t. 185, p. 157.

" Spheees," Spiritual, emanated, 1. 180, p. 148.

" Spibct," diifusive emanation, 1. 180, p. 148 ; do. " of Truth," do.

SpmiTDAiisMo EEALrnEB, rank of, 1. 175, p. 146.

SpmiT-woBLD, Hwaunio, 1. 129, p. 95.

Squeezing, and Stretching, 1. 12, p. 10.

Stages, of Mental Evolution, t. 9, p. 4; 1. 10, p. 5; 1. 12, p. 6; see Stories.

Static, The, — Comte, 1. 185, p. 157.

Statoo), etc., see Alphabet, Sounds.

Stopped Vowels, how represented, 1. 154, p. 121.

Stoeies, of Edifloe, t. 54, p. 36.

Steaightness, test of Science, 1. 171, pp. 143, 144 ; possible only in ideal,
1. 172, p. 144; 1. 174, p. 145.

INDEX. 221

Stbeamb, see Career.

Stuffs, Sabstances, Materials ; see Homogenismus, and Keality

SoBDOMiNANOE, t. 84, p. 54; t. 85, p. 55; 1. 119, p. 82.

Sdbjeotite, The, Nauio, 1. 185, p. 156.

Substance, and Fobm, t. 49, p. 32 ; Fobm, and Movement, = Nature, Sci-
ence, and Art, do. ; (Substance), defined, t. 62, p. 38 ; Homogeneous, t.
141, p. 104 ; 1. 166, p. 139 : see Eeallty, and Homogenismus.

SupEEiNOUMBBifOT, its relation to foundation, t. 55, p. 36.

"SuPEEioE Lettebs," dcflued, and uses of, 1. 156, p. 123.

SupEKNoiooT, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 97.

Supeesteuotuke, Analogue of Science, etc., t. 53, p. 34; t. 64, p. 35.

SwEDENBOEG, representative name in Theandrology, t. 129, p. 96 ; cited
for proprium, 1. 185, p. 157 ; Heavens and Hells, or Spiritual Cosmogony
of, 1. 190, p. 159 ; on the Meanings of the Vowels, in the Speech of the
Angels, t. 223-226, pp. 183-184.

Syntax, of Alwato, (Conjugation), t. 200-204 (Table No. 6), pp. 166-169.

" SyjiTHESis," of Hegel and Fichte, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3.

T.

Table of Contents, p. xv.

Tables, No. 1 — The Alphabet, t. 94, p. 60 ; No. 2, Pitmauian Alphabet,
1. 107, p. 67 ; No. 3, Inheeent Meanings of Sounds, 1. 109, p. 69 ; No.
4, Elementism and Elaborism, 1. 130, p. 96 ; No. 5, do., 1. 131, p. 97 ; No.
6, Philosopht, Soienoe, Eeltgion, 1. 132, p. 98 ; No. 7, Conjugation of
THE Alwaso Veeb, t. 203, p. 163 ; No. 8, The Almaso Pronouns, t. 204,
p. 169 ; No. 9, Nature, Science, and Art, in the Order of Discovery, t.

211, p. 174; No3. 10, 11, Naturology, Scientology, Artology, named, t.

212, 213, p. 174.

Taotus Eeuditus, mental, required, in Primitive Word-buUding, t. 148,

p. 107.
Tbohnicals, adaptation of Alwato to use for, 1. 187, p. 158, and to end

of chapter.
Tkmple, the Chemical, t. IS, p. 10 ; 1. 1 6, p. 12 ; of Speech, 1. 150, p. 109 ;

see Dome, Universe.
Tempoeolooy, Table No. 4, 1. 130, p. 96 ; of the Verb, Tenses, t. 200, p.

166.
Teeminal Conveesion into Opposites, of Meanings of Sounds, t. 119,

p. 82.
Teeminations, -io, -ia, 1. 126, p. 93 ; -ski, do., p. 94 ; -so, t. 140, p. 103 ;

-so, -bho, -to, -ski, -11, -ni, 1. 151, pp. 114, 116; for Plui-ality, 1. 160, p.

129.

222 nsDEX.

Th, and Dh, two Sounds of th, in English, 1. 104, 105, p. 66.

Thallatospheee, 1. 145, p. 105.

Theaitdbishiis, Hwaunio, 1. 129, p. 95.

Theolooioa-Metaphtsioai,, First Essay, yielding, 1. 176, p. 146.

" Thesis," of Hegel and FioUe, alluded to, t. 7, p. 3.

Thin, Things, t. 176, p. 146 ; Sounds, t. 178, p. 147 ; Thick, do. ; see

Sounds, and Elements.
THOTTGHT-LDnB, referred to, t. 54, p. 34 ; defined, t. 168, p. 140 ; = Laws,

1. 168, p. 141 ; 1. 170, p. 142.
Thouoht-pootts, t. 168, p. 140 ; 1. 169, p. 141 ; t. 170, pp. 142, 143.
Thodoht-belations— Kant, Hegel, 1. 158, p. 127.
Thought-Spaob, t. 168, p. 140; 1. 169, p. 141 ; i. 170, p. 143.
THODOHT-SuBFAaES, 1. 168, p. 140 ; 1. 170, p. 142.
Tibiwa, see Alwato.
Time, an Abstraction, or Nothing, 1. 165, p. 138.

TlTLE-PAOB, p. 1.

-To, termination, 1. 151, p. 114 ; distributed, 1. 185, p. 156.

ToTisMHS, how same as Trinismus, t. 214, p. 175 ; see "Whole.

TEAN-soENDEirTAi,, The, 1. 126, p. 94 ; 1. 128, p. 95.

Tbee, or Plant, Type to illustrate Universal Distribution, t. 54, p. 35.

Tehtibm, introduced, and naming of, t. 2, p. 1 ; signifies Totality, t. 6, p. 2 ;
hinge-like, do., t. 7, p. 3 ; Compound ; deficit of namings of, do., (t. 7, p.
3); = '^Synthesis," do., referred to, t. 8, p. 4; t. 46, p. 31; echoes to
Art, t. 47, do. ; the Third Universal Principle, related to the Number
Three, t. 82, p. 52; various names of, t. 214, p. 175; see CurJinism, Art-
ism, Artismns, Artology, and Unism-Duism-and-Trinism.

TBonsMus, how same as Totismus, t. 214, p. 175.

Teinitaelas'ism, t. 217, p. 178.

TnuTH, is of two kinds, 1. 175, p. 145.

TwAjfo, in the Nose of the Religious Enthusiast, meaning of, 1. 151, p. 113.

TWO-I-ETTEE EOOT-WOEDS, 1. 146, 147, p. 106.

Ttpe, the Line a, of a Career, t. 54, p. 34 ; Primal and Universal of Being,
t. 55, p. 36 ; Language a, of the Universe, t. 63, p. 40 ; the Ether is so
of Homogenism, 1. 136, p. 100 ; see Tree, or Plant.

u.

UlTEBIOB AHB EeAOTIOITAET CoNSEQDElfOE, LaU,i0, t. 185, p. 157.

Ultimate Elements, defined, t. 146, p. 106.
UifooNDiTioirED, The — Sir Wm. Hamilton, 1. 128, p. 95.
Undipfeeentiated, The, defined, 1. 133, p. 98,
Unbuphoneocs Namhtqs, justified, Note, 1. 139, p. 102.

INDEX. 223,

Unism, introduced, and naming of, t. 2, p. 1 ; various naminga of, t. 4, p.

2 ; referred to, t. 8, p. 4 ; t. 46, p. 31 ; echoes to Nature, t. 47, do. ; the

First Universal Principle, related to the Number One ; hence Elementis-

miis, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 214, p. 175 ; various names of, do.
UinsM-DuisM-AND-TsiNisM, t. 79, p. 50 ; Sociological, t. 217, p. 177.
UNisMirs, how same as Homogenismus, (au) t. 210, t. 173 ; t. 214, p. 175.
Unit, a Thought-point, repeats Point and Thing, t. 107, p. 140 ; in a Sum,

t. 168, do. ; 1. 169, p. 141 ; see Thought-Point.
UmiAniANisir, t. 217, p. 178.
UNrroros, see Partings.
Unht 0? Ststeu, in Education, Preface, p. vii ; in the Universe, 1. 11, p.

5 ; Lingual, t. 150, p. 109 ; in Science, Pliilosophy, Government, Ee-

ligion, t. 218, p. 178; see University.
Univeesai, An AioaT, basis of Universology, t. 8, p. 3 ; t. 9, p. 4 ; t. 62,

p. 39.
Univeesal Govbenment, to result from Universology, Preface, viii ; t.

218, p. 178 ; t. 232, p. 185 ; see Pantarohism.
UifiVEESE, The, the largest Domain of Existence, t. 24, p. 20 ; Subject to

Classification, do. ; not easy to condense the consideration of, t. 42, p.

29 ; an Edifice with Stories, a Tri-Unity, t. 53, p. 34 ; Minor, see Miner

UuiVEBsirr, The Pantarohal, a New Grand Institutional Centre of Learn-
ing, demanded. Preface, p. viii, t. 218, p. 178 ; an Incipient Working,
already founded, t. 244, p. 195.

UNrvEESOLoaioAL Method, Condensed Statement of, p. xv ; t. 219, p.
79 ; t. 239, p. 191 ; t. 242, p. 193.

Untveesoloqt, " Basic Outline of," Preface, p. iii ; a Card respecting, p.
V ; defined, p. 8, t. 3 ; how based, do., t. H, p. 6 ; accounts for irregu-
larity in Nature, t. 16, p. 13 ; declines the jurisdiction of Specialists, t.
18, p. 15 ; farther defined, t. 28, p. 22 ; Objections to the possibility of,
answered, t. 29-39, pp. 22-28 ; the fact of, t. 41, p. 29 ; t. 62, p. 39 ; what
it does in Speech, t. 70, p. 44; Sublime office of, to interpret other
Philosophies, t. 159, p. 128 ; (do., through Alwato, do., and t. 199, p.
165) ; highei- departments of, 1. 170, p. 142, and 1. 198, p. 165 ; definitely
characterized, t. 218, p. 178 ; a Science and a Method, t. 219, p. 179;
further defined and characterized, t. 229, 230, p. 185 ; basis of, mathe-
matical, t. 233, p. 186 ; its First Principles of, t. 234, p. 187 ; Basic Oct-
LINE of, described, t. 236-251, p. 251.

UuLTSirrED, The, 1. 128, p. 95 ; see Hamilton, and Eealitv.

Use, (Construction and Occupancy, Analogue of Art), t. 5.'!, p. 34.

UsKi, t. 207, p. 172.

224 INDEX.

T.

Valotib, of Sounds, Direct and Inverse, t. 157, p. 124; see Sonnds,

Alphabet, Elements.
Veoetablb KraoDou, the, a Minor Universe, t. 62, p. 39 ; named, t. 140,

p. 103 ; 1. 185, p. 157 ; see Minor Universe.
VBRHAOttLAK, of the World, Alwato, t. 74, p. 46 ; t. 150, p. 109 ; t. 235,

p. 188.
VESTIBCI.B, of Speech, the Alphabet, t. 87, p. 56.
VisoEBisM, t. 214, p. 175.
" VisiBLB Speech," Bell, t. 79, p. 49.
VooABtrtABT, pp. xi-xiii.

VooAiinr, Vowel-Element = Something, t. 124, p. 92 ; see Eeality.
Vowels, represented by an, t. 92, p. 58 ; t. 126, p. 93 ; 1. 127, p. 94 ; t.

157,p.l24: as Verb-endings (i, a, o, etc.), t. 202, p. 167 ; t.203,p.l68;

t. 205, p. 170 ; t. 206, p. 171 ; t. 207, p. 172 ; the Unismus of Speech, t.

214, p. 175 ; Swedenborg's account of Meanings of, t. 223-226, pp. 181-

183 ; see Elements, Alphabet, Sounds.
Vowel Soalb, (8), t. 154, p. 121.

w.

Whute, see Twang.

Whitney, Prof. Wm. Dwight, his views adverse to Inherency of Mean-
ing in Sounds, t. 120, p. 88, and Sbte.

Wholb, is the Trinismus, t. 82, p. 52 ; t. 210, p. 173 ; t. 214, p. 175.

"Word," see Logos ; used for "Scriptures," t. 225, p. 182.

WoRD-BuiLDiNa, instanced, t. 21, p. 18 ; Primitive, from Two-letter Eoots,
difficult, 1. 147, 148, p. 107 ; from Working Elements, easy, t. 149, 150,
p. 108 ; Illusthations of, 1. 151, pp. 110-119.

WoEBS, formed by the million, needing no dictionary, 1. 150, p. 108 ;
others requiring one, do. ; meaning of, how rendered definite, 1. 151,
Note, p. 110 ; Compounding of, t. 155, p. 122 ; Two-letter, not so much
Words as Eoots, t. 160, p. 129.

WoKLD Cathedbal, scc Domc.

WoBKiHQ Elembnts, dcflued, t. 146, p. 106.

z.

Zebo, see Silences.

Zhatjbio, 1. 184, p. 156.

Zhadbbki, Concretology — Spencer, t. 139, p. 102,

Cornell University Library

arV1642

The primary synopsis of universology and

III

3 1924 031 195 757
oiin.anx

WM